Вы находитесь на странице: 1из 482

OmniScan ®

Phased Array Module


User’s Manual

Software Version 1.4


DUML057B — November 2005
This manual and the product and programs it describes are protected by the
Copyright Act of Canada, by laws of other countries, and by international treaties,
and therefore may not be reproduced in whole or in part, whether for sale or not,
without the prior written consent from Olympus NDT Canada Inc. Under copyright
law, copying includes translation into another language or format.

© 2003–2005 by Olympus NDT. All rights reserved.

This document was prepared with particular attention to usage to ensure the accuracy
of the information contained therein. It corresponds to the version of the product
manufactured prior to the date appearing on the title page. There may, however, be
some differences between the manual and the product if the product has been
modified thereafter.

The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice.

Software version 1.4


Part number: DUML057B
November 2005

Printed in Canada
Trademarks located at 505, boul. du Parc­
Olympus and the Olympus logo are registered Technologique, Québec (Québec) G1P 4S9,
trademarks of Olympus Corporation. R/D Tech, the Canada.
R/D Tech logo, OmniScan, and the OmniScan logo 1.2 “Software” refers to OmniScan Phased
are registered trademarks, and “Innovation in NDT” Array Software, including all media,
and TomoView are trademarks of Olympus NDT printed materials and electronic
Corporation in Canada, the United States, and/or documentation, as well as any software
other countries. CompactFlash is a U.S. registered updates, add­on components, services,
trademark of SanDisk Corporation. DiskOnChip is a and/or supplements provided subsequent
registered trademark of M­Systems Flash Disk to the initial copy of the Software Product,
Pioneers, Ltd. Ethernet is a trademark of Xerox to the extent that such items are not
Corporation. Hypertronics is a trademark of accompanied by a separate license
Hypertronics Corp. Microsoft, Windows, and the agreement or terms of use.
Windows logo are registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other 1.3 “Licensee” refers to the individual or single
countries. Other company or product names legal entity who signs an acquisition
mentioned in this document may be trademarks or agreement granting, under the terms and
registered trademarks of their respective owners. conditions of the current license, use of the
software.
Software License Agreement for
OmniScan Phased Array Software (All Versions) 2. License
This is a legal agreement between you (either an 2.1 Grant of License: The current license grants
individual person or a single legal entity), who will you, the Licensee, the nonexclusive right to
be referred to in this agreement as “YOU” or as “the install and use the software on any number
licensee,” and Olympus NDT Canada Inc., for the of computers. You may only operate the
software product that accompanies this agreement, software under one of the following two
including any associated media, printed materials, conditions:
and electronic documentation (the “Software”).
Please read the terms and conditions of this a) As data acquisition software, when
agreement carefully before continuing. connected to an R/D Tech® data
acquisition unit; or
Once you have read and accepted the terms and
conditions of this agreement, please note that by b) On any PC, when using a software­
installing, copying, downloading, accessing or enable key supplied by Olympus
otherwise using the software product, you agree to be NDT Canada for that software.
bound by the terms of this agreement.
You may not, without the prior written
If you refuse the agreement, or if you disagree with authorization of Olympus NDT Canada
any of the terms and conditions outlined herein, Inc., partially or completely decompile,
please note that in this case you may not use the manipulate, modify, loan, sell, rent or lease
software under any circumstances. If you have the Software, or distribute any product
already purchased the Software, please return it to derived from it.
Olympus NDT Canada or to the point of Purchase for
2.2 Olympus NDT Canada’s Ownership: THE
a full refund. SOFTWARE IS DESIGNED AND
AGREEMENT MANUFACTURED BY Olympus NDT
Canada AND REMAINS ITS EXCLUSIVE
1. Definitions
PROPERTY. THE SOFTWARE IS NOT
1.1 “Olympus NDT Canada Inc.” is a SOLD, BUT GRANTED UNDER LICENSE.
corporation legally constituted under the The Licensee acknowledges that the
laws of Canada and whose head office is Software is proprietary to Olympus NDT

iii
Canada Inc., and that Olympus NDT data, or other incidental or consequential
Canada retains all right, title, and interest damages arising from the use of the
in the Software, including, without Software. In some cases, the limitation or
limitation, all copyrights and other exclusion of responsibility for damages
proprietary rights. You may not use, may be prohibited by law.
reproduce, sublicense, distribute, or
5.2 In no event shall Olympus NDT Canada
dispose of the Software, in whole or in part,
other than as permitted under this Inc.’s liability under this agreement exceed
the amount of one hundred dollars ($100)
Agreement.
CDN. This amount is subject to applicable
3. Copyright laws.

3.1 The Software and accompanying 6. Export


documentation is owned by Olympus NDT
6.1 The Licensee may not export or re-export
Canada and is protected by US and
Canadian copyright laws and international the Software in whole or in part.
treaty provisions, as well as by any other 6.2 In addition, the Licensee may not export
rights and treaties pertaining to intellectual any service or action deemed a direct
property that grant Olympus NDT Canada product of the Software (i) into any country
all rights over the Software. (or to a national or resident of any country)
or to any individual the Licensee has
4. Warranty
reason to believe intends to use the
4.1 Olympus NDT Canada Inc. licenses the Software components to design, develop or
Software on an “AS IS” basis. Olympus manufacture nuclear, chemical or
NDT Canada guarantees, for a period of biological weapons, or (ii) to any nation,
one year after delivery, that the Software state, or individual under exportation
will perform substantially in accordance restrictions imposed by the government of
with accompanying end-user Canada.
documentation. This warranty is void in
the event of damage arising from accident 7. Governing Law
or improper use of the Software. Under the 7.1 This Agreement is governed by and
terms of this warranty, Olympus NDT construed in accordance with the laws of
Canada accepts sole responsibility only for the province of Quebec in Canada. If any
Software that is unusable due to a defect provision of this Agreement is found by a
attributable to Olympus NDT Canada. In competent court of law to be unenforceable
the event that Olympus NDT Canada Inc. or invalid, the balance of this Agreement
accepts responsibility under these shall remain enforceable according to its
circumstances, Olympus NDT Canada will terms.
replace the Software, or, at its discretion,
refund monies paid. Olympus NDT 8. Complete Understanding
Canada grants no other warranty, explicit 8.1 This Agreement constitutes the entire
or implicit, concerning the Software,
Agreement between the parties concerning
including, but not limited to, all
the use of the Software and replaces any
compliance warranties for any use or previous written or verbal debate,
market value whatsoever.
negotiation, or agreement. No modification
5. Limitation of Liability to this license is valid without the express
written consent of Olympus NDT Canada
5.1 In no event shall Olympus NDT Canada Inc.
Inc. be held liable for any damage
whatsoever, including loss of revenue or

iv
Limited Warranty or claims of any nature shall be binding on or obligate
Olympus NDT Canada Inc. warrants the hardware to Olympus NDT Canada Inc.
be free of any defects in materials or workmanship This agreement is governed by the laws of the
for a period of twelve (12) months from the date of province of Quebec, Canada. Each of the parties
purchase under normal use and service. Olympus hereto irrevocably attorns to the jurisdiction of the
NDT Canada Inc. warrants the software programs to courts of the province of Quebec and further agrees
be free of any defects in material or workmanship for to commence any litigation which may arise
a period of ninety (90) days from the date of hereunder in the courts located in the judicial district
purchase. These warranties are limited to the original of Quebec.
purchase of the product and are not transferable.
Technical Support
Olympus NDT Canada Inc. does not warrant that the
Olympus NDT Canada Inc. is firmly committed to
functions of the software will meet your requirements
providing the highest level of customer service and
or that operation of the software will be
uninterrupted or error free. You assume product support. If you experience any difficulties
when using our product, or if it fails to operate as
responsibility for selecting the software to achieve
described in the documentation, we suggest you first
your intended results, and for the use and results
obtained from the software. Nevertheless, Olympus consult the user’s manual, and then, if you are still in
need of assistance, contact our After-Sales Service by
NDT Canada Inc. warrants that, at the shipping date,
referring to the information and forms provided in
the software functions and performances will comply,
the last three pages of this manual.
for the main part, with the ones defined in the
documentation. EMC Directive Compliance
Olympus NDT Canada will refund, repair, or replace This equipment generates and uses radio frequency
any product component or documentation, at its energy, and if not installed and used properly (that is,
option and at no additional charge, if found defective in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s
within the warranty period. The purchaser is instructions), may cause interference. The
responsible for returning the product to Olympus OmniScan PA has been tested and found to comply
NDT Canada Inc. with the limits for an industrial device in accordance
with the specifications of the EMC directive.
Olympus NDT Canada Inc. will not be held However, it should not be used in a residential,
responsible in any way whatsoever for damage commercial, or light industrial environment.
resulting from improper installation, accident,
misuse, or from service or modification of the Safety
product by anyone other than Olympus NDT Canada This instrument is an instrument of Class 1 and
Inc. or an authorized Olympus NDT service center. installation category II. Before applying power, verify
that the correct safety precautions are taken (see the
Olympus NDT Canada Inc. will not be held
following warnings). In addition, note the external
responsible in any way whatsoever for direct,
indirect, special, incidental, or consequential markings on the instrument that are described under
Safety Symbols.
damages resulting from possession, use, improper
installation, accident, service, modification, or Warnings
malfunction of the product (including, without
• Carefully read the instructions contained in the
limitation, damages for loss of business profits,
user’s manual prior to powering on the
business interruption, loss of business information, or
instrument.
other pecuniary loss).
• Keep the user’s manual in a safe place for
This warranty is in lieu of all other warranties, further reference.
whether oral, written, expressed, or implied,
• Follow the installation and operation
including any warranty of merchantability or fitness
procedures.
for a particular purpose, and no other representation

v
• Imperatively respect the safety warnings on the addition, omitting to take appropriate precautions
instrument and in the user’s manual. could void your limited warranty.
• Before turning on the instrument, you must The basic rules of ESD control are:
connect the protective earth terminal of the
instrument to the protective conductor of the 1. Handle ESD-sensitive components only in
(mains) power cord. The mains plug shall only protected work areas. Always ground yourself
be inserted in a socket outlet provided with a when handling ESD-sensitive components or
protective earth contact. You must not negate assemblies. Be sure to use the proper
the protective action by using an extension cord maintenance and work procedures in
(power cable) without a protective conductor conjunction with the type of material.
(grounding). Grounding one conductor of a 2. Always use a conductive or shielding container
two-conductor outlet is not sufficient protection. during storage or transportation of ESD-
• Only fuses with the required rated current, sensitive components or assemblies (for ex.,
voltage, and specified type (normal blow, slow printed circuit boards). The materials used must
blow, quick acting, etc.) should be used. Do not create a Faraday cage, which will isolate the
use repaired fuses or short-circuited fuse contents from electrostatic charges.
holders. To do so could cause an electric shock 3. Open ESD-safe containers only at a static-safe
or fire hazard. workstation. Such a workstation will include
• Whenever it is likely that the ground protection equipment to perform the three critical
is impaired, you must make the instrument functions: grounding, isolation, and
inoperative and secure it against any neutralization.
unintended operation. At the static-safe workstation, follow these
• The instrument must be connected only to a procedures before beginning any work:
power source corresponding to the type
• Put on your wrist strap or foot grounding
indicated on the rating plate.
devices.
• If the equipment is used in a manner not
• Test your grounding devices, to ensure that they
specified by the manufacturer, the protection
are functioning properly.
provided by the equipment may be impaired.
• Check all grounding cords to make sure they are
• Do not install substitute parts or perform any
properly connected to ground, ensuring the
unauthorized modification to the instrument.
effective dissipation of electrostatic charges.
• Service instructions, when applicable, are for
• If you have an ion generator, turn it on. This will
trained service personnel. To avoid dangerous
help dissipate static charges from any
electric shock, do not perform any service unless
nonconductive materials.
qualified to do so. For any problem or question
regarding this apparatus, contact Olympus NDT • Make sure that your work surface is clean and
Canada Inc. or an authorized Olympus NDT clear of unnecessary materials, particularly
representative. common plastics.
• When handling electronic devices, hold the
Electrostatic Discharge Precautions
components by the plastic edges. Avoid
If, for any reason, you have to disassemble your touching the metal leads.
instrument or touch any internal component, make
• When passing loaded boards or components
sure you take all the necessary precautions against
between individuals, both individuals must be
electrostatic discharges (ESD). Electrostatic
grounded to the same ground point or potential.
discharges may be responsible for damaging or even
blowing electronic components in your system. • Avoid bringing components in contact with
Electrostatic damage to components can take the your clothing, hair, or other nonconductive
form of upset or even catastrophic system failures. In materials.

vi
The above procedures are only a summary of the correctly performed or adhered to, could result in
measures to be taken against electrostatic discharges. personal injury. Do not proceed beyond a WARNING
Please consult the literature dedicated to that topic sign until the indicated conditions are fully
for more details. understood and met.
WEEE Directive

CAUTION

In accordance with European Directive 2002/96/EC The CAUTION sign denotes a hazard. It calls attention
on Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment, this to an operating procedure, practice, or the like,
symbol indicates that the product must not be which, if not correctly performed or adhered to,
disposed of as unsorted municipal waste, but should could result in material damage, particularly to the
be collected separately. Refer to your local Olympus product, destruction of part or all of the product, or
distributor for return and/or collection systems loss of data. Do not proceed beyond a CAUTION sign
available in your country. until the indicated conditions are fully understood
and met.
Safety Symbols and Notes

Hazard symbol referring to the instruction manual: Note


the product is marked with this symbol when it is
necessary for you to refer to the instruction manual in The Note sign calls attention to an operating
order to protect yourself against personal injury or to procedure, practice, or the like, that requires special
protect against damage to the product. If applicable, attention. A Note also denotes related, parenthetical
this symbol denotes an electric shock hazard lower information that is useful but not imperative.
than 1,000 volts. (To find the safety notices in the
instruction manual, consult the Index under
“Warnings” and “Cautions” entries.)

IMPORTANT

Hazardous high-voltage symbol referring to the The IMPORTANT sign calls attention to a note that
instruction manual: the product is marked with this provides important information or information
symbol when it is necessary for you to refer to the essential to the completion of a task.
instruction manual in order to protect yourself
against an electric shock hazard higher than
1,000 volts. (To find the safety notices in the
instruction manual, consult the Index under
Tip
“Warnings” and “Cautions” entries.)

The Tip sign calls attention to a type of note that


helps you apply the techniques and procedures
described in the manual to your specific needs, or
WARNING
that provides hints on how to use effectively the
capabilities of the product.
The WARNING sign denotes a hazard. It calls attention
to a procedure, practice, or the like, which, if not

vii
viii
Table of Contents

Table of Contents ............................................................................................. ix

1. Introduction .................................................................................................. 1
1.1 Manual Organization ..................................................................................................... 1
1.2 Conventions .................................................................................................................... 3

2. New Features of the OmniScan PA .......................................................... 5


2.1 Phased Array Acquisition Modules ............................................................................ 5
2.1.1 Supported Models ............................................................................................... 5
2.1.2 Main Differences between Acquisition Modules ............................................ 5
2.2 New Characteristics ...................................................................................................... 6
2.2.1 General Functions ................................................................................................ 6
2.2.2 Data Storage ......................................................................................................... 7
2.2.3 Ultrasound Ruler Units ....................................................................................... 8
2.2.4 Display Menu ....................................................................................................... 8
2.2.5 Wizards for Groups and Focal Laws ................................................................ 9
2.2.6 Calibration Procedures and Parameters ......................................................... 10
2.2.7 Reading Fields and Inspection Information .................................................. 11
2.2.8 Predefined Setups .............................................................................................. 12
2.2.9 External Digital Inputs ...................................................................................... 12
2.3 Software Options .......................................................................................................... 13
2.3.1 OmniScan PA Functions ................................................................................... 13
2.3.2 TomoView Software Functions ........................................................................ 13
2.3.3 Multiple-Group Configuration ........................................................................ 13
2.4 Memory Capacity ......................................................................................................... 14

3. Overview ..................................................................................................... 15
3.1 Rulers/Scales .................................................................................................................. 15
3.1.1 Scan Axis ............................................................................................................. 15

Table of Contents ix
3.1.2 Index Axis ........................................................................................................... 16
3.1.3 Amplitude Axis .................................................................................................. 16
3.1.4 Ultrasound Axis ................................................................................................. 17
3.1.5 Palette Function .................................................................................................. 18
3.1.6 VPA or Angle Function ..................................................................................... 19
3.2 Outline Colors ............................................................................................................... 20
3.2.1 Option Buttons ................................................................................................... 20
3.2.2 Reading Fields .................................................................................................... 21

4. Software Installation ................................................................................. 23

5. Startup .......................................................................................................... 25

6. Reference Charts ........................................................................................ 27


6.1 Function Keys ................................................................................................................ 27
6.2 Menu Structure ............................................................................................................. 31

7. Menu Descriptions .................................................................................... 37


7.1 File Menu ....................................................................................................................... 37
7.1.1 File ........................................................................................................................ 37
7.1.2 Report .................................................................................................................. 40
7.1.3 Format ................................................................................................................. 41
7.1.4 User Field ............................................................................................................ 42
7.1.5 Notes .................................................................................................................... 42
7.2 Reading Menu ............................................................................................................... 43
7.2.1 Result ................................................................................................................... 43
7.2.2 Cursors ................................................................................................................ 55
7.2.3 Table ..................................................................................................................... 56
7.2.4 Export .................................................................................................................. 57
7.3 Utilities Menu ................................................................................................................ 57
7.3.1 Pref. ...................................................................................................................... 57
7.3.2 System .................................................................................................................. 57
7.3.3 Service .................................................................................................................. 58
7.3.4 Options ................................................................................................................ 60
7.3.5 Network .............................................................................................................. 60
7.4 UT Menu ........................................................................................................................ 61
7.4.1 General ................................................................................................................ 61
7.4.2 Pulser ................................................................................................................... 62
7.4.3 Receiver ............................................................................................................... 62
7.4.4 Beam .................................................................................................................... 65
7.4.5 Advanced ............................................................................................................ 65

x Table of Contents
7.5 Scan Menu ..................................................................................................................... 66
7.5.1 Encoder ............................................................................................................... 66
7.5.2 Synchro ................................................................................................................ 67
7.5.3 Area ..................................................................................................................... 68
7.5.4 Start ...................................................................................................................... 69
7.5.5 Data ...................................................................................................................... 69
7.6 Display Menu ................................................................................................................ 70
7.6.1 Selection .............................................................................................................. 70
7.6.2 Rulers ................................................................................................................... 77
7.6.3 Zoom .................................................................................................................... 79
7.6.4 Color .................................................................................................................... 81
7.6.5 Properties ............................................................................................................ 83
7.7 Probe/Part Menu ........................................................................................................... 87
7.7.1 Select .................................................................................................................... 88
7.7.2 Position ................................................................................................................ 94
7.7.3 Characterize ........................................................................................................ 95
7.7.4 Parts ..................................................................................................................... 96
7.7.5 Wizard ................................................................................................................. 97
7.8 PGM Probe Menu ......................................................................................................... 97
7.8.1 Configuration ..................................................................................................... 97
7.8.2 Aperture .............................................................................................................. 99
7.8.3 Beam .................................................................................................................. 100
7.8.4 Laws ................................................................................................................... 100
7.8.5 Wizard ............................................................................................................... 101
7.9 Gate/Alarm Menu ...................................................................................................... 101
7.9.1 Gate .................................................................................................................... 101
7.9.2 Alarms ............................................................................................................... 104
7.9.3 Output ............................................................................................................... 105
7.9.4 DAC/TCG ......................................................................................................... 106
7.9.5 Thickness .......................................................................................................... 109
7.10 Calibration Menu ....................................................................................................... 110
7.10.1 Phased Array .................................................................................................... 110
7.10.2 Axis .................................................................................................................... 112
7.10.3 TCG .................................................................................................................... 113
7.10.4 Code .................................................................................................................. 113
7.11 User Menu .................................................................................................................. 114

8. General Procedures .................................................................................. 115


8.1 Setting the Date and Time ......................................................................................... 115
8.2 Setting the Storage Mode .......................................................................................... 117
8.3 Selecting the Measurement Unit .............................................................................. 119
8.4 Configuring the Display ............................................................................................ 119

Table of Contents xi
8.4.1 Changing the Display ...................................................................................... 119
8.4.2 Selecting the Ultrasound Ruler Unit ............................................................. 120
8.4.3 Displaying the Gates, the Cursors, the TCG Curve, or the Grid .............. 120
8.4.4 Configuring A-Scan, B-Scan, C-Scan, and FFT View Options ................... 121
8.5 Configuring the User Menu ...................................................................................... 123
8.6 Configuring the Digital Input ................................................................................... 125
8.7 Creating a Color Palette ............................................................................................. 126
8.7.1 Color Palette File Format ................................................................................ 127
8.7.2 Color Palette Rules ........................................................................................... 129
8.7.3 Changing the Amplitude Color Palette ........................................................ 130
8.7.4 Changing the TOFD Palette ........................................................................... 132
8.7.5 Changing the Depth Color Palette ................................................................ 133
8.7.6 Loading a Color Palette ................................................................................... 135
8.8 Importing a Focal Law File ....................................................................................... 136
8.9 Linking a Procedure to a Setup on the OmniScan PA ........................................... 139
8.10 Making Reports .......................................................................................................... 140
8.10.1 Configuring a Report ...................................................................................... 140
8.10.2 Printing a Report from a Remote Computer ............................................... 144
8.10.3 Changing the Company Logo ........................................................................ 145
8.11 Verifying and Programming Acquisition Module Options ................................. 146
8.12 Connecting the OmniScan MX Directly to a Computer (Windows XP) ............ 148
8.12.1 Connecting the Hardware (Windows XP) ................................................... 148
8.12.2 Configuring the Remote Computer (Windows XP) ................................... 148
8.12.3 Creating a User Account on the Remote Computer (Windows XP) ........ 152
8.12.4 Creating a Shared Folder on the Remote Computer (Windows XP) ....... 154
8.12.5 Configuring the OmniScan MX (Windows XP) .......................................... 158
8.12.6 Saving OmniScan PA Data on the Remote Computer (Windows XP) .... 159
8.13 Connecting the OmniScan Directly to a Computer (Windows 2000) ................ 159
8.13.1 Connecting the Hardware (Windows 2000) ................................................ 159
8.13.2 Configuring the Remote Computer (Windows 2000) ................................ 159
8.13.3 Creating a User Account on the Remote Computer (Windows 2000) ..... 162
8.13.4 Creating a Shared Folder on the Remote Computer (Windows 2000) .... 166
8.13.5 Configuring the OmniScan MX (Windows 2000) ....................................... 169
8.13.6 Saving OmniScan PA Data on the Remote Computer (Windows 2000) . 170
8.14 Connecting the OmniScan MX to a Network ........................................................ 170

9. File Management Procedures ................................................................ 173


9.1 File Manager Description .......................................................................................... 173
9.1.1 Function Keys Used ......................................................................................... 173
9.1.2 Interface ............................................................................................................. 174
9.1.3 Navigation ........................................................................................................ 176
9.2 Saving Files .................................................................................................................. 178

xii Table of Contents


9.2.1 Saving a Setup .................................................................................................. 179
9.2.2 Saving a Data File ............................................................................................ 181
9.3 Opening Files .............................................................................................................. 182
9.3.1 Setup Files ......................................................................................................... 182
9.3.2 Data Files ........................................................................................................... 184
9.3.3 Image Files ........................................................................................................ 186
9.3.4 Report Files ....................................................................................................... 189
9.3.5 Multimedia Files .............................................................................................. 191
9.4 Locking and Unlocking a Setup ............................................................................... 192

10. Probe Management Procedures ............................................................. 197


10.1 Defining a Probe ........................................................................................................ 197
10.2 Importing and Exporting a Probe ........................................................................... 200
10.3 Defining a Wedge ...................................................................................................... 203
10.4 Importing and Exporting a Wedge ......................................................................... 208
10.5 Characterizing a Probe .............................................................................................. 210
10.6 Defining the Part to Inspect ...................................................................................... 213

11. Calibration Procedures ........................................................................... 215


11.1 Sound Velocity Calibration ...................................................................................... 215
11.1.1 Sound Velocity Using Radius ........................................................................ 216
11.1.2 Sound Velocity Using Depth .......................................................................... 219
11.1.3 Sound Velocity Using Thickness ................................................................... 222
11.2 Wedge Delay Calibration .......................................................................................... 224
11.2.1 Wedge Delay Using Radius ........................................................................... 226
11.2.2 Wedge Delay Using Depth ............................................................................. 230
11.2.3 Wedge Delay for Thickness ............................................................................ 235
11.3 Sensitivity Calibration ............................................................................................... 238
11.3.1 Angle-Beam Scan Using a Side-drilled Hole ............................................... 238
11.3.2 Angle-Beam Scan Using a Radius ................................................................. 243
11.3.3 Zero-Degree Scan ............................................................................................ 249
11.4 TCG Calibration ......................................................................................................... 253
11.5 Encoder Calibration .................................................................................................. 256

12. Inspection Procedures with Ready-Made Setups .............................. 261


12.1 Weld Inspection: RD_Linear60deg_oneLine.ops Setup ....................................... 261
12.1.1 Recommended Probe and Wedge Combinations ....................................... 262
12.1.2 Settings and Calibration ................................................................................. 262
12.1.3 Inspection ......................................................................................................... 276
12.1.4 Analysis Tools and Reporting ........................................................................ 277
12.2 Weld Inspection: RD_Sectorial_oneLine.ops Setup .............................................. 279

Table of Contents xiii


12.2.1 Recommended Probe and Wedge Combinations ....................................... 280
12.2.2 Settings and Calibration ................................................................................. 280
12.2.3 Inspection .......................................................................................................... 294
12.2.4 Analysis Tools and Reporting ........................................................................ 295
12.3 Weld Inspection: RD_Weld_1side_Linear.ops Setup ............................................ 297
12.3.1 Recommended Probe and Wedge Combinations ....................................... 298
12.3.2 Settings and Calibration ................................................................................. 298
12.3.3 Inspection .......................................................................................................... 313
12.3.4 Analysis Tools and Reporting ........................................................................ 314
12.4 Weld Inspection: RD_Weld_1side_Sectorial.ops Setup ........................................ 316
12.4.1 Recommended Probe and Wedge Combinations ....................................... 317
12.4.2 Settings and Calibration ................................................................................. 317
12.4.3 Inspection .......................................................................................................... 333
12.4.4 Analysis Tools and Reporting ........................................................................ 334
12.5 Flaw Detection: RD_FlawDetector_35-70SW.ops Setup ....................................... 336
12.5.1 Recommended Probe and Wedge Combinations ....................................... 337
12.5.2 Settings and Calibration ................................................................................. 337
12.5.3 Inspection .......................................................................................................... 350
12.5.4 Analysis Tools and Reporting ........................................................................ 350
12.6 Corrosion Detection: RD_Linear0deg_corrosion_oneLine.ops Setup ............... 351
12.6.1 Recommended Probe and Wedge Combinations ....................................... 352
12.6.2 Settings and Calibration ................................................................................. 352
12.6.3 Inspection .......................................................................................................... 361
12.6.4 Analysis Tools and Reporting ........................................................................ 362

13. Inspection-related Procedures ............................................................... 365


13.1 Setting an Alarm ........................................................................................................ 365
13.2 Setting an Output ....................................................................................................... 367
13.3 Using the Zoom Function ......................................................................................... 369
13.4 Configuring a Thickness C-Scan .............................................................................. 371
13.5 Configuring the DAC Curve Manually .................................................................. 376
13.6 Configuring the TCG Curve Manually ................................................................... 380
13.7 Setting Up a Scan Using Encoders .......................................................................... 383
13.8 Configuring Gain Reference Levels ........................................................................ 385
13.9 Working with Multiple Groups ............................................................................... 387
13.9.1 Adding and Removing a Group .................................................................... 387
13.9.2 Linking and Unlinking Groups ..................................................................... 390
13.10 Configuring and Building a Defect Table ............................................................. 394
13.11 Importing OmniScan PA Data into TomoView ................................................... 398

xiv Table of Contents


Appendix A: Acquisition Module Description and Replacement
Procedure ................................................................................................... 401
A.1 General Specifications ................................................................................................ 401
A.2 Connectors ................................................................................................................... 402
A.3 Replacement Procedure ............................................................................................. 403
A.4 Fan Filter Cleaning Procedure .................................................................................. 405

Appendix B: OMNI-M-PA1616 Module Specifications ......................... 407


B.1 Acoustic Specifications .............................................................................................. 407
B.2 Acquisition Specifications ......................................................................................... 408
B.3 Data Specifications ..................................................................................................... 409

Appendix C: OMNI-M-PA16128 Module Specifications ....................... 411


C.1 Acoustic Specifications .............................................................................................. 411
C.2 Acquisition Specifications ......................................................................................... 412
C.3 Data Specifications ..................................................................................................... 413

Appendix D: OMNI-M-PA16128PR Module Specifications ................. 415


D.1 Acoustic Specifications .............................................................................................. 415
D.2 Acquisition Specifications ......................................................................................... 416
D.3 Data Specifications ..................................................................................................... 417

Appendix E: OMNI-M-PA3232 Module Specifications ......................... 419


E.1 Acoustic Specifications .............................................................................................. 419
E.2 Acquisition Specifications ......................................................................................... 420
E.3 Data Specifications ..................................................................................................... 421

Appendix F: OMNI-M-PA32128 Module Specifications ........................ 423


F.1 Acoustic Specifications .............................................................................................. 423
F.2 Acquisition Specifications ......................................................................................... 424
F.3 Data Specifications ..................................................................................................... 425

Appendix G: OMNI-M-PA32128PR Module Specifications ................. 427


G.1 Acoustic Specifications .............................................................................................. 427
G.2 Acquisition Specifications ......................................................................................... 428
G.3 Data Specifications ..................................................................................................... 429

List of Figures ................................................................................................. 431

List of Tables ................................................................................................... 441

Index ................................................................................................................. 443

Table of Contents xv
xvi Table of Contents
1. Introduction

The OmniScan® MX is an innovative and portable multitechnology NDT


(nondestructive testing) instrument. It is suitable for various applications due to a
modular design. The phased array acquisition module, which we refer to as the
“OmniScan PA,” is used with the OmniScan Phased Array Software.

1.1 Manual Organization

Note: This manual assumes that you have read the OmniScan® MX User’s
Manual (part number DUMG060x) and that you understand its contents,
especially on how to navigate the OmniScan interface.

This manual contains a description and instructions on use of the system. It is


organized to allow progressive understanding of the different functions of the
software. Each section, however, is complete in itself.

• “New Features of the OmniScan PA” on page 5


Contains the new and modified features of the OmniScan PA version 1.4.
• “Overview” on page 15
Contains information about rulers and outlines displayed in the OmniScan PA
software.
• “Software Installation” on page 23
Contains information about installation and startup of the OmniScan PA
software.

Introduction 1
• “Startup” on page 25
Contains the procedure to start up the system.
• “Reference Charts” on page 27
Contains the description of the function keys and the structure of the menus,
submenus, and options found in the OmniScan PA software.
• “Menu Descriptions” on page 37
Contains information about the commands and options found in the
OmniScan PA software menus and submenus.
• “General Procedures” on page 115
Contains general procedures that affect the OmniScan PA interface as a whole.
• “File Management Procedures” on page 173
Contains techniques and procedures that relate to file management on the
OmniScan PA.
• “Probe Management Procedures” on page 197
Contains procedures that relate to probe configuration and management on the
OmniScan PA.
• “Calibration Procedures” on page 215
Contains calibration procedures for various types of inspections.
• “Inspection Procedures with Ready-Made Setups” on page 261
Contains calibration, inspection, and analysis procedures for various types of
inspections using factory setups.
• “Inspection-related Procedures” on page 365
Contains procedures that relate to inspections using the OmniScan Phased Array
Software.
• “Acquisition Module Description and Replacement Procedure” on page 401
Contains a general description applying to all models and the replacement
procedure.
• “OMNI-M-PA1616 Module Specifications” on page 407
Contains the specifications for the acquisition module model OMNI-M-PA1616.
• “OMNI-M-PA16128 Module Specifications” on page 411
Contains the specifications for the acquisition module model OMNI-M-PA16128.

2 Chapter 1
• “OMNI-M-PA16128PR Module Specifications” on page 415
Contains the specifications for the acquisition module model OMNI-M-
PA16128PR.
• “OMNI-M-PA3232 Module Specifications” on page 419
Contains the specifications for the acquisition module model OMNI-M-PA3232.
• “OMNI-M-PA32128 Module Specifications” on page 423
Contains the specifications for the acquisition module model OMNI-M-PA32128.
• “OMNI-M-PA32128PR Module Specifications” on page 427
Contains the specifications for the acquisition module model OMNI-M-
PA32128PR.

1.2 Conventions

In a procedure containing several steps, the operations that the user has to execute are
numbered 1, 2, 3… The symbol “♦” is used to indicate a procedure containing only
one step, or secondary steps. Lowercase letters (a, b, c…) can also be used to indicate
secondary steps in a complex procedure.

SMALL CAPITALS are used to identify any term marked as is on the instrument, such as
the names of connectors, buttons, indicator lights, etc. SMALL CAPITALS are also used
to identify key names of the computer keyboard.

All the terms that are used in the interface, such as the names of menus, commands,
dialog boxes, text boxes, and options, are presented in bold print.

The abbreviation “N/A” is used to indicate either not applicable or not available at time
of press.

Navigation through the OmniScan PA interface is described according to a specific


syntax. For example, instead of writing: “Press the Menu key, then select the File
menu, the Format submenu, the View option button, and then the Current Layout
option,” the following syntax is used: File > Format > View > Current Layout.

• The first element of a command sequence refers to a first-level command, that is, a
main menu.
• A second element refers to a second-level command, that is, a submenu.
• A third element refers to a third-level command, that is, an option button.

Introduction 3
• A fourth element refers to a fourth-level command, that is, a choice from an
option list (when applicable).
For more information about the interface, see chapter 4, “OmniScan Interface,” of the
OmniScan MX User’s Manual.

Note: The screen illustrations found in this manual were prepared with the
software version available at time of press; they may slightly differ from what
you see on the OmniScan PA screen according to the software version you are
using. Furthermore, the screen illustrations are printed using the default
OmniScan PA color palette; their look may be different if you use another color
palette.

4 Chapter 1
2. New Features of the OmniScan PA

Thank you for using the OmniScan PA module. This chapter describes the differences
and the added features of the 1.4 version.

2.1 Phased Array Acquisition Modules

A number of new acquisition modules are now offered for the OmniScan MX
platform.

2.1.1 Supported Models


The OmniScan Phased Array Software supports the phased array acquisition modules
available with the OmniScan MX. These modules are the following:

• OMNI-M-PA1616
• OMNI-M-PA16128
• OMNI-M-PA16128PR
• OMNI-M-PA3232
• OMNI-M-PA32128
• OMNI-M-PA32128PR

2.1.2 Main Differences between Acquisition Modules


This section presents the principal differences between acquisition modules.

Number of active elements per beam (aperture): 16 or 32

Maximum number of elements: 16, 32, or 128

New Features of the OmniScan PA 5


Models without the “PR” letter
For focal laws in pitch and catch inspections, the combined number of pulser and
receiver channels you can use is limited to the maximum number of channels in the
aperture.

For example, for the OMNI-M-PA16128, 16 is the maximum number. Therefore the
number of channels can be anywhere between 2 and 16 (8 pulsers and 8 receivers, 4
pulsers and 12 receivers, 6 pulsers and 6 receivers, etc.).

These models have a lower output impedance; therefore there is a higher voltage in
the load compared to the “PR” model.

Models with the “PR” letter


For focal laws in pitch and catch inspections, the number of pulser channel as for the
number of receiver channels you can use are limited to the maximum number of
channels in the aperture.

For example, for the OMNI-M-32128PR, 32 is the maximum number. Therefore the
number of channels for pulsers can be anywhere between 1 and 32 and the same goes
for the receiver channels (1 and 32); for a combined number of channels up to 64.

These models have a higher output impedance; therefore there is a lower voltage in
the load compared the other models.

OMNI-M-PA1616, OMNI-M-PA16128, and OMNI-M-PA16128PR models


These acquisition modules are equipped with a separate conventional ultrasound
channel.

2.2 New Characteristics

This section presents the new software and hardware characteristics.

2.2.1 General Functions


• Improved processing speed for focal law (beam) calculation, display presentation,
and application of ultrasound parameter modification. Two to six times faster,
depending on the configuration.
• The color palette file is now using the XML format (refer to section 8.7.1 “Color
Palette File Format” on page 127).

6 Chapter 2
• The alarm number has been increased to 8 logical alarms instead of the 3 available
with the OmniScan PA version 1.0 (refer to section 13.1 “Setting an Alarm” on
page 365).
• Improved S-scan interpolation for better representation of indications (see Figure
2-1 on page 7).

S-scan from the previous version S-scan from version 1.4

Figure 2-1 S-scan interpolation

• When turning off the OmniScan MX unit, if modifications were made to the
setup, a message box appears to ask if the modifications should be saved before
quitting.
• Tracking of the highest amplitude in gate A has been greatly improved. The
added law selector cursor in the S-scan can be linked to the A-scan view in order
for the A-scan to display the signal according to the law selector cursor position.
The information in reading fields is also linked to that signal. This new feature is
found in the Source list, of the Properties > Display submenu. The parameter to
select is Highest. Refer to section 7.6.5 “Properties” on page 83 under “Source.”
• The OmniScan PA no longer boots from a program located on the DiskOnChip®
(OmniScan PA versions 1.0 through 1.4). It boots from a program located either
on the CompactFlash® memory card installed in the card reader of the
OmniScan MX or installed in an external card reader connected to any
OmniScan MX USB port (USB 1,0 only).

2.2.2 Data Storage


When the inspection is synchronized on an encoder, it is possible to store the last data,
data of the maximum amplitude, or data of the maximum or minimum thickness. For

New Features of the OmniScan PA 7


more details, refer to section 7.5.5 “Data” on page 69 under “Storage.”

Furthermore, there is an automatic mode, which automatically adjusts the point


quantity and the compression factor according to the inspection range to keep the
number of points between 320 and 640. Refer to section 7.4.5 “Advanced” on page 65,
under “Points Qty.”

Saving A-scan, C-scan, defect table, screen capture, and report files can no longer be
done on the DiskOnChip®, only the CompactFlash® memory card can be used to
store these files.

2.2.3 Ultrasound Ruler Units


The default unit of the ultrasound ruler has been changed to a true-depth ruler to
improve the visualization of the indication geometric position in the S-scan.

2.2.4 Display Menu


The selection of view configurations has been decreased to keep the preferred and
most useful ones and to add some configuration to display multiple groups.

For multiple groups, you can have up to three combination of S-scan, C-scan, and
A-scan simultaneously (see Figure 2-2 on page 8).

Figure 2-2 Views for three inspection groups

8 Chapter 2
(For eight groups, you can display an A-scan for each of them simultaneously see
Figure 2-3 on page 9.)

Figure 2-3 Eight A-scan views for eight inspection groups

For more details, refer to section 7.6.1 “Selection” on page 70 under “Group.”

You ca now display both amplitude and thickness C-scan views simultaneously.

2.2.5 Wizards for Groups and Focal Laws


The Group Wizard is found in the Wizard submenu of the Probe/Part menu.

• The Group Wizard allows you to enter all probe, part, and beam parameters, and
generate all focal laws in one step instead of generating them with each change.
• The step-by-step approach prevents the user from missing a parameter change.
• Online help gives general information on parameters to be set.
The Group Wizard includes the Focal Law Wizard (see Figure 2-4 on page 10) for the
creation of focal laws; however, the Focal Law Wizard is also available in the
PGM/Probe menu.

New Features of the OmniScan PA 9


Figure 2-4 Example of the Focal Law Wizard

2.2.6 Calibration Procedures and Parameters


All calibration procedures are guided by a step-by-step menu using Next and Back
navigation (see Figure 2-5 on page 11).

More calibration parameters:

• Calibration for wedge delay on radius, depth, or thickness


• Calibration for sound velocity on radius, depth or thickness
• Calibration for sensitivity on radius or depth
For detailed information refer to chapter 11 “Calibration Procedures” on page 215.

10 Chapter 2
Figure 2-5 Example for sensitivity calibration

2.2.7 Reading Fields and Inspection Information


There is now two groups of four reading fields available instead of only on group.
Only one group can be displayed at a time but all eight reading fields are added in the
report and/or defect table.

New reading fields to place the indication at the correct volumetric position from a
reference point in the part.

• ViA: Volumetric position of the indication detected in gate A with regard to the
0 position on the index axis. (For gate B, ViB.)
• VsA: Volumetric position of the indication detected in gate A with regard to the
0 position on the scan axis. (For gate B, VsB.)
• %(Ur): Signal amplitude at the position of the reference ultrasound cursor. Value
not computed in analysis mode. (For measurement cursor, %(Um).)
For information on reading fields refer to section 3.2.2 “Reading Fields” on page 21
and to section 7.2.1 “Result” on page 43 under “Reading fields.”

New Features of the OmniScan PA 11


2.2.8 Predefined Setups
The OmniScan PA now offers predefined setups covering the most common
inspection to increase the speed of setup preparation.

• Flaw detection: Sectorial scanning from 35° through 70° SW, for manual
inspection using the indication table for the data storage (RD_flawDetector_35-
70SW).
• Corrosion or composite inspection: Linear (electronic) scanning, normal beam
(0°), using a one-axis encoder (RD_Linear0deg_corrosion_oneLine).
• Weld inspection: Linear (electronic) scanning, 60° SW, using a one-line encoder
(RD_Linear60deg_oneLine).
• Weld or component inspection: Sectorial scanning from 35° through 70° SW, using
a one-axis encoder (RD_Sectorial_oneLine).
All these setups are accompanied with online help. The online help is accessed by
pressing the help button ( ). Step-by-step instructions appear on screen to help the
user customize the settings.

For detailed information refer to chapter 12 “Inspection Procedures with Ready-Made


Setups” on page 261.

2.2.9 External Digital Inputs


It is now possible to customize digital inputs. These outputs (DIN 1 through DIN 4)
are located in the Utilities menu, System submenu, Select Key list. It is possible to
defined the four digital inputs with the following parameters; which are found in the
button on the right of the Select Key list:

• Preset Encoder 2
• Pause/Resume (acquisition)
• Save data
• Clear All (Same as Reset All in the Start Mode button found in the Scan menu,
Start submenu.)
Refer to section 7.3.2 “System” on page 57 under “Select Key” and “Assign Key.”

12 Chapter 2
2.3 Software Options

You have now access to optional software features, which can be ordered through the
Olympus NDT customer service.

2.3.1 OmniScan PA Functions


These options are available for versions 1.0R3 through 1.4.

(For option installation, refer to section 8.11 “Verifying and Programming Acquisition
Module Options” on page 146, under the procedure to program a new option on an
acquisition module.)

• Remote control of a number of commands


• TOFD inspection for modules equipped with the separate conventional
ultrasound channel.
• Control of the inspection modules through TomoView
• Multiple-group configuration for version 1.4 only

2.3.2 TomoView Software Functions


TomoView version 2.4 must be installed to have access to the following functions:

• Complete support of all skews and offsets to have the real position of defects.
• Predefined layouts built for all OmniScan PA configurations.
• Analysis improvement using the data cursor.
• Free viewer available to visualize data without making any measurement.

2.3.3 Multiple-Group Configuration


There is now the possibility to manage more than one probe with two different
configurations: different skews, different scanning types, different inspection areas,
and other parameters.

The multiple-group configuration allows the user to the inspect of both sides of a
weld in a single scan pass (see Figure 2-6 on page 14).

You now have the possibility to generate more than one angle while performing linear
(electronic) scanning (see Figure 2-6 on page 14).

New Features of the OmniScan PA 13


For detailed information about group management, refer to section 7.6.1 “Selection”
on page 70 and to section 13.9.1 “Adding and Removing a Group” on page 387.

Figure 2-6 Groups to inspect two sides of a weld or to cover two zones at once

2.4 Memory Capacity

For the memory request of the multiple-group management, the maximum file size
allowed with the present configuration is 160 MB instead of previous 200 MB. It is
possible to get a memory upgrade to increase it to 300 MB by sending the OmniScan
unit to the factory for this installation.

14 Chapter 2
3. Overview

This chapter presents some general features of the OmniScan® Phased Array
Software.

It is assumed that you have read and understood chapter 3, “Basic Operation,” and
chapter 4, “OmniScan Interface,” of the OmniScan MX User’s Manual.

3.1 Rulers/Scales

According to the selection of data views, different rulers appear on the sides of the
view. These rulers or scales are referred to by the axis they represent or by their
function.

3.1.1 Scan Axis


The scan-axis ruler is colored blue and displayed at the bottom or on the left side,
depending on the view orientation, of the B-scan and C-scan views (see Figure 3-1 on
page 16).

Overview 15
Figure 3-1 Scan axis ruler in B-scan (left) and C-scan (right) views

3.1.2 Index Axis


The index axis ruler is colored dark green and is displayed at the bottom or on the left
side, depending on the view orientation, of the C-scan (for linear, 0° scans), S-scan,
and D-scan views (see Figure 3-2 on page 16).

Figure 3-2 Index axis ruler in C-scan (left) and S-scan (right) views

3.1.3 Amplitude Axis


The amplitude-axis ruler is colored light green and is displayed at the bottom or on
the left side, depending on the view orientation, of the A-scan and the sensitivity
calibration views (see Figure 3-3 on page 17).

16 Chapter 3
Figure 3-3 Amplitude axis ruler in A-scan (top) and sensitivity calibration (bottom)
views

3.1.4 Ultrasound Axis


The ultrasound-axis ruler is colored light pink, dark pink, or purple and is displayed
at the bottom or on the left side, depending on the view orientation, of all views
except for the C-scan (see Figure 3-4 on page 18).

Overview 17
Figure 3-4 Ultrasound axis ruler in wedge delay calibration (top), S-scan (left), and
A-scan (right) views

3.1.5 Palette Function


The palette ruler is colored light green (the same as the amplitude axis) and is
displayed next to the color palette, to which it is related, on the right side of the view
configuration (see Figure 3-5 on page 19).

18 Chapter 3
Figure 3-5 Palette function displayed in two multiple view configurations for one
group (left) and two groups (right)

3.1.6 VPA or Angle Function


The VPA or angle ruler is colored grey and is displayed at the bottom or on the left
side, depending on the view orientation, of the C-scan and S-scan views, and the
sensitivity and wedge delay calibration views (see Figure 3-6 on page 20). The units
are in inspection line numbers when performing a phased array inspection at 90° and
are in degrees when performing a phased array inspection with angled beams.

Overview 19
Figure 3-6 VPA (top) and Angle (bottom) function ruler in the sensitivity
calibration view

3.2 Outline Colors

This section presents the colors that are used to outline functions and readings to held
the user easily trace the elements to which the parameters apply or from which come
information.

3.2.1 Option Buttons


In certain submenus, some or all of the option buttons are outlined in one of six colors.
The color indicates the interface element that is affected by that option.

Three colors refer to the gates (see Figure 3-7 on page 21).

20 Chapter 3
• Red: The option applies to gate A.
• Green: The option applies to gate B.
• Yellow: The option applies to gate I.

Figure 3-7 Red outline for the Gate start, Width, and Threshold option buttons

The three colors refer to the ultrasound unit used (see Figure 3-8 on page 21).

• The option applies to the ultrasound axis:


— Light pink: Time (µs)
— Dark pink: Sound Path (mm) [also called half-path]
— Purple: True Depth (mm)

Figure 3-8 Dark pink for the ultrasound ruler and the UT Unit option button

The UT Unit option button is in the Display > Rulers submenu.

3.2.2 Reading Fields


The reading fields, are sometimes outlined in one of seven colors. The color indicates
the interface element for which the value appears in the field (see Figure 3-9 on
page 22).

Overview 21
Information from gate A Information from the
ultrasound axis

Figure 3-9 Three reading outlined red and one outlined dark pink

Gate colors
• Red: The information is from gate A.
• Green: The information is from gate B.
• Yellow: The information is from gate I.

Cursor colors
• Red: The information is from the reference cursor.
• Green: The information is from the measurement cursor.
• Blue: The information is from the data cursor.

UT unit colors
• The information is from the ultrasound axis:
— Light pink: Time (µs)
— Dark pink: Sound Path (mm) [also called half-path]
— Purple: True Depth (mm)
Tow colors are the same for cursor and gate information: red and green. When the
information is from gate A or gate B, the reading field code includes the gate letter. In
Figure 3-9 on page 22 the three first reading fields present information from gate A.

For more details on reading field codes, refer to section 7.2.1 “Result” on page 43.

22 Chapter 3
4. Software Installation

Installation and startup of the OmniScan® Phased Array Software are designed to be
as trouble-free as possible. The software is on a CompactFlash® card.

If you are using many technologies (conventional ultrasound, phased-array


ultrasounds, eddy current arrays), it is possible to get one CompactFlash card that
contains all software programs.

When upgrading from one version to another, a message appears on screen notifying
you that the upgrade is happening, but no manipulation from your part is necessary.

Software Installation 23
24 Chapter 4
5. Startup

The OmniScan PA software begins loading automatically when the unit is turned on.
The procedure is described in section 3.1, “OmniScan Startup and Shutdown,” of the
OmniScan MX User’s Manual.

The OmniScan PA boots from a program located either on the CompactFlash®


memory card installed in the card reader of the OmniScan MX or installed in an
external card reader connected to any OmniScan MX USB port (USB 1,0 only). The
OmniScan PA no longer boots from a program located on the DiskOnChip®
(OmniScan PA versions 1.0 through 1.4).

Once the boot sequence is finished, select the operating mode. The phased array
acquisition module offers three operating modes depending on the options acquired:

• Phased Array for phased array inspections


• Ultrasound for conventional UT inspections
• TomoView to control the OmniScan PA using TomoView and a computer
If you always choose the same operating mode, you can skip the operating mode
selection by choosing the Auto Startup button on the lower-right corner of the screen.
This bypasses the mode selection in future restarts.

To regain the ability to choose an operating mode, choose Utilities > Service > Startup
Mode > Manual. Restart the OmniScan PA to select the Ultrasound option.

Note: The PGM Probe menu only appears if you use the Phased Array
operating mode.

Depending on the software package you have ordered, the menus and options listed
in this documentation and those available to you may not be identical.

Startup 25
26 Chapter 5
6. Reference Charts

This chapter features two reference charts that contain information on the function
keys of the OmniScan® unit, as well as the structure of the menus, submenus, and
options that are selectable in the OmniScan Phased Array Software. These elements
are further explained in “Menu Descriptions” on page 37.

6.1 Function Keys

There are 14 function keys on the OmniScan front panel. These keys possess up to
three types of information written on them, each of these types being color-coded as
follows:

• White: primary function when connected to the PA module


• Yellow: alphabetical characters and symbols
• Green: numerical characters and signs
Table 1 on page 28 lists the function of each key when the OmniScan is equipped with
the Phased Array module.

Reference Charts 27
Table 1 Function key chart

Function UT/PA Alphabetical Numerical Computer-


key function characters characters keyboard
and symbols and signs shortcut

Gain ( ) 1 ALT+F1

Display A B C 2 ALT+F2
Delay

Range D E F 3 ALT+F3

File/ G H I 4 ALT+F4
Open

Alarm/ J K L 5 ALT+F5
Gate

Calibration M N O 6 ALT+F6

Cursor P Q R S 7 ALT+F7

Freeze T U V 8 ALT+F8

Display W X Y Z 9 ALT+F9

28 Chapter 6
Table 1 Function key chart (continued)

Function UT/PA Alphabetical Numerical Computer-


key function characters characters keyboard
and symbols and signs shortcut

Group / # % + – ALT+F10
Selector (positive,
negative)

Set 0 ALT+F11
Reference

Clear : * _ . (dot) ALT+F12

Start/Stop

Store/
Print

Function key description

Gain key
Used to access the Gain (control) edit button (UT > General > Gain) when used in
edit mode.

Phase Rotation/Display Delay key


Used to access the Start (delay/rotation) edit/cyclic button (UT > General > Start)
when used in edit mode.

Reference Charts 29
Frequency/Range key
Used to access the Range (frequency control) edit/cyclic button (UT > General >
Range).

File key
Used to access the File submenu (File > File).

Alarm/Zone or Alarm/Gate key


Used to access the Gate Select list (Gate/Alarm > Gate > Gate).

Balance/Calibration key
Used to modify the Gate Start, Width, and Threshold options (Calibration >
Phased Array).

Cursor key
Used to access the Cursor Type list (Reading > Cursors > Select).

Freeze key
Used to pause the data acquisition process and proceed to analysis mode (either
the current data or from a file). The equivalent software command path is Scan >
Start > Pause.

Display key
Used to access the Display list (Display > Selection > Display).

30 Chapter 6
Group Selector key
Used to switch between acquisition channels. The equivalent command path is
Reading > Cursors > Channel.

Set Reference key


Used to set the reference without having to access the menus. The equivalent
software command path is UT > Advanced > Set Ref.

Erase/Clear key
Used to erase all previously stored acquisitions.

Start/Stop key
Used to start or stop an inspection. This key will reset the previously acquired
data and/or encoder if selected. The equivalent software command path is Scan >
Start > Start.

Store/Print key
Used to save a screen capture or to print the current screen (provided that a
printer is connected to the OmniScan). The equivalent command path is File >
File > Save Data.

6.2 Menu Structure

This section features a chart that contains the structure of the menus, submenus, and
options that are selectable in the OmniScan® Phased Array Software. These elements
are further explained in “Menu Descriptions” on page 37.

The menu structure for the User menu described here is the default configuration,
because this menu is configured by the user and will differ according to your
requirements. For more information about customizing the User menu, refer to
“Configuring the User Menu” on page 123.

Reference Charts 31
If some menus or submenus in the reference chart do not appear in the interface, it
may be because they are not available in the operating mode selected or because you
have the wrong acquisition module installed on the unit.

Note: When listed in the reference chart, the Properties option corresponds
to an option for which the content changes according to other settings.

32 Chapter 6
Table 2 Menu structure chart

File Reading Utilities


Destination Selector Units
Open Field 1 Bright
Save Setup As Field 2 Admin Password
File Save Data
Result Field 3
Pref. Scheme
Save Mode Field 4
File Name
Template Select Clock Set
File Name Angle Date Set
Paper Size Scan Time Zone
Report Build
Cursors Index
System Daylight Saving
Add Entry Select Key
Assign Key
User Field Display Table Startup Mode
Probe Entry Image System Info
Setup Add Entry Win CE
Format Note
Table Delete Entry
Service File Manager
View Select Entry Import
Edit Comments Export
Select Export Table Mouse
Enable EZView
User Label Option Key
Export Options
Field Content Remote Desktop

Record DHCP
Listen IP Address
Erase Subnet Mask
Notes Edit Notes
Network Apply
Edit Header Remote PC
Connect

Reference Charts 33
Table 2 Menu structure chart (continued)

UT Scan Display
Gain Encoder Display
Start Polarity Group
Range Type Property 1
General Wedge Delay
Encoder Resolution
Selection Property 2
Velocity Origin Property 3
Preset Property 4
Pulser Source UT Unit
Tx/Rx Mode Scan % Ruler
Freq. Index Grid
Pulser Voltage
Synchro Scan Speed
Rulers DAC/TCG
PW Gate
PRF Cursor
Receiver Scan Start Display
Filter Scan End Type
Rectifier Scan Resolution Property 1
Receiver Video Filter
Area Index Start
Zoom Property 2
Averaging Index End Property 3
Reject Index Resolution Property 4
Gain Offset Start Mode Select
Scan Offset Pause Start
Index Offset Start End
Beam Angle
Start Color Load
Skew
Beam Delay
Set 80% Storage Display
Set Ref Property 1
dB Ref Property 2
Advanced Points Qty Data Properties Property 3
Scale Factor Property 4
Sum Gain Property 5

34 Chapter 6
Table 2 Menu structure chart (continued)

Probe/Part PGM Probe Gate/Alarm


Group Enable Gate
Group Link Scan Type Start
Select Configu- Connection P Width
Select Gate
Select Probe ration Connection R Threshold
Select Wedge Mode
Auto Detect Synchro
Scan Offset Elements Qty Alarm
Index Offset First Element Group A
Skew Last Element Condition
Position Aperture Element Step
Alarms Operator
Velocity Group B
Condition
FFT Min Angle Output
Gain Max Angle Alarm #
Charac- Start Angle Step Count
Beam Output
terize Width Focus Depth Buzzer
Procedure Delay
Block Name Hold Time
Geometry Auto Program Mode
Thickness Load Law File Curve
Diameter Save Law File DAC/ Property 1
Parts Laws
Material TCG Property 2
Overlay Property 3
Property 4
Back Back Source
Start Start Min
Property 1 Property 1 Max
Wizard Property 2
Wizard Property 2
Thickness Echo Qty
Property 3 Property 3
Property 4 Property 4

Reference Charts 35
Table 2 Menu structure chart (continued)

Calibration User*
Back Gain
Next Start
Mode Range
Phased
Property 1 Gain Wedge Delay
Array Property 2 Velocity
Property 3
Property 4
Back Gain
Next Start
Encoder Range
Axis Property 1 Start Wedge Delay
Property 2 Velocity
Property 3
Property 4
Back Gain
Next Start
Property 1 Range
TCG Property 2
Range Wedge Delay
Property 3 Velocity
Property 4
Back Display
Next Group
Select Code
Code Property 1 Display
Property 2
Property 3
Property 4
Gate
Start
Width
Gate Threshold
Mode
Synchro

*This is the default configuration of the User menu. Each button can be configured by
the user.

36 Chapter 6
7. Menu Descriptions

This chapter describes the functions of the menus (see Figure 7-1 on page 37) and
submenus of the OmniScan® Phased Array Software.

Figure 7-1 The list of menus

7.1 File Menu

The File menu manages the options that have to do with data files, reports, setups,
formatting, and similar options.

7.1.1 File
The File submenu manages data storage, setup, and file management options.

Menu Descriptions 37
Destination
Lists the destinations where data can be stored.
Storage Card: Stores data, setups, and reports on the CompactFlash® memory
card.
Disk On Chip: Stores setups, probes, and wedges on the integrated memory chip.
That space is very limited, so use it with caution.
Network: Stores data, setups, and reports on a network. The OmniScan MX must
be connected to a network in order for this option to work.
To connect the OmniScan MX to a network, refer to the following sections:
• “Connecting the OmniScan MX Directly to a Computer (Windows XP)” on
page 148
• “Connecting the OmniScan Directly to a Computer (Windows 2000)” on
page 159
• “Connecting the OmniScan MX to a Network” on page 170
Hard Disk: Stores data on a connected USB storage device.
Hard Disk 2: Stores data on a second connected USB storage device.
Open
Opens files depending on the selected filter.
Setup: Opens setup files located in the \App\PA\User\Setup folder.
Data: Opens data files located in the \App\PA\User\Data folder.
Report: Opens report files located in the \App\PA\User\Report folder.
Multimedia: Opens multimedia files located in the
\App\PA\User\Multimedia folder.
Image: Opens .jpg format screen capture files located in the
\App\PA\User\Screen folder.

IMPORTANT
These folders cannot be changed. A type of file can only be opened in the
folder that shares the same type name.

38 Chapter 7
Save Setup As
Saves the setup under a different name or in a different location.
Save: Saves the setup.
Setup Lock: When activated, this option locks the setup. The mention This setup
is locked appears in red at the top of the right pane.

IMPORTANT
Once a setup is locked, the operator can only use the commands
programmed on the User menu (refer to “Configuring the User Menu” on
page 123 and “Locking and Unlocking a Setup” on page 192).

Filename: Used to enter a name for the file.


Save Data
Saves the current data according to the selected Save Mode and file name.
Save Mode
Allows you to specify which part of the data you want to store.
A-Scan: Saves complete A-scan wave form and C-scan data.
C-Scan: Saves the C-scan data (amplitude and position simultaneously).
Table: Adds an entry in the defect table.
Screen: Saves the screen as a .jpg file.
Off: No data is saved.
File Name
Used to modify the name of the current file. The following variables can be used:
#: number (data### becomes data001, data002, and so on)
%D: date (dd-mm-yyyy format)
%T: time (h.mm.ss format)
Example: Report###_%D_%T becomes Report001_16-09-2005_5.33.00

Menu Descriptions 39
7.1.2 Report
The Report submenu manages options related to the printing of data from the
OmniScan. The reports are generated in HTML format and can be printed directly
from the OmniScan or viewed through a Web browser on a computer.

Template
Used to select a report template. There are two types of reports you can build. The
type of report is written in parenthesis next to the report name in the Template
list (see Figure 7-2 on page 40). The following is a description of the two types of
reports.

Figure 7-2 The Template list in the Report submenu

Standard report
Is a model delivered with the OmniScan PA unit, which can be found on the
storage card in \App\PA\Template\Report\Complete. To load the standard
report, select it in the Template list.
Custom report
Is a report that was made by the user using his own report model. The files
used to build this report (for example the user’s company logo) must be
placed in \App\PA\Custom\Template\Report\<report template name> on
the OmniScan PA storage card.
File Name
Used to specify a file name template. This means that the name of any saved file
follows a programmed template. The following variables can be used:

40 Chapter 7
#: number (data### becomes data001, data002, and so on)
%D: date (dd-mm-yyyy format)
%T: time (h.mm.ss format)
Example: Report###_%D_%T becomes Report001_16-09-2005_5.33.00
Paper Size
Allows you to specify the paper format on which you print the report.
Build
Builds a preview of a report.
Print: Prints the report.
Save And Close: Saves the report and closes the window.
Close: Closes the window without saving the report.

7.1.3 Format
The Format submenu manages the desired sections in a report.

User Field
When activated, this option adds the user fields to the report. It includes general
user information in the report. For more information about user fields, refer to
“User Field” on page 42.
Probe
When activated, this option adds the Probe Characteristics field to the report. It
includes probe parameters and characteristics in the report.
Setup
When activated, this option adds the Setup field to the report. It includes
ultrasound settings, mechanical settings, TCG, and gate information in the report.
Note
When activated, this option adds the Note field to the report. It includes editable
notes that can be printed with the report.
View
Allows you to specify which type of image you want included in the report.

Menu Descriptions 41
Table: Allows you to print the defect table in the report. For more information
about the defect table, refer to “Configuring and Building a Defect Table” on
page 394.
Current Layout: A screen capture of the current view is added to the report.
Off: No images are included.

7.1.4 User Field


The User Field submenu manages several user-specified fields that include custom
information that can be added in a report. To include these user fields into a report,
choose File > Format > User Field > On.

Select
Allows you to select which user field (1 through 10) to edit.
Enable
When activated, this option activates the selected user field.
Label
Used to enter a new name for the selected user field.
Content
Used to change the contents of the selected user field.

7.1.5 Notes
The Notes submenu manages text or vocal annotations.

Record
When activated, this option enables real-time voice recording during an
inspection. You can only have one record per data file.
The recording is performed using the built-in microphone or an external
microphone plugged into the microphone jack.
Listen
Lets you listen to a previously recorded comment.
Erase
Allows you to choose which notes to erase.
Notes: This option erases all written notes.

42 Chapter 7
Vocal: This option erases all audio-recorded notes.
All: This option erases both written and audio-recorded types of notes.
Edit Notes
Opens the text editor to edit a note attached to a data file and to the setup file.
Edit Header
Opens the text editor to edit the header of a report, of a setup, or of a data file.

7.2 Reading Menu

The Reading menu provides various measurement options and statistical tools.

7.2.1 Result
The Result submenu manages various reading field options.

Selector
Gives you two lists of reading fields (at the top of the screen). Each list is made up
of four reading fields. You can therefore program eight reading fields for an
inspection. Even though only one of the two lists is displayed on screen, the two
lists (eight reading fields) are entered when you make an entry in the report.
Field (1, 2, 3, or 4)
These four buttons allow you to specify which information you want displayed in
their respective reading fields at the top of the screen.

Note: When the contour of a reading field is colored, the reading field
presents information from either the gate, the cursor, or the ultrasound unit of the
same color (refer to “Reading Fields” on page 21).

Reading fields
The following is a list of reading codes and their description.

Menu Descriptions 43
A%
Peak amplitude of the signals detected in gate A (see Figure 7-3 on page 44).
A^
Position of the signal peak value in gate A (see Figure 7-3 on page 44).
A/
Position of the signal in the gate when it crossed gate A (see Figure 7-3 on page 44).

Figure 7-3 Gate A on the signal and A%, A^, and A/ information

B%
Peak amplitude of the signals detected in gate B.
B^
Position of the signal peak value in gate B.
B/
Position of the signal in the gate when it crossed gate B.
I/
Position of the signal when it crossed gate I.

44 Chapter 7
AdBA
Amplitude (dB) of the signal detected in gate A minus the gate level.
The example presented in Figure 7-4 on page 45 shows an amplitude value for the
peak signal crossing gate A of 49.9% FSH. This value is indicated in the A%
reading field on the left. The gate FSH is 25%, which is indicated on the scale on
the left side. The difference between the two FSH values is a half, therefore a
difference of 6 dB, which is indicated in the AdBA reading field.

Figure 7-4 Gate A on the signal and AdBA information

AdBr
Difference between the current signal amplitude in dB (right in Figure 7-5 on
page 46) and the reference signal amplitude (left in Figure 7-5 on page 46)
detected in gate A. The reference can be set by going to UT > Advanced > Set Ref

or by pressing .

Menu Descriptions 45
Figure 7-5 Gate A on the signal and AdBR information

In Figure 7-5 on page 46 the reference signal (left) is 100% FSH, value indicated in
the A% reading field. The A% reading field for the current signal (right) is 49.6.
The signal loss is about a half, which represents a 6 dB drop as indicated by the
-6.1 value in the AdBr reading field (right).
BdBB
Amplitude (dB) of the signal detected in gate B minus the gate level (refer to the
AdBA definition).
BdBr
Difference between the current signal amplitude (dB) and the reference signal
amplitude detected in gate B (refer to the AdBr definition). The reference can be

set by going to UT > Advanced > Set Ref or by pressing .


T
Thickness according to the selection made in Gate/Alarm > Thickness > Source
(see Figure 7-6 on page 47).
ML
The material loss is the result of the part thickness (in Probe/Part > Parts >
Thickness) minus the value in the T reading field. This result is indicated in the
ML reading field (see Figure 7-6 on page 47).

46 Chapter 7
Figure 7-6 Corrosion inspection result, and T and ML information

%(r)
Amplitude value at the reference cursor position (see Figure 7-7 on page 48).
%(m)
Amplitude value at the measurement cursor position (see Figure 7-7 on page 48).
%(m-r)
Amplitude value of the measurement cursor minus the reference cursor (see
Figure 7-7 on page 48).

Menu Descriptions 47
Figure 7-7 A-scan signal and %(r), %(m), and %(m-r) information

U(r)
Position of the reference cursor on the ultrasound axis (see Figure 7-8 on page 49).
U(m)
Position of the measurement cursor on the ultrasound axis (see Figure 7-8 on
page 49).
U(m-r)
Distance on the ultrasound axis obtained by subtracting the position of the
reference cursor from the position of the measurement cursor (see Figure 7-8 on
page 49).

48 Chapter 7
Figure 7-8 Gate A on the signal and U(r), U(m), and U(m-r) information

P(r)
Probe position of the reference cursor.
P(m)
Probe position of the measure cursor.
P(m-r)
Probe position obtained with the measurement cursor minus the reference cursor.
%(Ur)
Signal amplitude at the position of the reference ultrasound cursor. Value not
computed in analysis mode (see Figure 7-9 on page 50).

Menu Descriptions 49
Figure 7-9 A-scan signal and %(Ur) information

%(Um)
Signal amplitude at the position of the measure ultrasound cursor. Value not
computed in analysis mode (refer to the %(Ur) definition).
E%
Peak amplitude of the envelope in gate A. The envelope is set by going to
Display > Properties > and selecting A-Scan in the Display list, and then select
the envelope in the Envelope list. The envelope is cleared by pressing the erase

button ( ).
E^
Position of the envelope peak value in gate A (see Figure 7-10 on page 51).
E-3dB
Width of the signal envelope at –3 dB for the signal detected in gate A (refer to the
E-6dB definition).

50 Chapter 7
E-6dB
Width of the signal envelope at –6 dB for the signal detected in gate A (see Figure
7-10 on page 51).

Figure 7-10 A-scan signal and E%, E^, and E-6dB information

E-12dB
Width of the signal envelope at –12 dB for the signal detected in gate A (refer to
the E-6dB definition).
E-20dB
Width of the signal envelope at –20 dB for the signal detected in gate A (refer to
the E-6dB definition).
S(r)
Position of the reference cursor on the scan axis.
S(m)
Position of the measurement cursor on the scan axis.

Menu Descriptions 51
S(m-r)
Distance on the scan axis obtained by subtracting the position of the reference
cursor from the position of the measurement cursor.
I(r)
Position of the reference cursor on the index axis.
I(m)
Position of the measurement cursor on the index axis.
I(m-r)
Distance on the index axis obtained by subtracting the position of the reference
cursor from the position of the measurement cursor.
RA
Distance between the beam exit point and the indication detected in gate A (see
Figure 7-11 on page 53).
RB
Distance between the beam exit point and the indication detected in gate B (refer
to the RA definition).
PA
Distance on the part surface between the wedge (or probe) front face and the
indication detected in gate A (see Figure 7-11 on page 53).
PB
Distance on the part surface between the wedge (or probe) front face and the
indication detected in gate B (refer to the PA definition).
DA
Depth in the part of the indication detected in gate A (see Figure 7-11 on page 53).
DB
Depth in the part of the indication detected in gate B (refer to the DA definition).
ViA
Volumetric position of the indication detected in gate A with regard to the index
axis (see Figure 7-11 on page 53).
ViB
Volumetric position of the indication detected in gate B with regard to the index
axis (refer to the ViA definition).

52 Chapter 7
VsA
Volumetric position of the indication detected in gate A with regard to the scan
axis (see Figure 7-11 on page 53).
VsB
Volumetric position of the indication detected in gate B with regard to the scan
axis (refer to the VsA definition).
Scan axis

Index axis
Reference point 0,0

Figure 7-11 Diagram of the RA, PA, DA, ViA, and VsA information

SA
Sound path from the beam exit point to indication detected in gate A (see Figure
7-12 on page 54).
SB
Sound path from the beam exit point to indication detected in gate B (refer to the
SA definition).
LA
Number of skips from the probe to the indication detected in gate A (see Figure
7-12 on page 54). To display the skips over the inspection view, you must select
ON for the Overlay button in the Probe/Part menu, Parts submenu.
In Figure 7-12 on page 54, the LA value is 1 since the defect is seen after one skip.

Menu Descriptions 53
LB
Number of skips from the beam exit point to indication detected in gate B (refer to
the LA definition).

Skip 0 Skip 1 Skip 1 Skip 0

LA LA
Weld

SA SA

Figure 7-12 Diagram of the LA and SA information

SCALE
Scale factor, which is the signal compression factor with regard to the digitizing
frequency.
API-DL
Defect length as per the API code.
API_HW
Half wave width as per the API code.
AWS-D A
Indication level as per AWS-D1.5 A.

Note: For more details on the AWS reading fields, refer to the AWS-D1.5
code.

AWS-D B
Zero reference level as per AWS-D1.5 B.
AWS-D C
Attenuation factor as per AWS-D1.5 C.

54 Chapter 7
AWS-D D

Indication rating as per AWS-D1.5 D.

AWS-D 45
Discontinuity severity class as per AWS-D1.5 45°.
AWS-D 60
Discontinuity severity class as per AWS-D1.5 60°.
AWS-D 70
Discontinuity severity class as per AWS-D1.5 70°.
AWS-D CL
Discontinuity severity class as per AWS-D1.5.

7.2.2 Cursors
The Cursors submenu manages cursor selection and configuration.

Select
Allows you to select which cursor (Ascan, Bscan, Cscan, R&M, Measure,
Reference, or Data) will be used.
When you select Ascan the following buttons appear at the bottom of the display:
%(r): Allows you to move the reference cursor on the amplitude axis.
%(m): Allows you to move the measurement cursor on the amplitude axis.
U(r): Allows you to move the reference cursor on the ultrasound axis.
U(m): Allows you to move the measurement cursor on the ultrasound axis.
When you select Bscan the following buttons appear at the bottom of the display:
S(r): Allows you to move the reference cursor on the scan axis.
S(m): Allows you to move the measurement cursor on the scan axis.
U(r): Allows you to move the reference cursor on the ultrasound axis.
U(m): Allows you to move the measurement cursor on the ultrasound axis.
Data link: Allows you to link (or not) the data cursor to the selected cursor.
When you select Cscan the following buttons appear at the bottom of the display:
S(r): Allows you to move the reference cursor on the scan axis.

Menu Descriptions 55
S(m): Allows you to move the measurement cursor on the scan axis.
I(r): Allows you to move the reference cursor on the index axis.
I(m): Allows you to move the measurement cursor on the index axis.
When you select R&M, Measure, Reference, or Data, the following options may
or may not appear.
Angle: Allows you to set the desired angle (beam) when performing a
sectorial scan. This function is not available in conventional UT.
Amplitude: Allows you to move the cursor on the amplitude axis.
UT: Allows you to move the cursor on the ultrasound axis.
PA: Allows you to set the desired channel of a linear scan.
Scan: Allows you to move the cursor on the scan axis.
Index: Allows you to move the cursor on the index axis.
Add entry: Adds a defect to the defect table. This button has the same
function as the Add Entry button in the Table submenu.

7.2.3 Table
The Table submenu manages the parameters of the defect table.

Display Table
When activated, this option displays the defect table on screen.
Entry Image
When activated, this option generates an image for each defect.
Add Entry
Adds a defect to the defect table. This button has the same function as the Add
Entry button in the Cursors submenu.
Delete Entry
Deletes a selected defect from the defect table.
Select Entry
Used to select an indication entered in the defect table.
Edit Comments
Edits the comments of the selected defect.

56 Chapter 7
7.2.4 Export
The Export submenu manages data exportation.

Export Table
Exports the defect table to a text file.

7.3 Utilities Menu

The Utilities menu includes different system utilities available in the OmniScan PA
software.

7.3.1 Pref.
The Pref. submenu manages the general preferences for the operation of the
OmniScan PA.

Units
Allows you to specify either the metric (millimeters) or imperial (inches)
measurement system.
Bright
Used to set the brightness level. You can set it from 1% through 100% in
increments of 1%.
Admin Password
Changes the administrative password. This option is used when you unlock a
setup, access the Microsoft® Windows® CE operating system, and update the
OmniScan PA software.
Scheme
Allows you to specify a color and contrast scheme for the OmniScan PA screen.
Indoor: color set for indoor use
Outdoor: color set for outdoor use

7.3.2 System
The System submenu allows you to customize the overall OmniScan PA system
options, such as the date and clock settings, and the User menu buttons, among

Menu Descriptions 57
other things.

Clock Set
Allows you to set the time. Choose once to select the hour, twice for the minutes,
and three times for the seconds.
Date Set
Allows you to set the date. Choose once to select the year, twice for the month,
and three times for the year.
Time Zone
Allows you to set the time zone where you are working (ex.: GMT-5, Eastern Time
for USA and Canada).
Daylight Saving
Allows you to set the mode in standard time or in daylight time.
Select Key
Allows you to select a function key (F2 through F6) or a digital input (DIN1
through DIN4) for which a function is assigned. The list of functions to choose
from is in the Assign Key button (next to the Select Key button).
Assign Key
Allows you to specify a function to assign to the key or digital input selected in
the Select Key list.

7.3.3 Service
The Service submenu offers management and maintenance options.

Startup Mode
Lets you choose the desired operating mode.
Automatic: The OmniScan starts using the main module option (PA, ECT, UT).
Manual: The OmniScan PA lets you select which application you want (Phased
Array, Ultrasound, etc.) at startup.
System Info
Displays system information such as the hardware version number, the software
version number, and the memory state.

To quit the System Info window, press the Cancel key ( ).

58 Chapter 7
Win CE
Used to access the Microsoft® Windows CE operating system environment. A
password is required to complete the operation.
To switch back to the OmniScan PA interface, you can use the ALT+TAB key
combination (if you have a keyboard plugged in) or you can choose the
OmniScan PA button on the taskbar.

Note: You need to use a mouse in order to fully use the Microsoft
Windows CE operating system.

File Manager
Opens the File Manager, which contains the following options:
Close: Closes the File Manager and returns you to the data view screen.
File Type: Used to specify a type of file you are looking for. All other types are
ignored.
Create Folder: Creates an empty folder in the selected folder.
Select: Selects a file.
Select All: Selects all files in the selected folder.
Copy: Copies the selected files into the folder displayed in the right pane.
Move: Moves the selected files into the folder displayed in the right pane.
Delete: Deletes the selected file.
Rename: Used to rename the selected file.
Import
Imports the contents (wedge, probe, palette, and setup parameters) of
\App\PA\User folder from CompactFlash® to \User\PA folder on
DiskOnChip®.
Export
Exports the contents (wedge, probe, palette, and setup parameters) of \User\PA
folder from DiskOnChip to \App\PA\User folder on CompactFlash.

Menu Descriptions 59
7.3.4 Options
The Options submenu manages pointing protocols for the OmniScan PA software.

Mouse
Displays the options related to the use of the mouse.
Off: Use of the mouse is disabled.
Mouse: Use of the mouse is enabled.
Control Area: The mouse replaces the OmniScan PA main control area, as shown
in Table 3 on page 60.

Table 3 Correspondence of controls between the mouse and the main control area

Mouse Main control


area

Scroll wheel Scroll knob

Left button Accept key

Right button Cancel key

EZView
Controls the EZView feature. When activated, this feature visually magnifies
editable values.
Option Key
Allows you to consult and edit the module option key. For more information,
refer to “Verifying and Programming Acquisition Module Options” on page 146.
Remote Desktop
Allows you to control the OmniScan PA from a remote computer.

7.3.5 Network
The Network submenu manages the parameters used to connect the OmniScan PA to
a network.

DHCP
When activated, this option lets the server provide the IP address.

60 Chapter 7
IP address
Used to manually set an IP address for the OmniScan PA.
Subnet Mask
Used to manually set the subnet mask coordinates for the OmniScan PA.
Apply
Applies the changes entered in the options of the Network submenu.
Remote PC
Allows you to specify a network computer name for the OmniScan PA.
Connect
Activates the connection between the OmniScan PA and the PC.

7.4 UT Menu

The UT menu covers the ultrasound settings of the OmniScan PA.

7.4.1 General
The General submenu manages the main parameters that are applied simultaneously
to the selected channel.

Gain
Used to set the gain.
Start
Used to set the starting value of the time-base range.
Range
Used to set the time-base range according to the inspection length.
Wedge Delay
Used to add the ultrasound speed delay cause by the wedge.
Velocity
Allows you to set the sound velocity inside a material when the User wave type
option is selected. A default value is attributed according to the selected material,
but this value can be overridden.
To know which material is selected, go to Probe/Part > Parts > Material.

Menu Descriptions 61
7.4.2 Pulser
The Pulser submenu manages the various pulser parameters.

Pulser
Allows you to select the pulser to be used for the selected channel. The number of
options in this list depends on your hardware configuration.
Tx/Rx Mode
Allows you to switch between transmitter and receiver modes:
PE: pulse-echo mode
PC: pitch-and-catch (transmit-receive) mode
TT: through-transmission mode
Freq.
Allows you to set the probe frequency value.
Voltage
Allows you to set the output voltage value. Voltage is the same for all groups.
PW
Allows you to select the pulse width value. In automatic mode, the pulse width is
adjusted according to the probe frequency.
PRF
Allows you to set the value of the pulse repetition frequency (PRF) mode.

7.4.3 Receiver
The Receiver submenu is used to set the waveform of the A-scan and to set the
different filters that are available.

Receiver
Allows you to select the receiver that will be used for the selected channel. The list
depends on the configuration of the hardware.
Filter
Allows you to select the filter value to apply, according to the probe frequency. In
automatic mode, the filter is automatically set according to the value you entered
previously in UT > Pulser > Frequency.

62 Chapter 7
Rectifier
Allows you to select the rectification mode.
RF (radio frequency): No rectification (see Figure 7-13 on page 63).

Figure 7-13 RF mode

HW+ (half-wave positive): Only the positive values are rectified (see Figure 7-14
on page 63).

Figure 7-14 HW+ rectification

Menu Descriptions 63
HW− (half-wave negative): Only the negative values are rectified (see Figure 7-15
on page 64).

Figure 7-15 HW– rectification

FW (full wave): The rectification values are all turned into absolute values (see
Figure 7-16 on page 64).

Figure 7-16 FW rectification

64 Chapter 7
Video Filter
When activated, this option enables the video smoothing filter. It is set according
to the probe frequency and the rectification mode.
Averaging
Allows you to select an averaging value for the selected channel.
Reject
Any result inferior to this value is reset to 0% amplitude.

7.4.4 Beam
The Beam submenu manages the parameters of each individual beam (group).

Gain Offset
Used to set the gain offset of the selected focal law.
Scan Offset
Used to set the offset of the emerging point of the ultrasound channel on the scan
axis.
Index Offset
Used to set the offset of the emerging point of the ultrasound channel on the
index axis.
Angle
Allows you to set the beam angle of the selected channel.
Skew
Allows you to select the orientation of the beam in relation to the scan axis.
Beam Delay
Used to set an equivalent wedge delay for the selected focal law.

7.4.5 Advanced
The Advanced submenu is used to set a reference curve and the number of points
acquired on the A-scan.

Set 80%
Adjusts the gain so that the signal in gate A rests at 80% of the FSH (full-screen
height).

Menu Descriptions 65
Set Ref
Preserves the A-scan (curve, amplitude, and gain) in memory.
dB Ref
When activated, this option allows you to choose whether the gain is relative to
the Set Ref in memory or to the absolute value.
Points Qty
Allows you to set the number of A-scan points that will be stored. This parameter
can also be set to the automatic mode, which automatically adjusts the point
quantity and the compression factor according to the inspection range to keep the
number of points between 320 and 640. The inspection range is determined in the
Range option button in the UT > General submenu.
To keep the file to an acceptable size, it is better not to go over 640 points and use
compression. Note that you can see the compression factor in the reading field
called Scale.
Scale Factor
Displays the compression factor for the selected group.
Sum Gain
Allows you to set a gain on the sum of all channels.

7.5 Scan Menu

The Scan menu manages the options related to storing an area based on a time base or
on an x and y encoded signal.

7.5.1 Encoder
The Encoder submenu manages the configuration of the encoders.

Encoder
Allows you to select the encoder to configure.
Polarity
Allows you to reverse the count of the encoder if the probe can only scan in the
wrong direction.

66 Chapter 7
Type
Allows you to specify the type of the selected encoder.
Clock/Dir: clock/direction-type signal
Quad: quadrature-type signal
Up: upward-counter-type signal
Down: downward-counter-type signal
Clock/Dir Up: clock/direction- and upward-counter-type signal
Clock/Dir Down: clock/direction- and downward-counter-type signal
Quad Up: quadrature- and upward-counter-type signal
Quad Down: quadrature- and downward-counter-type signal
Resolution
Used to set the number of counts per unit of the selected encoder.
Origin
Used to set the value to which the selected encoder is preset when the Preset
command button is used.
Preset
Presets the selected encoder to origin.

7.5.2 Synchro
The Synchro submenu manages the firing source for single- or two-axis scans.

Source
Allows you to select the source of the acquisition pace.
Clock: internal clock
One Axis: one-line scan with encoder
Both Axes: both encoders
External: external signal
Scan
Allows you to specify the source of the data positioning for the scan axis.
Time: Firing is done at precise time intervals.

Menu Descriptions 67
Encoder 1: Firing is done at precise distance intervals based on a single position of
the encoder.
Encoder 2: Firing is done at precise distance intervals based on two positions of
the encoder.
Index
This option is not editable. It is always set as the opposite of the Scan option,
when applicable.
Scan Speed
Displays the maximum scanning speed.

7.5.3 Area
The Area submenu manages the options of the area to be scanned. The area is the
same for all groups.

Scan Start
Used to set the starting location of the scan axis.
Scan End
Used to set the ending location of the scan axis.
Scan Resolution
Used to set the step at which the points will be acquired on the scan axis.
Index Start
Used to set the starting location of the index axis.
Index End
Used to set the ending location of the index axis.
Index Resolution
Used to set the increment of the index axis.

68 Chapter 7
7.5.4 Start
The Start submenu manages the parameters that need to be reset before a scan.

Start Mode
Allows you to specify the action to be applied when the acquisition is started

(using or the Start option button).


Reset All: Resets all parameters (resets both encoders to their origin values and
clears the data).
Reset Encoder: Resets both encoders to their Origin values.
Reset Data: Clears the data.
Pause
When activated, this option stops the firing, and the system switches to the
analysis mode.
Start
Applies the action specified in the Start Mode option button.

7.5.5 Data
These data storage options are only available for acquisitions synchronized on an
encoder. Data is stored according to the option selected in the Storage list. The
number of acquisition points that will be saved is determined in the Area submenu
according to the scan length and inspection resolution, and also according to the
memory capacity of the OmniScan.

When the scan goes over the same position (scan, index) data saved is based on the
selection made in the Storage list.

Storage
Last: Saves the last data.
A%: Saves data for the signals, detected in gate A, with the highest amplitude.
Max Thickness: Saves data based on the maximum thickness calculation.*
Min Thickness: Saves data based on the minimum thickness calculation.*
*The thickness calculation is done according to the value specified in the
Source button of the Gate/Alarm menu and Thickness submenu.

Menu Descriptions 69
7.6 Display Menu

The Display menu manages the options related to the data views and the information
on screen.

7.6.1 Selection
The Selection submenu manages the views that will be used to display the signals.

Display
Allows you to select the type of view you want to use to display signals and
groups (for more information about the groups, refer to “Group” on page 72).
Your choices of data views are the following:
A: Displays an A-scan for one group or all groups at once (up to eight). Figure
7-17 on page 71 shows an example of A-scans for four groups.
B: Displays a B-scan for the selected group.
C: Displays a C-scan for the selected group.
S: Displays an S-scan for one group or all groups at once (up to three).
A-B: Displays an A-scan and a B-scan for the selected group.
A-B-C: Displays an A-scan, a B-scan, and a C-scan for the selected group.
A-B-S: Displays an A-scan, a B-scan, and an S-scan for the selected group.
A-C-[C]: Displays an A-scan, and one or two C-scans for one group or all groups
at once (up to three).
.

Note: For the A-C-[C] view, the second C-scan is not automatically
displayed. You must select a source in the C-scan 2 list to display it.

A-S-[C]: Displays an A-scan, an S-scan, and a C-scan for one group or all groups
at once (up to three). Figure 7-17 on page 71 shows an example of A-scans,
S-scans, and C-scans for three groups.

70 Chapter 7
Note: For the A-S-[C] view, the C-scan is not automatically displayed.
You must select a source in the C-scan 1 list to display it.

Figure 7-17 A (A-scan) views for four groups (left) and A-S-[C] views for three
groups (right)

C-Scan 1
This button appears when you select C or A-S-[C] view. It allows you to specify
the source for the C-scan (see Figure 7-18 on page 72). The available sources are
the following:
A%: Peak amplitude of the signals detected in gate A
B%: Peak amplitude of the signals detected in gate B.
I/: Position of the signal when it crossed gate I.
Thickness: Is specified in the Source button of the Gate/Alarm menu and
Thickness submenu.
Figure 7-18 on page 72, presents the A-scan signal according to the source types.

Menu Descriptions 71
Amplitude
axis
Peak
A%

Crossing
Gate A

A/ A^ UT axis

Figure 7-18 Description of the source codes

C-scan 2
This button appears when you select the A-C-[C] view. It allows you to specify the
source for the second C-scan. This second C-scan can have the same source as the
first C-scan.
Group
Allows you to display one group or all the groups at once.
There are only two display possibilities: you can either display only one group,
the one selected in the Group list of the Probe/Part > Select submenu (see Figure
7-19 on page 73), or all the groups you have created. The choice of display is made
by selecting Current or All in the Group list of the Display > Selection submenu.

Note: The All option may not be available in the Group list even if you
have many groups. Some view configurations do not support more than one
group. For more details on view configurations and the number of groups
supported, refer to Table 4 on page 77.

72 Chapter 7
Figure 7-19 The Group list of the Probe/Part > Select submenu

When you select a group in the Group list (of the Probe/Part > Select submenu,
see Figure 7-29 on page 88), it is the one that will be displayed in the data view
when you select Current in the Group list of the Display > Selection submenu.
When all groups are displayed, the group angle (for sectorial scans) or VPA (for
linear scans) is indicated at the top right corner of the A-scan (provided that you
have selected On in the Overlay button of the Probe/Part > Parts submenu) [see
Figure 7-20 on page 74].
When a group is selected, its angle or VPA is outlined. In Figure 7-20 on page 74,
the group that is currently selected is the one in the A-scan view at the top right.

Menu Descriptions 73
Figure 7-20 The group angle at the top right corner of each A-scan view

In view configurations other than the A-scan alone, the title bar of the view
configuration of the selected group is highlighted (see Figure 7-21 on page 75).

74 Chapter 7
Figure 7-21 Highlighted title bar of the view on the left to show the group selection

IMPORTANT
When you set ultrasound parameters (gain, gate, beam angle, etc.), these
parameters only apply to the selected group. Each group must therefore be
defined individually. Certain parameters will apply to more than one group at
the same time if a link for the parameters have been set for these groups (refer to
“Linking and Unlinking Groups” on page 390).

To see the link type, open the Group list of the Probe/Part > Select submenu. If there
is an asterisk (*) next to the group number, it means that it is the first group of a
number of linked groups. Otherwise, you see the link type next to the group number.
(see Figure 7-22 on page 76).

Menu Descriptions 75
Figure 7-22 Groups 1 and 2 linked with MultiGate, and groups 3 and 4 linked with
MultiGain

To switch from one group to another, press and hold (Group Selector
function key) for one second and, upon releasing the key, the next group is
selected.
You can also select a group from the Group list in the Probe/Part menu, Select
submenu.
According the view configuration you are using, the number of groups that can
be displayed changes (see Table 4 on page 77).

76 Chapter 7
Table 4 Groups in view configurations

View configuration Number of groups

A-scan up to eight

B-scan one

C-scan one

S-scan up to three

A-scan and B-scan one

A-scan, B-scan, and C-scan one

A-scan, B-scan, and S-scan one

A-scan, and one or two C-scan up to three

A-scan, S-scan, and possible C-scan up to three

7.6.2 Rulers
The Rulers submenu manages the parameters related to the signal rulers and the
overlays.

UT Unit
Allows you to select the unit that will be used to display the ultrasound axis.
Sound path: Displays the sound path in the material in units relative to the
ultrasound velocity inside the part (also called half-path).
Time: Displays the sound path in the material in microseconds (µs).
True Depth: Displays the distance that is angle-corrected to have real depth
values.
% Ruler
Allows you to select the unit that will be used to display the amplitude axis.
Linear: A linear ruler that ranges between 0% and 100%.
Logarithmic: A logarithmic ruler displayed in decibels (dB).

Menu Descriptions 77
Grid
Allows you to display a grid as an overlay and select its color.
DAC/TCG
When activated, this option displays the DAC (distance-amplitude correction) or
TCG (time-corrected gain).
Gate
When activated, this option displays or hides the gates.
Cursor
When activated, this option displays the reference and measurement cursors.
Furthermore, the amplitude value for both cursors is displayed in the A-scan (see
Figure 7-23 on page 78).

Reference Measurement
cursor cursor

Figure 7-23 The amplitude values at cursor position

78 Chapter 7
7.6.3 Zoom
The Zoom submenu manages various zooming options. The option buttons displayed
on the screen depend on the chosen Mode option.

Display
Allows you to select the view to zoom. The options available through the Display
list change depending on the view type selected in Display > Selection > Display.
The Off option disables the zoom function.

Note: When the display is a combination of views, the zoom conditions


add up.

Type
Allows you to select a type of zoom.
Absolute
Zooms the view according to the absolute starting and ending positions set
for the possible axes. The possible options are the following:
Start Amplitude: Used to set the starting position of the amplitude axis.
End Amplitude: Used to set the ending position of the amplitude axis.
Start Angle: Used to set the starting position of the angle axis.
End Angle: Used to set the ending position of the angle axis.
Start Freq.: Used to set the starting position of the frequency axis.
End Freq.: Used to set the ending position of the frequency axis.
Start Index: Used to set the starting position of the index axis.
End Index: Used to set the ending position of the index axis.
Start Scan: Used to set the starting position of the scan axis.
End Scan: Used to set the ending position of the scan axis.
Start Time: Used to set the starting position of the time axis.
End Time: Used to set the ending position of the time axis.

Menu Descriptions 79
Start USound: Used to set the starting position of the ultrasound axis.
End USound: Used to set the ending position of the ultrasound axis.
Start VPA: Used to set the starting position of the VPA (virtual probe
aperture) axis.
End VPA: Used to set the ending position of the VPA axis.
Start
Zooms the view according to the starting positions and the ranges set for the
possible axes. The possible options are the following:
Start Amplitude: Used to set the starting position of the amplitude axis.
Range Amplitude: Used to set the range of the amplitude axis.
Start Angle: Used to set the starting position of the angle axis.
Range Angle: Used to set the range of the angle axis.
Start Freq.: Used to set the starting position of the frequency axis.
Range Freq.: Used to set the range of the frequency axis.
Start Index: Used to set the starting position of the index axis.
Range Index: Used to set the range of the index axis.
Start Scan: Used to set the starting position of the scan axis.
Range Scan: Used to set the range of the scan axis.
Start Time: Used to set the starting position of the time axis.
Range Time: Used to set the range of the time axis.
Start USound: Used to set the starting position of the ultrasound axis.
Range USound: Used to set the range of the ultrasound axis.
Start VPA: Used to set the starting position of the VPA (virtual probe
aperture) axis.
End VPA: Used to set the ending position of the VPA axis.
Center
Zooms the view according to the center positions and the ranges set for the
possible axes. The possible options are the following:
Center Amplitude: Used to set the center position of the amplitude axis.
Range Amplitude: Used to set the range of the amplitude axis.

80 Chapter 7
Center Angle: Used to set the center position of the angle axis.
Range Angle: Used to set the range of the angle axis.
Center Freq.: Used to set the center position of the frequency axis.
Range Freq.: Used to set the range of the frequency axis.
Center Index: Used to set the center position of the index axis.
Range Index: Used to set the range of the index axis.
Center Scan: Used to set the center position of the scan axis.
Range Scan: Used to set the range of the scan axis.
Center Time: Used to set the center position of the time axis.
Range Time: Used to set the range of the time axis.
Center USound: Used to set the center position of the ultrasound axis.
Range USound: Used to set the range of the ultrasound axis.
Center VPA: Used to set the center position of the VPA axis.
Range VPA: Used to set the range of the VPA axis.
Cursor
Displays an area that follows the data cursor. The display of the Cursor
option cannot be modified.
Gate A
Displays the area covered by gate A. Activates the Center option parameters,
but automatically sets the values that apply to gate A.
Gate B
Displays the area covered by gate B. Activates the Center option parameters,
but automatically sets the values that apply to gate B.

7.6.4 Color
The Color submenu manages various color-related settings used for the information
on screen. The option buttons displayed on screen depend on the chosen Select
option.

Select
Allows you to specify which aspect you want to modify.

Menu Descriptions 81
Amplitude: A color palette that ranges from white to red when the signal is in
FW, HW+, or HW− mode. It is related to the amplitude of the signal (0% means a
white signal, and 100% means a red signal).
TOFD: A grayscale palette that ranges from black to white visible only in RF
mode (white and light gray represent a positive phase, while black and dark gray
represent a negative phase).
Depth: A color palette that ranges from red to blue and that is related to the
thickness of the material (red means a thin material, and blue means a thick
material).
The settings for the Depth palette are found in the Gate/Alarm > Thickness
submenu.
Load
Used to load a color palette (.pal file) [see Figure 7-24 on page 82]. For information
on creating a color palette, refer to “Creating a Color Palette” on page 126.

Figure 7-24 Example of a color palette

Amplitude
Start
Used to set the starting position from where on the color changes.

82 Chapter 7
End
Used to set the ending position from where on the color changes.

TOFD
Contrast
Used to modify the contrast level of a TOFD scan.
Brightness
Used to modify the brightness level of a TOFD scan.

Depth
Min
Used to set the minimum value from where on the color changes. Everything
below that value is displayed in red.
Max
Used to set the maximum value from where on the color changes. Everything
above that value is displayed in blue.
Mode
Allows you to specify a scale mode.
Compression: The entire color scale is compressed between the Min and Max
values.
Exclusion: The colors that correspond to the values contained between Min and
Max are expanded to cover the entire scale.

7.6.5 Properties
The Properties submenu manages the parameters and applicable options of all
selectable views.

Display
Allows you to select a display type along with its preferences.
A-Scan: the wave form of the ultrasound signal
B-Scan: side view of the part under inspection
C-Scan: top view of the part under inspection

Menu Descriptions 83
FFT: (fast Fourier transformation) displays the different frequencies that make up
the ultrasound signal besides the center frequency

A-Scan
Color
Allows you to change the color of the A-scan signal.
Envelope
Allows you to display a curve that preserves the maximum and minimum
amplitudes on the A-scan (see Figure 7-25 on page 84).

Figure 7-25 A-scan envelope curve

You can press the Erase/Clear key ( ) to reset the envelope.

Source
Allows you to select an A-scan view.
All Laws: Displays a real-time A-scan of all the laws (see Figure 7-26 on page 85).

84 Chapter 7
Figure 7-26 All Laws source

Normal: Displays a real-time A-scan of the selected law (see Figure 7-27 on
page 85).

Figure 7-27 Normal source

Highest: Displays the A-scan of the highest amplitude that crosses gate A (see
Figure 7-28 on page 86).

Menu Descriptions 85
Figure 7-28 Highest source

Thinnest: Tracks the minimum wall thickness related to the thickness settings.
Appearance
Allows you to select an appearance for the graphs on screen.
Hollow: The area covered by the signal is hollow.
Fill: The area covered by the signal appears as a filled area.
Hollow 2: Hollow option, plus whatever A-scan signal that crosses gate A
becomes red.
Fill 2: Fill option, plus whatever A-scan signal that crosses gate A becomes a red-
filled area.
Overlay
This list button allows you to display a static curve.
Peak: Keeps the A-scan of the signal with the highest amplitude that crossed
gate A.
Reference: Displays the reference curve set by the procedure explained in
“Configuring Gain Reference Levels” on page 385.

86 Chapter 7
B-Scan
Compression
This option is only available for inspection synchronized on an encoder. It
consists in visually compressing the B-scan.
For example, if a one-line scan has a scan resolution of 1 mm and a compression
by 5, then the B-scan will display a line every 5 mm with the maximum amplitude
in gate A.

C-Scan
Mode
Normal: normal C-scan representation
Strip: not applicable
3D: not applicable
Area
Sets the length of the scan that is displayed during the acquisition.
Ratio 1:1
When set to On, this software function corrects the C-scan view in order to
compensate for the distortion of the OmniScan MX screen and represent the part
as close as possible to the real part dimensions.
This function is only available for inspection with synchronization on two axes
(Scan > Synchro >Source > Both Axes) and only for the single C-scan display
(Display > Selection >Display > C).

FFT
Color
Allows you to select a color for the FFT curve.

7.7 Probe/Part Menu

The Probe/Part menu contains the parameters that relate to the probe, the wedge, and
the part to inspect.

Menu Descriptions 87
7.7.1 Select
The Select submenu manages the descriptions of probes and wedges used in the
inspection process.

7.7.1.1 Option Buttons


Group
Allows you to select a group, add a group, or delete the last group from the list
(see Figure 7-29 on page 88).
(Adding and modifying groups can also be done using the Group Wizard. Refer
to “Wizard” on page 97.)

Figure 7-29 The Group list of the Probe/Part > Select submenu

A group is one set of focal laws, which represents one scan. You can have up to
eight groups.
When you select a group in the Group list (of the Probe/Part > Select submenu,
see Figure 7-29 on page 88), it is the one that will be displayed in the data view
when you select Current in the Group list of the Display > Selection submenu.
There are only two display possibilities: you can either display only one group,
the one selected in the Group list of the Probe/Part > Select submenu, or all the

88 Chapter 7
groups you have created. The choice of display is made by selecting Current or
All in the Group list of the Display > Selection submenu.
When all groups are displayed, the group angle (for sectorial scans) or VPA (for
linear scans) is indicated at the top right corner of the A-scan (provided that you
have selected On in the Overlay button of the Probe/Part > Parts submenu)
When a group is selected, the angle or VPA is outlined in the A-scan.
Furthermore, in view configurations other than the A-scan alone, the title bar of
the view configuration of the selected group is highlighted (see Figure 7-30 on
page 89).

Figure 7-30 Highlighted title bar of the view on the left to show the group selection

Menu Descriptions 89
IMPORTANT
When you set ultrasound parameters (gain, gate, beam angle, filters, etc.),
they only apply to the selected group. Each group must therefore be defined
individually. Certain parameters will apply to more than one group at the
same time if a link for the parameters have been set for these groups (refer to
“Linking and Unlinking Groups” on page 390).

You can also switch from one group to another, by pressing and holding
(Group Selector function key) for one second. Upon releasing the key, the next
group is selected.
Group Link
Allows you to set or remove links for groups. For more information, refer to
“Linking and Unlinking Groups” on page 390.
Select
Allows you to select (Select) a probe from the list of predefined probes or
(Define) to define a custom probe and/or wedge.
Select Probe or Define Probe
Select Probe allows you to choose the probe in a list of predefined probes. Define
Probe opens the Probe Definition Manager (refer to “Probe Definition Manager”
on page 91), which allows you to define a new probe.
Select Wedge or Define Wedge
Select Wedge allows you to choose the wedge in a list of predefined wedges.
Define Wedge opens the Wedge Definition Manager (refer to “Wedge Definition
Manager” on page 92), which allows you to define a new wedge.
Auto Detect
When On is selected, if the probe used is equipped with the autodetection chip,
the OmniScan PA selects it automatically. This function must be turned off in
order to configure the probe manually.

90 Chapter 7
7.7.1.2 Probe Definition Manager
The Probe Definition Manager is used to define the parameters of a custom probe.

Close
Closes the Probe Definition Manager and returns you to the data view screen.
Browse
Allows you to consult the probe parameters of the available probe definitions.
New
Creates a new probe template.
Save: Saves the new probe definition.
Serial #: Used to enter the serial number of the new probe.
Edit
Edits the parameters of the selected probe.
Save: Saves the new probe parameters.
Freq.: Sets the probe frequency.
Ref. Point: Sets probe reference point, which is the distance between the front of
the probe (wedge) and the first element of the probe (see Figure 7-31 on page 91).
This value is negative because the OmniScan PA establishes the 0 reference point
at the position of the first element by default. To set the 0 reference point at the
front edge of the probe you must subtract the distance between the front edge (of
the probe or wedge) from the position of the first element.

5.3 cm

Figure 7-31 The probe reference point measurement

Probe Type: Selects the probe type.

Menu Descriptions 91
Elements Qty: Sets the number of elements in the probe.
Pitch: Sets the distance between the probe elements.
Manage
Manages the probe definition files on your memory card.
Change Serial #: Changes the serial number of a probe.
Delete: Deletes the selected probe.
Copy: Copies a selected probe definition.
Import: Imports the probe definition from a DiskOnChip® to the
CompactFlash®.
Export: Exports the probe definitions from the CompactFlash to a DiskOnChip.
Preview: Displays the probe parameters as they will appear in the report.

7.7.1.3 Wedge Definition Manager


The Wedge Definition Manager is used to define the parameters of a custom wedge.

Close
Closes the Wedge Definition Manager and returns you to the data view screen.
Browse
Allows you to consult the wedge parameters of the available wedge definitions.
New
Creates a new wedge template.
Save: Saves the new wedge definition.
Serial #: Allows you to enter the serial number of the new wedge.
Model: Allows you to select the model number of the new wedge.
Edit
Edits the selected wedge.
Save: Saves the new wedge parameters.
Angle: Specifies the angle of the ultrasound beam in the wedge. This parameter is
usually inscribed on the wedge, if not, use Snell’s law to calculate it:
sin θ sin θ
------------1- = ------------2-
V1 V2

92 Chapter 7
Orientation: Specifies the orientation of the probe with regard to the wedge. The
probe can either be in the normal position or reversed (see Figure 7-32 on
page 93).

Normal Reverse

1
64

1 64

Figure 7-32 Probe orientation on the wedge

Velocity: Specifies the ultrasound velocity in the wedge.


Pri. offset: Specifies the primary offset, which is the distance between the front of
the wedge and the first element of the probe (see Figure 7-33 on page 93).
This value is negative because the OmniScan PA establishes the 0 reference point
at the position of the first element by default. To set the 0 reference point at the
front edge of the wedge you must subtract the distance between the front edge
from the position of the first element.

8.0 cm

Figure 7-33 The primary offset measurement

Menu Descriptions 93
Sec. offset: Specifies the secondary offset. This value is always 0, because it
represents the center of the probe.
Height: Specifies the height of the first element (see Figure 7-34 on page 94).
This parameter is usually given by the wedge manufacturer.

1.0 cm

Figure 7-34 The height of the first element

Manage
Manages the wedge definition files on your memory card.
Change Serial #: Allows you to change the serial number of a wedge.
Delete: Deletes a selected wedge profile.
Copy: Copies a selected wedge profile.
Import: Allows you to import wedge definitions from DiskOnChip® to
CompactFlash®.
Export: Allows you to export the available wedge definitions from CompactFlash
to DiskOnChip.

7.7.2 Position
The Position submenu manages the physical location where the wedge must be
located in order to reach the 0,0 position of the part to inspect.

Scan Offset
Used to set the offset between the center of the probe and the reference position
on the scan axis of the part to inspect or the 0 position of the encoder.

94 Chapter 7
Index Offset
Used to set the offset between the front of the wedge and the reference position on
the index axis of the part to inspect.
Skew
Allows you to select a skew angle if necessary.

Figure 7-35 on page 95 shows the offset measurements and the skew positions.

Skew angle
Weld centerline
Scan axis +

270°
Index axis +
90° Index
offset
180°

+ Scan
offset

Scan
axis

– – 0, 0 +
Index axis

Figure 7-35 Offsets and skew angles

7.7.3 Characterize
The Characterize submenu manages the characterization of the probe. The
characterization is then stored in the setup and in the reports.

FFT
Displays the FFT curve.
Gain
Used to modify the gain value.

Menu Descriptions 95
Start
Used to set the starting position of gate A.
Width
Used to set the width of gate A.
Procedure
Allows you to add a name for the procedure followed in the probe characteristics.
Block Name
Allows you to add a name for the block used in the probe characteristics.

7.7.4 Parts
The Parts submenu manages the information about the part to be inspected.

Geometry
Allows you to specify the geometry of the part to be inspected.
Plate: a flat surface
OD: the outer diameter of a tube
ID: the inner diameter of a tube
Thickness
Used to set the thickness of the part. Dotted lines appear on the data view, spaced
at intervals that correspond to this value.
Diameter
Used to set the diameter of a tube. This option is only available if the Geometry
option is set to either ID or OD.
Material
Allows you to select the material which the part is made out of in order to set the
sound velocity in the material.
Overlay
When activated, this option displays the dotted lines that correspond to the
thickness (skip) of the part. It also displays the group angle or VPA at the top right
corner of the A-scan. When a group is selected, its angle or VPA is outlined.
In view configurations other than the A-scan alone, the title bar of the view
configuration of the selected group is highlighted.

96 Chapter 7
7.7.5 Wizard
The Wizard submenu offers a wizard that helps the operator perform the
management of groups.

Once you choose Start in the Group Wizard, instructions on modifying the selected
group or adding new groups appear on screen.

You can quit a wizard anytime by pressing the Cancel key ( ).

7.8 PGM Probe Menu

The PGM Probe menu manages the parameters related to the programming of a
probe.

7.8.1 Configuration
The Configuration submenu manages the parameters related to the type of scans that
will be performed by the probe.

Enable
When activated, this option enables the selected probe group.
Scan Type
Allows you to specify the scan type for the selected probe group.
Sectorial: Provides a multiple angle sweep (see Figure 7-36 on page 98).

Menu Descriptions 97
Figure 7-36 Sectorial scanning

Linear: The operator must configure the sweep of the elements (see Figure 7-37 on
page 98).

Figure 7-37 Linear scanning

Depth: Focalization is performed at different depths (see Figure 7-38 on page 98).

Figure 7-38 Depth scanning

98 Chapter 7
Connection P
Used to enter the number of the first element of the pulser probe when using the
MultiProbe configuration (in the Group Link button of the Probe/Part > Select
submenu). For example, when you use the connector adapter OMNI-A-AP05, you
can connect two phased array probes. One connector is for elements 1 through 64
and the other one is for elements 65 through 128. By entering 1 or 65 in the
Connection P button, you tell the OmniScan PA which of the two connectors is
used or, for pitch and catch inspections, you tell the OmniScan PA which of the
two probes is used as the pulser.
The Connection P button also becomes available when the probe automatic
selection is off (in the Auto Select button of the Probe/Part > Select submenu).
Connection R
This parameter is only available when PR acquisition modules are used (pitch and
catch inspections). This is where you enter the number of the first element of the
receiver probe.
If you do not enter a value, the OmniScan PA assigns it the value entered in the
Connection P button.

7.8.2 Aperture
The Aperture submenu manages the selection of the element that is used to create
each beam (focal law).

Element Qty
Used to set the number of elements in the aperture.
First Element
Used to set the first element in the aperture.
Last Element
Used to set the last element in the aperture when the Linear scan type is chosen.
Element Step
Used to set the element step in the aperture when the Linear scan type is chosen.
Sound Velocity
Used to set a user-specified sound velocity value. This option is only available
when the User wave type is selected.

Menu Descriptions 99
7.8.3 Beam
The Beam submenu manages the configuration of the beams (angle and focus points).

Note: The menus may or may not be editable, depending on the selected
type of scan.

Min Angle
Used to set the minimum angle of the beam.
Max Angle
Used to set the maximum angle of the beam.
Angle Step
Used to set the step value between each angle.
Focus Depth
Used to set the focussing depth in the part to inspect.

7.8.4 Laws
The Laws submenu manages the focal law options.

Auto Program
When activated, this option allows the laws to be reprogrammed as soon as any
parameter that changes the beam configuration is changed.
Load Law File
Loads a previously created law file. To use this option, you must set the Auto
Program option to Off.
Save Law File
Saves the selected law file.

100 Chapter 7
7.8.5 Wizard
The Wizard submenu offers a wizard that helps the operator manage focal laws. If
you have more than one group, the focal law will be applied to the selected group.

Once you choose Start in the Law Wizard, instructions on the creation or modification
of focal laws according to the type of scan you want to make appear on screen.

You can quit a wizard anytime by pressing the Cancel key ( ).

7.9 Gate/Alarm Menu

The Gate/Alarm menu manages the parameters for gates and alarms.

7.9.1 Gate
The Gate submenu manages the parameters of the gates.

Gate
Allows you to specify which gate you want to use. There are three color-coded
gates available in the OmniScan PA interface.
A: Gate A (red), measurement gate
B: Gate B (green), measurement gate
I: Gate I (yellow), synchronization gate
Start
Used to set the starting position of the selected gate. This position is related to the
synchronization of the gate. The real position of the gate is the synchronization
position plus the gate start position.
Width
Used to set the width of the selected gate, that is, the width of the gate after the
real start (synchronization position plus gate start position).
Threshold
Used to set the height value of the selected gate. It determines the amplitude at
which you want the signals to cross the gate.

Menu Descriptions 101


Mode
Allows you to specify which part of the signal is used to trigger the gate.
Absolute: Triggers the gate if a signal that is HW+ or HW− crosses the amplitude
of the gate.
Positive: Only the positive section of the signal triggers the gate.
Negative: Only the negative section of the signal triggers the gate.
Synchro
Allows you to specify the synchronization type of the selected gate.
Pulse: at the beginning of the pulse
I: on gate I crossing, if not crossing then end of gate I
A^: on the position of amplitude peak of gate A
A/: on the first crossing of gate A, if not crossing then end of gate A

7.9.1.1 Gate Position


There are ways to set the start, width, and threshold of a gate.

Option buttons
Select the option button for which you want to change the value by pressing the
option key underneath it and use the function key to enter the value. Press the Accept

key ( ) to confirm the value.

Scroll knob
Select the option button for which you want to change the value by pressing the
option key underneath it and use the Scroll knob to change the value. Press the Accept

key ( ) to confirm the value.

102 Chapter 7
Mouse
If you place the mouse pointer over a gate, the pointer either turns into a two-pointed
arrow ( ) or into a four-pointed arrow ( ).

The two-pointed arrow appears when the pointer is placed on one of the edges. When
that arrow appears, clicking the right mouse button and dragging the mouse allows
you to resize that end of the gate. While you resize the gate, the current coordinate for
the X-axis of that side appears beside the edge (see Figure 7-39 on page 103). The
coordinate disappears when the mouse button is released.

Figure 7-39 A gate resized on one side

The four-pointed arrow appears when the pointer is placed anywhere else along the
length of the gate. When that arrow appears, clicking the mouse button and dragging
the mouse allows you to move the entire gate anywhere in the view. While moving
the gate, the X-axis coordinate appears beside each edge and the Y-axis coordinate
appears above the gate (see Figure 7-40 on page 103). These coordinates disappear
when the mouse button is released.

Figure 7-40 A gate moved elsewhere in the view

Note: The coordinates that appear when you move a gate correspond to
their positions according to their respective rulers.

7.9.1.2 Flashing Gate


When a gate flashes, it means that the signal crossing the gate is saturated.

Menu Descriptions 103


7.9.2 Alarms
The Alarms submenu manages the alarm conditions. There are eight logical alarms on
the OmniScan PA. A logical alarm is triggered by a gate condition assigned to one
channel or two. On the OmniScan PA, the channel is called group (refer to “Probe/Part
Menu” on page 87). For a description on how to create alarm output, refer to
“Output” on page 105.

Alarm
Allows you to select the alarm that is going to be edited. When the alarm is active,
the word On appears beside the number of the alarm.
Group A
Allows you to select a group (channel) that will be used to trigger an alarm.
Condition (for the group selected in the Group A list)
Allows you to assign a condition to trigger an alarm.
None: No alarm.
Gate A: The alarm is triggered if the signal crosses gate A.
Gate B: The alarm is triggered if the signal crosses gate B.
Gate I: The alarm is triggered if the signal crosses gate I.
Not Gate A: The alarm is triggered if the signal does not cross gate A.
Not Gate B: The alarm is triggered if the signal does not cross gate B.
Not I: The alarm is triggered if the signal does not cross gate I.
> Max Thickness: The alarm is triggered if the thickness becomes higher than the
maximum thickness criteria set in Gate/Alarm > Thickness.
< Min Thickness: The alarm is triggered if the thickness becomes lower than the
minimum thickness criteria set in Gate/Alarm > Thickness.
Operator
Is used when you have two alarm groups.
AND: Is used when the conditions assigned to both group must occur in order to
trigger an alarm.
OR: Is used when the condition assigned to either one of the groups must occur in
order to trigger an alarm.

104 Chapter 7
Group B
Allows you to select the second group that forms the alarm in the list of active
groups. It is possible to assign the same group in two fields (ex.: for the condition
of Gate A and Gate B on group 1). To form an alarm with one group, set the
condition in Group B to None.
Condition (for group B)
Allows you to assign a second condition to trigger an alarm. For more
information on the conditions, refer to “Condition (for the group selected in the
Group A list)” on page 104.
M

Note: For more details on alarms, refer to “Setting an Alarm” on page 365.

7.9.3 Output
The Output submenu manages the output signals available for the alarm triggers. The
OmniScan PA has three alarm outputs, which can be configured according to the
following parameters:

• Visual alarms with the indicator lights located on the front panel of the OmniScan
• Audio alarm with the internal speaker
• TTL alarms with the Alarm and I/O connector
This menu allows you to assign one or many logical alarms to one of three outputs.

Output
Allows you to select which of the three outputs that will be configured.
Alarm #
Allows you to choose which of the logical alarm will be on the selected output. If
many alarms are on the same output, the condition OR applies between these
alarms. For each selected alarm for an output, On appears beside the alarm
number. If many alarms are on one output, Multi appears beside the alarm
number.

Menu Descriptions 105


Count
Allows you to configure the number of alarm trigger needed to effectively start
the alarm. The alarm condition must be true the number of consecutive times you
enter for the alarms (audio, visual, or TTL) to be valid.
Buzzer
When activated, this option enables the buzzer and determines the buzzer
frequency.
Delay
Allows you to set the time delay between the alarm signal and the activation of
the TTL port. (The visual and audio alarms do not have any delay.)
Hold Time
Allows you to determine the length of the TTL output signal of the selected alarm.
The audio and visual alarms have a fixed and independent length.

Note: For details on outputs, refer to “Setting an Output” on page 367.

7.9.4 DAC/TCG
The DAC/TCG submenu allows you to used a DAC (distance-amplitude correction)
or a TCG (time-corrected gain) curve.

Note: This function is not available on revision-B OmniScan units. If you


do not know which revision of the OmniScan unit you have, that information is
displayed during startup.

The DAC is built by using a maximum of 16 signals from calibration defects of the
same size. These defects represent various depth in the material and the curve is built
according to the peaks of the defect signals. With this DAC curve, all signals are
displayed at their through amplitude without compensation for depth or attenuation.

106 Chapter 7
The TGC curve uses compensation for depth and signal loss (caused by attenuation
and beam spread) to display equivalent signals at the same screen height (amplitude).
The TGC adjusts the gain over time to represents the signals, from indications located
at different depths, at the same amplitude.

Mode
Allows you to select the setup or edit mode.
Setup: Allows you to choose which type of curve you want to set.
Edit: Allows you to specify the parameters for the selected curve.

IMPORTANT
To be able to display a DAC curve, you must have a reference gain. If you do not
have one and you try to activate a DAC curve, a reference gain will automatically
be created, and you will not be able to cancel it without cancelling the DAC curve
first.

Setup
Curve
Off: No curves are set.
DAC: This represents the attenuation curve into the material with the associated
+6 dB, –3 dB, and –6 dB curves.
TCG: The gain value varies through time when using this option.
Ref. Amplitude
Used to set the amplitude at which the DAC curve is located if the actual gain is
the same as the reference gain (only available when the DAC option is selected).
Ref. Ampl. Offset
Used to set a value (positive or negative) by which the reference amplitude value
is modified so that the reference amplitude value remains the same when the gain
is changed (only available when the DAC option is selected).

Menu Descriptions 107


Curve Step
Used to set the difference in dB between DAC curves (only available when the
DAC option is selected). Refer to Figure 7-41 on page 108.

Figure 7-41 The DAC curve

Reference Gain
Used to modify the signal gain without affecting the DAC curve (only available
when the DAC option is selected).

Edit
Point
Allows you to select a point to work with. The selected point shows up as a red
dot in the data view.
Position
Used to set the position of the point on the X-axis of the data view.
Amplitude
Used to modify the amplitude value.
Add
Adds an extra point to the TCG curve.
Delete
Deletes the selected point.

108 Chapter 7
7.9.5 Thickness
The Thickness submenu manages the thickness measurement parameters.

Source
Allows you to select the type of gate combination that provides the thickness (See
Figure 7-42 on page 109).
The options in this list are a combination of the following variables:
A^: maximum point (peak) in gate A
B^: maximum point (peak) in gate B
I^: maximum point (peak) in gate I
A/: crossing point in gate A
B/: crossing point in gate B
I/: crossing point in gate I

Amplitude
axis
Peak
A%

Crossing
Gate A

A/ A^ UT axis

Figure 7-42 Description of the source codes

Min
Used to set up the color palette scale. Everything below this value is colored red.

Menu Descriptions 109


Max
Used to set up the color palette scale. Everything above this value is colored blue.
Echo Qty
Sets the number of times the sound has to travel in the material to go from the
probe and back to establish the thickness of the part. This feature is particularly
useful when measuring small thicknesses. Taking measurements using many
round-trips give a more accurate thickness value for thin materials.

7.10 Calibration Menu

The Calibration menu offers wizards for each submenus to help the operator perform
all required calibration operations. Those wizards are described in “Calibration
Procedures” on page 215.

7.10.1 Phased Array


The Phased Array submenu offers a wizard that helps the operator perform the
phased array calibrations.

Once you select a calibration mode in the Mode list and choose Next in the Select
Mode step of the Phased Array Calibration Wizard, the guide through the procedure
starts.

You can quit a wizard anytime by pressing the Cancel key ( ).

The following is a description of the parameters you find in the phased array
calibration wizard.

Mode
Allows you to select the parameter or the combination of parameters to calibrate.
Velocity: Guides you through a sound velocity calibration of the part to inspect.

110 Chapter 7
IMPORTANT
The sound velocity calibration must be done before the wedge delay
calibration because the OmniScan PA uses the sound velocity determination
for the wedge delay calibration. If you calibrate the wedge delay first, you
will get a message warning you that the wedge delay calibration will be lost
once you perform the sound velocity calibration.

Wedge Delay: A calibration that goes through the delay before the entrance into
the material to have a proper 0 on the time-of-flight ruler.
Sensitivity: A calibration that seeks to reach the same amplitude on each beam
(focal law).
Sensitivity & WD: Combines the aspects of both Sensitivity and Wedge Delay
calibration modes.
Select Ascan (Velocity Calibration)
Allows you to select the angle (Angle) of the focal law (A-scan) you want to use
for the calibration.The Gain, Start, and Range buttons can be used to make
changes to your original setup without having to quit the wizard.
Once you choose Next, you have three choices of calibrations: Radius, Depth, and
Thickness. According to the calibration block you are using select on of the three
and enter the values for parameters 1 and 2.
The steps Set Gate A on (Radius, depth, Thickness) on the first parameter and on
the second parameter gives you the control to set the gate start (Start), gate width
(Width), and gate height (Threshold) in the A-scan.
Get Position calibrates the first parameter and then the second parameter.
Set (Radius, depth, Thickness) A (Wedge Delay Calibration)
Allows you to give the radius measurement, the depth or the thickness on which
you are making the calibration and set the limits in which the amplitude can vary
(Tolerance button).
The steps Set Gate A on (Radius, depth, Thickness) A gives you the control to set
the gate start (Start), gate width (Width), and gate height (Threshold) in the
A-scan.
Get Position calibrates the parameter.

Menu Descriptions 111


Set Reference Amplitude (Sensitivity Calibration)
Allows you to set the signal amplitude of the reference defect you are using for
the calibration (Ref. Amplitude) and set the limits in which the amplitude can
vary (Tolerance).
Set Gate A on Echo A gives you the control to set the gate start (Start), gate width
(Width), and gate height (Threshold) in the A-scan.
Set Compression Gain allows you to set the compression gain to reduce the
difference in amplitude between signals. The gain parameter is there to let you
modify the your original gain setting without having to quit the wizard.
Calibrate and Accept (All Calibrations)
Allows you to accept (Accept) the calibration or restart it if the result is not within
the tolerances (Restart).

7.10.2 Axis
The Axis submenu offers a wizard that helps the operator perform the calibration of
one or two encoders. For more information, see “Encoder Calibration” on page 256.

Once you select the encoder you want to calibrate in the Encoder list and choose Next
in the Select Encoder step of the Phased Array Calibration Wizard, the guide through
the procedure starts.

You can quit a wizard anytime by pressing the Cancel key ( ).

The following is a description of the parameters in the Encoder Calibration Wizard.

Origin
Used to set the origin point of the axis.
Encoder Pos
A read-only button that displays the position of the first encoder.
Distance
Used to enter the scan distance.
Calibrate
The calibration is done and the value for the resolution appears in the Resolution
read-only button.

112 Chapter 7
7.10.3 TCG
The TCG submenu offers a wizard that helps the operator perform the TCG
calibration. For more information, see “TCG Calibration” on page 253.

Once you choose Start the TCG Calibration Wizard guides through the procedure.

You can quit a wizard anytime by pressing the Cancel key ( ).

The following is a description of the parameters in the TCG Calibration Wizard.

Set Reference Amplitude


Allows you to set the signal amplitude of the reference defect you are using for
the calibration (Amplitude) and set the limits in which the amplitude can vary
(Tolerance).
Set Gate A on Echo
Gives you the control to set the gate start (Start), gate width (Width), and gate
height (Threshold) in the A-scan.
Add Point
Adds the TCG point.
Next Point
Allows you to add another point by sending you back to the Set Gate A on Echo.
Undo Last Point
Allows you to remove the last point.
Accept TCG
Ends the TCG calibration.

7.10.4 Code
The Code submenu offers a wizard that helps the operator manage calibration for API
or AWSD 1.5 code.

Once you choose Next the Code-based Calibration Wizard guides through the
procedure.

You can quit a wizard anytime by pressing the Cancel key ( ).

Menu Descriptions 113


7.11 User Menu

The submenu list in the User menu is user-configurable. When configuring the
submenu buttons, respect the following rules:

• There must be at least one submenu button used. The first submenu button (F2)
must contain one parameter.
• Start by assigning a parameter to F2, then to F3, then to F4, and so on. Do not leave
one submenu button empty while the next one is used.
• As soon as one button is assign to the None parameter, the rest of the buttons are
not available.
When a setup is locked, only the user menu is available.

If some macros have been defined, they are listed at the end of the Assign Key list
under ---Macro--- and they are available.

The submenus displayed in the User menu are specified in the Utilities > System >
Assign Key option list. Once assigned, these submenus function as shortcuts.

114 Chapter 7
8. General Procedures

The next five chapters contain various procedures that explain tasks that are
commonly performed with the OmniScan PA. This chapter presents general
procedures that affect the OmniScan PA interface as a whole.

8.1 Setting the Date and Time

This section describes how to set the date and the time on the OmniScan PA.

To set the time

1 On the Main menu, select Utilities and press (System).

2 Press (Clock Set) once, and use the Scroll knob or the function keys to set the
hour (see Figure 8-1 on page 116).

General Procedures 115


Figure 8-1 Setting the hour parameter

3 Press (Clock Set) to move to the next parameter.


4 Enter the minutes and seconds using the Scroll knob or the function keys.
5 To select the half-day period, use the Scroll knob to toggle between AM for
morning and PM for the afternoon (see Figure 8-2 on page 116).

Figure 8-2 Setting the half-day period

To set the date

1 On the Main menu, select Utilities and press (System).

116 Chapter 8
2 Press (Date Set) once, and use the Scroll knob or the function keys to set the
year (see Figure 8-3 on page 117).

Figure 8-3 Setting the year parameter

3 Press (Date Set) to move to the next parameter.


4 Enter the month and day using the Scroll knob or the function keys.

8.2 Setting the Storage Mode

This section describes how to set the storage mode.

To set the storage mode

1 On the Main menu, select File and press (File).


2 In the Save Mode list select the option you want (see Figure 8-4 on page 118).

General Procedures 117


Figure 8-4 The Save Mode list

3 In the Name button enter a file name.


4 In the Destination list select the storage destination (see Figure 8-5 on page 118).

The OmniScan PA will save data any time you press .


For more information about the options listed in the procedure above, refer to “File”
on page 37.

Figure 8-5 The Destination list

118 Chapter 8
8.3 Selecting the Measurement Unit

This section describes how to select a measurement unit.

To select the measurement unit

1 On the Main menu, select Utilities and press (Pref.).


2 In the Units list, select the preferred measurement unit.

8.4 Configuring the Display

The procedures in this section explain the configuration of the various parts displayed
on screen. These include:

• Changing the Display


• Selecting the Ultrasound Ruler Unit
• Displaying the Gates, the Cursors, the TCG Curve, or the Grid
• Configuring A-Scan, B-Scan, C-Scan, and FFT View Options

8.4.1 Changing the Display

To change the display

♦ On the Main menu, select Display, press (Selection), and, in the Display list,
select the view layout. (The layout description is found in “Selection” on page 70
under “Display.”)
OR

Press .

General Procedures 119


8.4.2 Selecting the Ultrasound Ruler Unit

To select the ultrasound ruler unit

♦ On the Main menu select Display, press (Rulers), and, in the UT Unit list,
select the sound path scale.
According to the selection made, the ruler will be colored as follows:
— Time (µs) light pink
— Sound Path (mm) dark pink
— True Depth (mm) purple

8.4.3 Displaying the Gates, the Cursors, the TCG Curve, or the Grid

To display the gates, the cursors, or the TCG curve

♦ On the Main menu select Display, press (Rulers), and set the appropriate
parameter to On to make it appear in the data view.

To display the grid

1 On the Main menu select Display and press (Rulers).


2 In the Grid list, select the color for the grid that will appear in the data view (see
Figure 8-6 on page 121).

120 Chapter 8
Figure 8-6 A green grid is displayed when Green is selected in the Grid list

8.4.4 Configuring A-Scan, B-Scan, C-Scan, and FFT View Options

To configure the options of the A-scan view

1 On the Main menu select Display and press (Properties).


2 In the Display list, select A-Scan, and then select the desired settings for the other
option buttons (Color, Envelope, Source, Appearance, and Overlay). For more
information, refer to “Properties” on page 83.

To configure the options of the B-scan view

1 On the Main menu select Display and press (Properties).


2 In the Display list, select B-Scan, and then select the desired compression value.
For more information on this display option, refer to “Properties” on page 83
under “B-Scan.”

General Procedures 121


Note: In order for the Compression option button to be available, the
inspection must be synchronized on an encoder. Go to Scan > Synchro > Scan
and select Encoder 1.

To configure the options of the C-scan view

1 On the Main menu select Display and press (Selection).


2 In the Display list, select C, and, in the C-Scan x list, select the type (source) of
data to be displayed in the C-scan (A%, B%, I/, Thickness). For more information,
refer to “Selection” on page 70.

3 Press (Properties), and n the Display list, select C-Scan.


4 Set the Ratio 1:1 parameter to On or Off. For more information on this display
option, refer to “Properties” on page 83 under “C-Scan.”

Note: In order for the Ratio 1:1 option button to be available, the
inspection must be synchronized on two axes. Go to Scan > Synchro > Source
and select Both Axes.

To configure the options of the FFT view

1 On the Main menu select Display and press (Properties).


2 In the Display list, select FFT, and, in the Color list, select the color for the FFT
curve.

122 Chapter 8
8.5 Configuring the User Menu

This section explains how to configure the User menu.

To configure the User menu

1 On the Main menu select Utilities and press (System).


2 In the Select Key list, select the key (F2 through F6) to which a submenu is to be
assigned (see Figure 8-7 on page 123).

Figure 8-7 The Select Key list

3 In the Assign Key list, select the parameter that will be displayed next to the key
number selected in step 2 (see Figure 8-8 on page 124).

General Procedures 123


Figure 8-8 The Assign Key list

4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to configure the five submenus available in the User menu
(see Figure 8-9 on page 124).

Figure 8-9 The five submenus of the User menu

124 Chapter 8
8.6 Configuring the Digital Input

This section explains how to configure the digital input.

To configure the digital input

1 On the Main menu select Utilities and press (System).


2 In the Select Key list, select the key (DIN1 through DIN4) to which a digital input
is to be assigned (see Figure 8-10 on page 125).

Figure 8-10 The Select Key list

3 In the Assign Key list, select the parameter that will be displayed next to the key
number selected in step 2 (see Figure 8-11 on page 126).

General Procedures 125


Figure 8-11 The Assign key list for the digital inputs

4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to configure the other digital inputs.

8.7 Creating a Color Palette

The color palettes of the OmniScan PA (.pal files) provides 256 colors and the
definition of the following three colors: no-data, no-detection, and no-synchro.

No-data A zone not inspected.


No-detection An inspected zone, but no signal has crossed gate A.
No-synchro An inspected zone, but no signal has crossed gate I, therefore
there is no detection.
In the range of 256 colors, each color is defined as a code in the RGB color scale.

An RGB color code has four components. The first three components each represent
the intensity of one of the three basic RGB colors: red (R), green (G), and blue (B). The
fourth and last component is an RGB-reserved field that is not used in Microsoft®
Windows® CE operation system, although it is essential for the proper usage of the
color palette files. The number 0 (zero) must always be used as the fourth component.

The combination of different intensities creates a color in the data view. Each RGB
component possesses 256 possible values, ranging from 0 through 255.

Table 5 on page 127 explains how to obtain colors using the numerical components.

126 Chapter 8
Table 5 RGB color codes

Color Red Green Blue

Red 255 0 0

Green 0 255 0

Blue 0 0 255

Yellow 255 255 0

Purple 255 0 255

Turquoise 0 255 255

Black 0 0 0

Gray 125 125 125

White 255 255 255

The closer the number is to 0, the darker the color is. The closer the number is to 255,
the lighter the color is. If you choose a color code made from three identical numbers,
you get a black, white, or a shade of gray.

8.7.1 Color Palette File Format


An OmniScan PA .pal file contains a header that allows the user to identify the
version of the XML format. The file header is as follows:
<?xml version=’1.0’?>
<!-- This file represents an Omniscan palette colors definition -->

The second line of this header is a comment. If you want to modify the comment, it is
important to use the following characters:

<!-- followed by a space at the beginning of the comment,

--> preceded by a space at the end of the comment.

The comment can count many lines.

It is important to include an indication at the beginning of the palette definition. This


indicator is:

General Procedures 127


<Palette>

The first line of a palette definition must be the version number of the definition
format of the palette. Currently, the version number is 2.0. The line is as follows:
<Version>2.0</Version>

Then, there is the definition of the special colors and of the palette colors. The format
of the line of the color definition is as follows:
<Color R=“RValue” G=“GValue” B=“BValue” F=“FValue”></Color>

For example, to define white, the entry should be:


<Color R=“255” G=“255” B=“255” F=“0”></Color>

As mentioned before, the last component should always be 0 and it should always be
included in the definition.

Therefore, following the definition of the version number of the palette definition, you
must find the definition of the special colors of the palette. The color “no-data” is on
the first line; the color “no-detection” is on the second line; and the color “no-
synchro” is on the third line. To differentiate the special colors, it is important to frame
the definition between two identifiers. The identifier located at the beginning of the
definition of the special color is the following:
<SpecialColors>

The end indicator of the definition of the special color is the following:
</SpecialColors>

Here is an example that defines the “no-data” to black, the “no-detection” to white,
and the “no-synchro” to gray:
<SpecialColors>
<Color R="0" G="0" B="0" F="0"></Color>
<Color R="255" G="255" B="255" F="0"></Color>
<Color R="128" G="128" B="128" F="0"></Color>
</SpecialColors>

Then comes the definition of the 256 colors of the palette. To differentiate the colors of
the palette, it is important to encapsulate their definition between two identifiers. The
identifier located at the beginning of the definition of the palette color is the following:
<MainColors>

The end indicator of the definition of the palette color is the following:
</MainColors>

128 Chapter 8
Here is an example of the definition of the palette in hues of gray:
<MainColors>
<Color R="0" G="0" B="0" F="0"></Color>
<Color R="1" G="1" B="1" F="0"></Color>
<Color R="2" G="2" B="2" F="0"></Color>
. . .
<Color R="255" G="255" B="255" F="0"></Color>
</MainColors>

To close the file, it is important to add an end to the document, which is the identifier
of the end of the palette definition:
</Palette>

8.7.2 Color Palette Rules


The following rules must be observed in order to create an OmniScan-compatible
color palette file (.xml):

• The first thing is to include the .xml version number. These lines must be written
exactly as mentioned before.
• The second thing is to include the <Palette> identifier at the beginning of the
palette definition.
• The first line to include in the palette definition is the version number of the
definition. This line must be written as previously described.
• Always include the definition of the special colors before the definition of the
colors of the palette.
• Always include the identifiers of the beginning and of the end of the definition for
the color definition. The identifiers must be written exactly as mentioned
previously.
• Always include three special colors.
• Always include the 256 colors of the palette.
• The order of the special colors is “no-data”, “no-detection”, and “no-synchro.”
• The first line of the definition of the palette color is the first color of the palette.
• The last line of the definition of the palette color is the last color of the palette.
• An identifier of the beginning and end of the definition begins with a < sign
followed by the name, and ends with a > sign. It should not include any space.
• Always respect the definition format of a color as mentioned previously.
• Always include the end of the document, which is the identifier of the end of the
palette definition. This line must be written exactly as mentioned previously.

General Procedures 129


• An identifier must always be written on one line only.
• An identifier must be alone on the line.
• The definition of a color must be written on one line only.
• A color definition must be alone on the line.
• In order to ease the reading of the file, it is possible to add spaces at the beginning
of the lines to align the groups of information. It is also possible to add empty
lines.
• The file name extension must be .pal.

The following is an example of a palette definition file. Note that we have not used all
the 256 colors in that example.
<?xml version='1.0'?>
<!-- This file represents an Omniscan palette colors definition -->

<Palette>
<Version>2.0</Version>

<SpecialColors>
<Color R="0" G="0" B="0" F="0"></Color>
<Color R="255" G="255" B="255" F="0"></Color>
<Color R="128" G="128" B="128" F="0"></Color>
</SpecialColors>
<MainColors>
<Color R="255" G="255" B="255" F="0"></Color>
<Color R="250" G="252" B="254" F="0"></Color>
<Color R="246" G="250" B="253" F="0"></Color>
:
:
<Color R="142" G="6" B="29" F="0"></Color>
<Color R="140" G="3" B="29" F="0"></Color>
</MainColors>
</Palette>

8.7.3 Changing the Amplitude Color Palette

To change the amplitude color palette

1 On the Main menu, select Display and press (Color).


2 In the Select list, select Amplitude (see Figure 8-12 on page 131).

130 Chapter 8
Figure 8-12 The list of color palette types

3 In the Start option button, enter the start point in signal amplitude (as a
percentage of the screen height) that will be the beginning of the color palette,
which will be white.
4 In the End option button, enter the end point in signal amplitude (as a percentage
of the screen height) that will be the end of the color palette, which will be red.
You can see the color palette scale on the right side of the A-scan view (see Figure
8-13 on page 131).

Figure 8-13 The palette on the side of the A-scan view

General Procedures 131


8.7.4 Changing the TOFD Palette

To change the TOFD palette

1 On the Main menu, select Display and press (Color).


2 In the Select list, select TOFD.
3 In the Contrast option button, set the appropriate value to modify the contrast of
the palette (see Figure 8-14 on page 132).

Figure 8-14 Selecting the TOFD-type color palette

— If you increase the value of the contrast, the colors of the palette are
distributed on a larger amplitude scale, which increases the difference of
color between each percentage.
— If you decrease the value of the contrast, the colors of the palette are
distributed on a smaller amplitude scale, which decreases the difference of
color between each percentage.
4 In the Brightness option button, set the appropriate value to modify the
brightness of the colors.

132 Chapter 8
— If you increase the value of the brightness, the zoom of the color palette
moves towards positive amplitude values. Therefore, any values that are
below the start value of the ruler will be black.
— If you decrease the value of the brightness, the values that are above the end
value of the ruler will be white.

8.7.5 Changing the Depth Color Palette

To change the depth color palette

1 On the Main menu, select Gate/Alarm and press (Thickness) [see Figure
8-15 on page 133].

Figure 8-15 The Thickness submenu of the Gate/Alarm menu

2 In the Min option button, enter the minimum value of the color palette.
3 In the Max option button, enter the maximum value of the color palette.

4 On the Main menu, select Display and press (Color).


5 In the Select list, select Depth (see Figure 8-16 on page 134).

General Procedures 133


Figure 8-16 Selecting the depth-type color palette

6 In the Min option button, enter a minimum wall thickness value, keeping in mind
that any result lower than this value will be displayed in red.
7 In the Max option button, enter a maximum wall thickness value, keeping in
mind that any result higher than this value will be displayed in blue.
8 In the Mode list, select a display option (see Figure 8-17 on page 134).

Figure 8-17 The depth palette display modes

134 Chapter 8
8.7.6 Loading a Color Palette

To load a color palette

1 Build a color palette in .pal format (refer to “Creating a Color Palette” on


page 126).
2 Transfer the .pal color palette file into an OmniScan-compatible storage device in
the \App\PA\User\Palette folder (if these folders do not exist, create them).
3 Connect the storage device to the OmniScan.
4 Reboot the OmniScan PA.

5 On the Main menu, select Display and press (Color).


6 In the Select list, select the palette you want to use: Amplitude, TOFD, or Depth.

7 Press Load (see Figure 8-18 on page 135).

Figure 8-18 Opening the file manager for the color palette files

8 In the Color Palette Manager, use the Scroll knob to select the color palette file you
created (see Figure 8-19 on page 136).

General Procedures 135


Figure 8-19 The Color Palette Manager

8.8 Importing a Focal Law File

This section describes how import a focal law file.

Note: The phased array calculator possesses some limitations. To improve


detection, a more sophisticated calculator can be used and the resulting focal
laws can then be loaded into the OmniScan PA.

To import a focal law file

1 Calculate the phased array beam with an external calculator.


2 Save the results of the calculation as a .law file. No other formats are supported.

136 Chapter 8
3 Transfer that file to an OmniScan-compatible storage device in the
\App\PA\User\Law folder (create the folder if necessary).
4 Reboot the OmniScan with the focal law file loaded in the storage device.

5 On the Main menu, select PGM Probe, press (Laws), and then proceed as
follows:
a) Set the Auto Program option to Off (see Figure 8-20 on page 137).

Figure 8-20 The Auto Program option

b) Press (Load Law File) to open the Law File Manager and, using the
Scroll knob, select the required law file (see Figure 8-21 on page 138).

General Procedures 137


Figure 8-21 The Law File Manager

c) Press (Open).

6 Press (Configuration) and, in the Scan Type list, select the type of scan for
the selected focal law file (see Figure 8-22 on page 139).

138 Chapter 8
Figure 8-22 The list of scan types

8.9 Linking a Procedure to a Setup on the OmniScan PA

This section describes how to link a procedure to a setup on the OmniScan PA.

To link a procedure to a setup

1 Build the setup related to the procedure on the OmniScan PA.


2 Save that setup and note its name (for details, refer to “Locking and Unlocking a
Setup” on page 192).
3 Write the procedure in any software that allows saving files in the HTML format.
4 Save the procedure as an .htm file (Microsoft® Word does this using the Save As
command and the Web page save type).

IMPORTANT
The .htm procedure must have the exact same name as the setup. Also, if an
image folder is generated for the procedure, then its name must be left
unchanged when it is transferred to the OmniScan PA.

General Procedures 139


5 On an OmniScan-compatible storage device, create the following folders:
\PA\Setup.
6 Transfer the .htm file to the OmniScan-compatible storage device in the
\App\PA\User\Setup folder.
7 Reboot the OmniScan PA with the storage device attached.
8 Using the File Manager, transfer the .htm procedure to the \PA\Setup folder on
the OmniScan PA, making sure that the setup of the same name is in this folder.
9 Use the File Manager to load the setup.

From then on, pressing the Help key ( ) on the OmniScan PA once brings up the
procedure linked to this setup procedure by name. Pressing the key a second time
brings up the regular OmniScan PA help. Pressing the key a third time returns you to
the data view screen.

8.10 Making Reports

This section presents the procedures configure and print reports.

8.10.1 Configuring a Report


This section explains how to configure a report.

To configure a report

1 On the Main menu, select File and press Format.


2 Set the option buttons (refer to “Format” on page 41) at the bottom of the screen to
the On or Off position according to the information you want to add in the report
(see Figure 8-23 on page 141).

140 Chapter 8
Figure 8-23 Buttons to include information in the report

3 In the view list, select either the current view or the defect table, or nothing added
to the report.

4 If the User Field option is required press and proceed as follows or skip to
step 5.
a) In the Select list, select the number of the user field you want to include in the
report (see Figure 8-24 on page 141).

Figure 8-24 The User Field submenu option buttons

b) Make sure that the Enable toggle button is activated in order to make it
appear in the report.
c) Make sure that the Label edit option button displays the information you
want. If it does not, enter the new information in the edit field (see Figure 8-25
on page 142).
d) Make sure that the Content edit button displays the information you want
attached to the label. If it does not, enter the new information in the edit field
(see Figure 8-25 on page 142).

General Procedures 141


Figure 8-25 The Label and Content user fields in a report

e) In the Select list, choose the number of the next user field you want to include
in the report.
f) Repeat steps 2c through 2f until all the required user fields have been
activated.

5 If a note or a header is needed in the report, press and proceed as follows or


skip to step 6.

a) Press (Edit Notes) or (Edit Header) to open the note pad (see
Figure 8-26 on page 142).

Figure 8-26 Note options

b) Type the note using the function keys or a keyboard.

c) Press to close the note pad.


d) Choose the Accept button to accept the changes and save the note.
The note is displayed at the top of the report footer and the header is
displayed at the top of the report header (see Figure 8-27 on page 143).

142 Chapter 8
Figure 8-27 The header note (top) and the footer note (bottom) in the report

6 Press (Report) and proceed as follows:


a) In the File Name button, enter a name for the report (see Figure 8-28 on
page 144).
For more information about the available variables, refer to “File” on page 37.

General Procedures 143


Figure 8-28 The report submenu options

b) In the Paper Size list, select the desired paper size for the report.
c) Choose the Build button to display a preview of the report and do one of the
following:
(1) Choose the Print button to print the report directly, providing you have a
compatible printer connected to one of the USB ports.
(2) Choose the Save and Close button to save the report on the destination
device and return to the File > Report submenu.
(3) Choose the Close button to return to the File > Report submenu without
saving the report.

8.10.2 Printing a Report from a Remote Computer


It is possible to transfer a report from the OmniScan PA to a remote computer, and
then print it from that computer.

To print a report from a remote computer

1 Create a report on the OmniScan PA, save it on the CompactFlash® memory card,
and note the name of the report.
2 Remove the CompactFlash memory card from the OmniScan MX and insert it
into a memory card reader connected to your computer.
3 Go to the \App\PA\User\Report folder on the CompactFlash memory card.

144 Chapter 8
4 Copy both the report file and the folder with the same name to the remote
computer.
5 Open the report by double-clicking the .htm file.
6 Once in the Web browser (that is, Microsoft Internet Explorer), click the File menu
and click the Page Setup command.
7 In the Margins group box, enter 10 in the Left text box, and then enter 10 in the
Right text box. This assumes that your unit of measurement is the millimeter.
8 Click the OK button.
9 Print the report.

8.10.3 Changing the Company Logo


It is possible to customize a report by changing the default logo with the logo from
your own company.

To change the company logo on a single report

1 Create a logo that does not exceed 130 × 60 pixels. A bigger image disrupts the
rest of the layout.
2 Save it as logo.jpg (the name must be identical).
3 Create a report on the OmniScan PA, save it on the CompactFlash memory card,
and note the name of the report (<Report Name>_files).
4 Remove the CompactFlash memory card from the OmniScan MX and insert it in a
memory card reader connected to your computer.
5 Go to the \App\PA\User\Report\<Report Name>_files subfolder on the
CompactFlash memory card or User\PA\Report\ <Report Name>_files subfolder
on the user’s DiskOnChip, depending on where the report was saved.
6 Replace the existing logo.jpg image file by the one you created.

You can replace the logo on all the reports you produce, as explained in the following
procedure.

General Procedures 145


To change the company logo on all the reports

1 Create a logo that does not exceed 130 × 60 pixels. A bigger image disrupts the
rest of the layout.
2 Save it as logo.jpg (the name must be identical).
3 Shut down the OmniScan MX and remove its CompactFlash memory card.
4 Insert the memory card in a card reader connected to your computer.
5 Go to the \App\PA\Custom\<report template name> folder on the CompactFlash
memory card. If the folder does not exist, create one.
6 Copy the logo.jpg image file you created to the \App\PA\Custom\<report
template name> folder on the CompactFlash memory card.
7 Remove the memory card from the reader and insert it into the OmniScan MX.

8.11 Verifying and Programming Acquisition Module Options

This section describes how to verify options available on an acquisition module and
how to program options.

To verify the options available on an acquisition module

1 On the Main menu, select Utilities, press (Service), and press (System
Info).
2 Using the Scroll knob, scroll down the page until you get to the Acquisition
Module section. The list of the options with their status is displayed (see Figure
8-29 on page 147).

146 Chapter 8
Figure 8-29 The Acquisition Module section

To program a new option on an acquisition module

1 On the Main menu, select Utilities, press (Options).

2 Press (Option Key).


A dialog box for the acquisition module option key number appears (see Figure
8-30 on page 147).

Figure 8-30 The dialog box requesting a key number

3 Note the current acquisition module option key number.

General Procedures 147


4 Contact the After-Sales Service of Olympus NDT Canada and order the software
options required. You will need the current acquisition module option key
number.
5 Once you have obtained the new key number, enter it in the dialog box, and then
choose OK.
6 Reboot the OmniScan PA to activate the new option.
Refer to the previous procedure to find out the list of acquisition module options
supported by the software.

8.12 Connecting the OmniScan MX Directly to a Computer


(Windows XP)

This section describes how to set up a direct network connection between the
OmniScan MX and a computer running the Microsoft® Windows® XP operating
system.

8.12.1 Connecting the Hardware (Windows XP)

To connect the hardware (Windows XP)

1 Connect an Ethernet™ (RJ-45) cable to the network port of the remote computer.
2 Connect the other end of the cable to the OmniScan MX Ethernet port.

8.12.2 Configuring the Remote Computer (Windows XP)

To configure the remote computer (Windows XP)

1 On the remote computer, open the Control Panel window.


2 Open the Network Connections control panel by choosing its icon (see Figure
8-31 on page 149).

148 Chapter 8
Figure 8-31 The Network Connections icon

3 Double-click the left mouse button on the connection you want to configure.
The Local Area Connection Status dialog box appears (see Figure 8-32 on
page 149).

Figure 8-32 The Local Area Connection Status dialog box (Windows XP)

4 In the Local Area Connection Properties, on the General tab, click the Properties
button (see Figure 8-33 on page 150).
5 Make sure that the three following items are available in the connection window:
• Client for Microsoft Networks

General Procedures 149


• File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks
• Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)

Figure 8-33 The Properties dialog box for the selected connection (Windows XP)

6 Select the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) item.


7 Click the Properties button.
The Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties dialog box appears (see Figure 8-34 on
page 151).

150 Chapter 8
Figure 8-34 The Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties dialog box (Windows XP)

8 Select the Use the following IP address option.


9 In the IP address text box, type an IP address (see Figure 8-34 on page 151).
10 In the Subnet Mask text box, type a subnet mask (see Figure 8-34 on page 151).
11 Click the OK button to confirm the changes and close the dialog box.

General Procedures 151


8.12.3 Creating a User Account on the Remote Computer (Windows XP)

To create a user account on the remote computer (Windows XP)

1 On the Windows XP desktop, using the right mouse button, click the
My Computer icon, and then select the Manage command.
The Computer Management window appears (see Figure 8-35 on page 152).

Figure 8-35 The Computer Management window (Windows XP)

2 In the left window pane, using the left mouse button, double-click Local Users
and Groups.
3 In the left window pane, select the Users folder.
4 On the Action menu, select the New User command.
The New User dialog box appears (see Figure 8-36 on page 153).

152 Chapter 8
Figure 8-36 The New User dialog box (Windows XP)

5 In the User name text box, type Omniscan.


6 In the Password and Confirm password text boxes, type Omniscan.
7 Clear the following check boxes (see Figure 8-36 on page 153):
• User must change password at next logon
• User cannot change password
• Account is disabled
8 Select the Password never expires check box.
9 Click the Create button.
The New User dialog box closes.
10 Close the Computer Management window.

General Procedures 153


8.12.4 Creating a Shared Folder on the Remote Computer (Windows XP)

To create a shared folder on the remote computer (Windows XP)

1 Create a folder named “Omniscan” on the hard disk drive of the remote
computer.
2 Using the right mouse button, click the recently created Omniscan folder and
click the Sharing and Security command.
The Omniscan Properties dialog box appears.
3 In the Omniscan Properties dialog box, click the Sharing tab (see Figure 8-37 on
page 154).

Figure 8-37 The Omniscan Properties dialog box (Windows XP)

4 Select the Share this folder option.

154 Appendix 8
5 At this point, if the Permissions button does not appear in the Share this folder
group box, proceed as follows:
a) On the Windows XP desktop, double-click the My Computer icon.
b) On the Tools menu, click Folder Options (see Figure 8-38 on page 155).

Figure 8-38 The Tools menu

The Folder Options dialog box appears (see Figure 8-39 on page 155).

Figure 8-39 The Folder Options dialog box (Windows XP)

General Procedures 155


c) Click the View tab.
d) Clear the Use simple file sharing check box (see Figure 8-39 on page 155).
e) Click the OK button.
6 In the Omniscan Properties dialog box, click the Permissions button.
The Permissions for Omniscan dialog box appears (see Figure 8-40 on page 156).

Figure 8-40 The Permissions for Omniscan dialog box (Windows XP)

7 Click the Add button.


The Select Users or Groups dialog box appears (see Figure 8-41 on page 157).

156 Appendix 8
Figure 8-41 The Select Users or Groups dialog box (Windows XP)

8 Click the Locations button.


9 In the dialog box that appears, select the name of the remote computer, and then
click the OK button.
10 In the Select Users or Groups dialog box, in the Enter the object names to select
text box, type Omniscan (see Figure 8-41 on page 157), and then click OK.
11 In the Permissions for Omniscan dialog box, in the Allow column, select the
Change and Read check boxes (see Figure 8-42 on page 158), and then click OK.

General Procedures 157


Figure 8-42 The Permissions for Omniscan dialog box (Windows XP)

8.12.5 Configuring the OmniScan MX (Windows XP)

To configure the OmniScan MX (Windows XP)

1 On the OmniScan PA, go to Utilities > Network.


2 Set the DHCP option to Off.
3 In the IP Address option button, enter an IP address for the OmniScan MX. It
must be in the same range (the same first three blocks), but not identical to the IP
address of the remote computer (for example, 192.168.0.1 and 192.168.0.2).

158 Appendix 8
4 In the Subnet Mask option button, enter the subnet mask address of the
OmniScan MX. It must be the same address as the subnet on the remote
computer.
5 Choose the Apply button.
6 In the Remote PC option button, enter the name of the remote computer on the
network.
7 Choose the Connect option button.

8.12.6 Saving OmniScan PA Data on the Remote Computer (Windows XP)

To save OmniScan PA data on the remote computer (Windows XP)


♦ Choose File > File > Destination > Network.

8.13 Connecting the OmniScan Directly to a Computer (Windows 2000)

This section describes how to set up a direct network connection between the
OmniScan and a computer running the Microsoft Windows 2000 operating system.

8.13.1 Connecting the Hardware (Windows 2000)

To connect the hardware (Windows 2000)

1 Connect a crosslink Ethernet (RJ-45) cable to the network port of the remote
computer.
2 Connect the other end of the cable to the OmniScan MX Ethernet port.

8.13.2 Configuring the Remote Computer (Windows 2000)

To configure the remote computer (Windows 2000)

1 On the remote computer, open the Control Panel window.


2 Open the Network and Dial-up Connections control panel by choosing its icon
(see Figure 8-43 on page 160).

General Procedures 159


Figure 8-43 The Network and Dial-up Connections icon

3 Double-click the icon that represents the connection that you want to configure.
The Local Area Connection Status dialog box appears (see Figure 8-44 on
page 160).

Figure 8-44 The Local Area Connection Status dialog box (Windows 2000)

4 On the General tab, click the Properties button.


The Properties dialog box for the selected connection appears (see Figure 8-45 on
page 161).

160 Chapter 8
Figure 8-45 The Properties dialog box for the selected connection (Windows 2000)

5 Make sure that the three following items are available in the middle list box (see
Figure 8-45 on page 161):
• Client for Microsoft Networks
• File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks
• Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)
6 Select the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) item.
7 Click the Properties button.
The Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties dialog box appears (see Figure 8-46 on
page 162).

General Procedures 161


Figure 8-46 The Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties dialog box (Windows 2000)

8 Select the Use the following IP address option.


9 In the IP address text box, type an IP address (see Figure 8-46 on page 162).
10 In the Subnet Mask text box, type a subnet mask (see Figure 8-46 on page 162). It
must be the same address as the OmniScan MX.
11 Click the OK button to confirm the changes and close the dialog box.

8.13.3 Creating a User Account on the Remote Computer (Windows 2000)

To create a user account on the remote computer (Windows 2000)

1 In the Control Panel window, open the Users and Passwords control panel.

162 Chapter 8
The Users and Passwords dialog box appears.
2 Click the Advanced tab (see Figure 8-47 on page 163).

Figure 8-47 The Users and Passwords dialog box (Windows 2000)

3 In the Advanced User Management group box, click the Advanced button.
The Local Users and Groups window appears (see Figure 8-48 on page 164).

General Procedures 163


Figure 8-48 The Local Users and Groups window (Windows 2000)

4 In the left window pane, select the Users folder.


5 On the Action menu, click New User.
The New User dialog box appears (see Figure 8-49 on page 165).

164 Chapter 8
Figure 8-49 The New User dialog box (Windows 2000)

6 In the User name text box, type Omniscan.


7 In the Password and Confirm password text boxes, type Omniscan.
8 Clear the following check boxes (see Figure 8-49 on page 165):
• User must change password at next logon
• User cannot change password
• Account is disabled
9 Select the Password never expires check box.
10 Click the Create button.
The New User dialog box closes.

General Procedures 165


11 Close the Local Users and Groups window.
12 In the Users and Passwords dialog box, click the OK button.

8.13.4 Creating a Shared Folder on the Remote Computer (Windows 2000)

To create a shared folder on the remote computer (Windows 2000)

1 Create a folder named “Omniscan” somewhere on the hard disk drive of the
remote computer.
2 Using the right mouse button, click the recently created Omniscan folder and
click the Sharing command.
The Omniscan Properties dialog box appears.
3 In the Omniscan Properties dialog box, click the Sharing tab (see Figure 8-50 on
page 166).

Figure 8-50 The Omniscan Properties dialog box (Windows 2000)

166 Chapter 8
4 Select the Share this folder option.
5 Click the Permissions button.
The Permissions for OmniScan dialog box appears (see Figure 8-51 on page 167).

Figure 8-51 The Permissions for OmniScan dialog box (Windows 2000)

6 Click the Add button.


The Select Users or Groups dialog box appears (see Figure 8-52 on page 168).

General Procedures 167


Figure 8-52 The Select Users or Groups dialog box (Windows 2000)

7 In the Look in drop-down list, select the name of the remote computer.

Note: The Look in drop-down list may be disabled on certain computers. If


that happens to be the case, skip step 7 and go to step 8.

8 In the user list, double-click Omniscan (see Figure 8-53 on page 169), and then
click OK.
9 In the Permissions for Omniscan dialog box, in the Allow column, select the
Change and Read check boxes (see Figure 8-53 on page 169), and then click OK.

168 Chapter 8
Figure 8-53 The Permissions for Omniscan dialog box (Windows 2000)

8.13.5 Configuring the OmniScan MX (Windows 2000)

To configure the OmniScan MX (Windows 2000)

1 On the OmniScan PA, go to Utilities > Network.


2 Set the DHCP option to Off.
3 In the IP Address option button, enter an IP address for the OmniScan MX. It
must be in the same range (the same first three blocks), but not identical to the IP
address of the remote computer (for example, 192.168.0.1 and 192.168.0.2).
4 In the Subnet Mask option button, enter the subnet mask address of the
OmniScan MX. It must be identical to the subnet mask address of the remote
computer.
5 Choose the Apply button.
6 In the Remote PC option button, enter the name of the remote computer on the
network.
7 Choose the Connect option button.

General Procedures 169


8.13.6 Saving OmniScan PA Data on the Remote Computer (Windows 2000)

To save OmniScan PA data on the remote computer (Windows 2000)

1 On the Main menu, select File and press (File).


2 In the Destination list, select Network.

8.14 Connecting the OmniScan MX to a Network

This section describes how to set up a connection between the OmniScan MX and a
computer network. This procedure works for both Windows 2000 and Window XP
systems.

To connect the OmniScan MX to a computer network

1 Connect a straight Ethernet (RJ-45) cable to a network port (usually a wall plug).
2 Connect the other end of the cable to the OmniScan MX Ethernet port.

3 On the OmniScan PA unit Main menu, select Utilities and press (Network).
4 Set the DHCP option to On (see Figure 8-54 on page 171).

170 Chapter 8
Figure 8-54 The DHCP option button

5 Press (Apply).
6 In the Remote PC option button, enter the name of the remote computer on the
network (see Figure 8-55 on page 171).

Figure 8-55 Remote computer connection

7 Press (Connect).

To save OmniScan PA data on the remote computer

1 On the Main menu, select File and press (File).


2 In the Destination list, select Network.

General Procedures 171


172 Chapter 8
9. File Management Procedures

This chapter groups techniques and procedures that relate to file management on the
OmniScan PA®.

9.1 File Manager Description

This section explains how to work with the File Manager utility (Utilities > Service >
File Manager).

9.1.1 Function Keys Used


This section presents the keys to use when you work with an OmniScan PA without
the use of any extra peripheral (mouse or keyboard).

The following is a quick reminder of the main keys used in these procedures.

Accept key Cancel key Scroll knob

Up key Down key

File Management Procedures 173


9.1.2 Interface
The interface of the File Manager is designed to provide as many management
options as possible, even if no keyboard or mouse is connected to the unit. There are
four areas in the File Manager (see Figure 9-1 on page 174).

File path boxes

Source Destination
pane pane

Status boxes

Figure 9-1 The File Manager areas

File path boxes


Display the path to the destination where the folders and files, appearing in the
pane, are stored.
Source pane
Whenever a file management command is used, it affects the selected item (file or
folder) in the source pane. This pane also indicates the source folder when
copying or moving a file or folder.
Destination pane
This pane is only used with the Copy and Move options. It displays the
destination folder for the file that is being copied or moved.

174 Chapter 9
An item cannot be deleted or renamed in this pane, nor can an item be moved or
copied to the source pane.
Status boxes
The upper status box displays file size information when applicable, and the
lower status box displays the name of the selected item when applicable (see
Figure 9-2 on page 175).

Figure 9-2 The status boxes

Option buttons

Close: Press to close the File Manager.

File Type: Press to open the list of files (see Figure 9-3 on page 175). Use the
Scroll knob to move up and down the list and the Accept key to select an item.

Figure 9-3 The File Type list of the File Manager

Create Folder: Press to create a new folder. The new folder appears in the
destination pane.

File Management Procedures 175


Select: Press to select a highlighted item in the list of files and folders. Once a
folder is selected, the button name changes to Unselect.

Select All: Press to select all the items in the pane. Once all items are
selected, the button name changes to Unselect All.

Copy: Press to copy a selected item from the source pane to the destination
pane.

Move: Press to move a selected item from the source pane to the destination
pane.

Note: Using a mouse to drag files across the two panes to copy or
move them does not work, as the drag-and-drop feature is not currently
supported.

Delete: Press to delete a selected item.

Rename: Press to rename a selected item.

9.1.3 Navigation
The following describes how to use the keys to move around the File Manager areas.

Moving inside the pane


To move up and down the list of folders and files, use the Scroll knob or the Up and
Down keys.

To select the highlighted folder or file, press the Accept key.

To open the parent folder, select the top folder and press the Accept key (see Figure
9-4 on page 177).

176 Chapter 9
Figure 9-4 The parent folder icon

The path file box shows you where your are in the folder architecture (see Figure 9-5
on page 177).

Figure 9-5 The Setup folder (left) and its parent folder (User) [right]

Switching between panes


To move from one pane to the other, press the Cancel key once.

The source pane becomes pale blue (see Figure 9-6 on page 178).

File Management Procedures 177


Figure 9-6 The source pane highlighted

Either use the Scroll knob or the Up and Down keys to switch panes (the selected
pane is the one in pale blue), and press the Accept key to select the pane.

Note: Pressing the Cancel key twice closes the File Manager.

9.2 Saving Files

This section presents the file saving function of the OmniScan.

The destination to save and retrieve files is selected in the Destination option button
of the File > File submenu (see Figure 9-7 on page 179).

178 Chapter 9
Figure 9-7 The destination list

At all times you can save any file type to the storage card (CompactFlash®) or to a
network or external hard drive provided that there is enough space.

The setup files can be saved to all destinations, including the DiskOnChip®.
However, using the DiskOnChip as a saving location can only be done for setup files.

This means that when you select Disk On Chip in the Destination list, you will not be
able to save A-scan, C-scan, defect table, screen capture, and report files. You need to
change the destination again to enable the save function for these files.

9.2.1 Saving a Setup


It is recommended to regularly save your setup to prevent accidental loss of data.

To save a setup

1 On the Main menu, select File and press File.


2 In the Destination list, select the location where you want to save the setup (see
Figure 9-8 on page 180)

File Management Procedures 179


Figure 9-8 The list of file storage locations

3 Press (Save Setup As).


4 In the File name button, enter the name of the setup (see Figure 9-9 on page 180).

Figure 9-9 File Manager to save a setup file

180 Chapter 9
5 Press (Save).

6 Press to close the File Manager.

9.2.2 Saving a Data File


It is recommended to regularly save your data to prevent accidental loss of data.

To save a data file

1 On the Main menu, select File and press File.


2 In the Save Mode list, select the desired option (see Figure 9-10 on page 181).

Figure 9-10 The list of modes to save data

File Management Procedures 181


3 Press (File Name) and then enter a file name root before the series of ####
(see Figure 9-11 on page 182).
For more information on file naming codes, refer to “File” on page 37 under “File
Name.”

Figure 9-11 File Name option button

4 Press .
OR

Press (Save Data) in the File > File submenu.

9.3 Opening Files

This section describes how to open different files on the OmniScan PA.

• Setup Files
• Data Files
• Image Files
• Report Files
• Multimedia Files

9.3.1 Setup Files

To open a setup file

1 On the Main menu, select File and press File.


2 In the Destination list, select the location where the setup is saved (see Figure
9-12 on page 183).

182 Chapter 9
Figure 9-12 The list of file storage locations

3 Press (Open).
OR

Press .
4 In the File Type list, select Setup (see Figure 9-13 on page 184).

File Management Procedures 183


Figure 9-13 The list of setup files in the File Manager

5 Use the Scroll knob to select the desired setup file and press (Open).

9.3.2 Data Files

To open a data file

1 On the Main menu, select File and press File.


2 In the Destination list, select the location where the data file is saved (see Figure
9-14 on page 185).

184 Chapter 9
Figure 9-14 The list of file storage locations

3 Press (Open).
OR

Press .
4 In the File Type list, select Data (see Figure 9-15 on page 186).

File Management Procedures 185


Figure 9-15 The File Type list

5 Use the Scroll knob to select the desired data file and press (Open).

9.3.3 Image Files

To open an image file

1 On the Main menu, select File and press File.


2 In the Destination list, select the location where the image is saved (see Figure
9-16 on page 187).

186 Chapter 9
Figure 9-16 The list of file storage locations

3 Press (Open).
OR

Press .
In the File Type list, select Image (see Figure 9-17 on page 188).

File Management Procedures 187


Figure 9-17 The the list of image files and the image preview in the File Manager

4 Use the Scroll knob to select the desired image file.


A preview of the file appears in the destination pane.

5 Press (Open).
The image appears on the entire screen and you have two options, printing the
image or closing it.

6 Press to go back to the File Manager.

7 Press (Close) to return to the data view screen.

188 Chapter 9
9.3.4 Report Files

To open a report file

1 On the Main menu, select File and press File.


2 In the Destination list, select the location where the report is saved (see Figure
9-18 on page 189).

Figure 9-18 The list of file storage locations

3 Press (Open).
OR

Press .
In the File Type list, select Report (see Figure 9-19 on page 190).

File Management Procedures 189


Figure 9-19 The list of reports and the report preview in the File Manager

4 Use the Scroll knob to select the desired report file.


A preview of the file appears in the destination pane.

5 Press (Open).
The image appears on the entire screen and you have two options, printing the
report or closing it.

6 Press to go back to the File Manager.

7 Press (Close) to return to the data view screen.

190 Chapter 9
9.3.5 Multimedia Files

To open a multimedia file

1 On the Main menu, select File and press File.


2 In the Destination list, select the location where the file is saved (see Figure 9-20
on page 191).

Figure 9-20 The list of file storage locations

3 Press (Open).
OR

Press .
In the File Type list, select Multimedia.

4 Use the Scroll knob to select the desired multimedia file and press (Open).

5 Press (Close) to return to the data view screen.

File Management Procedures 191


9.4 Locking and Unlocking a Setup

This section describes how to lock and unlock a setup file.

If a setup file is locked, only the User menu remains active. For more information
about the configuration of the User menu, refer to “Configuring the User Menu” on
page 123.

Note: When you open a locked setup file, the setup file remains locked.

To lock a setup

1 On the Main menu, select Utilities and press (Pref.).

2 Press (Admin Password).


3 In the box that appears, enter a numeric password and press the Accept key.
4 In the box to confirm the password, enter the numeric password again and press
the Accept key.

5 On the Main menu, select File and press File.


6 In the Destination list, select the location where the setup is saved (see Figure
9-21 on page 192).

Figure 9-21 The list of file storage locations

192 Chapter 9
7 Press (Save Setup As).

8 In the File Manager, set Setup Lock to On, and press (Save) [see Figure 9-22
on page 193].

Figure 9-22 The Setup Lock button in the File Manager

9 A box to confirm overwriting the setup appears, press the Accept key.
The setup is locked and the access to the Main menu is disabled (see Figure 9-23
on page 194).

File Management Procedures 193


Figure 9-23 Available submenus for a locked setup

To unlock a setup

1 Press and simultaneously.


2 In the box to unlock the setup, enter the password used to lock the setup and
press the Accept key.
The setup is unlocked and the access to the Main menu is enabled (see Figure 9-24
on page 195).

194 Chapter 9
Figure 9-24 Access to the Main menu after unlocking a setup

3 On the Main menu, select File and press File.

4 Press (Save Setup As).

5 In the File Manager press (Save) [see Figure 9-25 on page 196].

File Management Procedures 195


Figure 9-25 The locked setup information in the File Manager

6 A box to confirm overwriting the setup appears, press the Accept key.
7 In the box that appears, enter the numeric password used to lock the setup, and
press the Accept key.
You are returned to the data view and to normal operation.

196 Chapter 9
10. Probe Management Procedures

This chapter groups procedures that relate to probe configuration and management
on the OmniScan® PA.

10.1 Defining a Probe

The procedure in this section describes how to define a probe for use with the
OmniScan PA.

This option is only available if the following conditions are met:

• The probe used by the operator is not an R/D Tech® probe.


• The OmniScan PA must be equipped with an interface connector that converts the
signal from the R/D Tech connector to a Hypertronics™ connector.
• The client has to have bought that specific option.

To define a probe

1 On the Main menu, select Probe/Part and press (Select).


2 In the Select list, select Defines (see Figure 10-1 on page 198).
This selection gives you access to the Define Probe and Define Wedge option
buttons.

Probe Management Procedures 197


Figure 10-1 The Defines parameter for probe and wedge definition

3 Press (Define Probe) to open the Probe Definition Manager (see Figure 10-2
on page 199).

198 Chapter 10
Figure 10-2 The Probe Definition Manager

4 Press (New).
5 In the Serial # option button, enter the probe serial number or model.

6 Press (Save).
7 In the Freq. (MHz) list, select the probe frequency.
8 In Ref. Point, enter the probe reference point, which is the distance between the
front of the wedge (or probe) and the first element of the probe (see Figure 10-3 on
page 200).
This value is negative because the OmniScan PA establishes the 0 reference point
at the position of the first element by default. To set the 0 reference point at the
front edge of the probe you must subtract the distance between the front edge
from the position of the first element.

Probe Management Procedures 199


1

5.3 cm

Figure 10-3 The probe reference point measurement

9 In the Probe Type list, select the probe type.


10 In the Elements Qty option button, enter the number of elements in the probe.
11 In the Pitch option button, enter the distance between the probe elements.

12 Press (Save).

13 Press (Close) to quit the Probe Definition Manager.


The new probe is now defined and available in the Select Probe list.

To select a probe from the probe list

1 On the Main menu, select Probe/Part and press (Select).


2 The Select option button must be set to Select Tx/Rx.
3 In the Select Probe list, select the appropriate probe.

10.2 Importing and Exporting a Probe

The procedures in this section describe how to import and export the definition of a
probe used with the OmniScan PA.

200 Chapter 10
To import a probe

1 On the Main menu, select Probe/Part and press (Select).


2 In the Select list, select Defines (see Figure 10-4 on page 201).
This selection gives you access to the Define Probe and Define Wedge option
buttons.

Figure 10-4 The Defines parameter for probe and wedge definition

3 Press (Define Probe) to open the Probe Definition Manager (see Figure 10-5
on page 202).

Probe Management Procedures 201


Figure 10-5 The Probe Definition Manager

4 Press (Manage).
5 Choose Import to import your probe from \Storage Card\App\PA\User\Probe
towards the DiskOnChip on \User\PA\Probe.

To export a probe

1 On the Main menu, select Probe/Part and press (Select).


2 In the Select list, select Defines (see Figure 10-4 on page 201).

3 Press (Define Probe) to open the Probe Definition Manager (see Figure 10-5
on page 202).

202 Chapter 10
4 Press (Manage).
5 Choose Export to export your probe from the DiskOnChip on \User\PA\Probe
towards \Storage Card\App\PA\User\Probe.

10.3 Defining a Wedge

The procedure in this section describes how to define a wedge for use with the
OmniScan PA.

To define a wedge

1 On the Main menu select Probe/Part and press (Select).


2 In the Select list, select Defines (see Figure 10-6 on page 203).

Figure 10-6 The Defines option in the Select list

Probe Management Procedures 203


3 Press (Define Wedge) to open the Wedge Definition Manager (see Figure
10-7 on page 204).

Figure 10-7 New wedge serial number

4 Press (New) and (Serial Number).


5 In the Serial Number option button, enter the wedge serial number or model.
6 In the Model option button, make sure Custom is selected.

7 Press (Save).

8 Press (Browse) to select the new wedge in the list and press (Edit).
9 In the Angle button, enter the angle of the ultrasound beam in the wedge (see
Figure 10-8 on page 205).

204 Chapter 10
This parameter is usually inscribed on the wedge, if not, use Snell’s law to
sin θ sin θ
calculate it: ------------1- = ------------2-
V1 V2

Figure 10-8 Wedge parameters

10 In the Velocity button, enter the ultrasound velocity in the wedge.


For an R/D Tech wedge, the value is usually 2330 m/s.
11 In the Pri. offset button, enter the value of the primary offset, which is the
distance between the front of the wedge and the first element of the probe (see
Figure 10-9 on page 206).
This value is negative because the OmniScan PA establishes the 0 reference point
at the position of the first element by default. To set the 0 reference point at the
front edge of the wedge you must subtract the distance between the front edge
from the position of the first element.

Probe Management Procedures 205


8.0 cm

Figure 10-9 The primary offset measurement

12 In the Sec. offset button, enter 0, which is the center of the probe (see Figure 10-10
on page 206).

Figure 10-10 The secondary offset

13 In the Height button, enter the height of the first element (see Figure 10-11 on
page 207).
This parameter is usually given by the wedge manufacturer.

206 Chapter 10
1.0 cm

Figure 10-11 The height of the first element

14 Press (Save).
The new wedge is now defined an can be selected in the Select Wedge list (see Figure
10-12 on page 207).

Figure 10-12 The list of predefined and custom-defined wedges

Probe Management Procedures 207


To select a wedge

1 On the Main menu, select Probe/Part and press (Select).


2 The Select option button must be set to Select Tx/Rx.
3 In the Select Wedge list, select the appropriate wedge.

10.4 Importing and Exporting a Wedge

This procedure describes how to import and export a wedge for use with the
OmniScan PA.

To import a wedge

1 On the Main menu, select Probe/Part and press (Select).


2 In the Select list, select Defines (see Figure 10-13 on page 208).
This selection gives you access to the Define Probe and Define Wedge option
buttons.

Figure 10-13 The Defines parameter for probe and wedge definition

208 Chapter 10
3 Press (Define Wedge) to open the Wedge Definition Manager (see Figure
10-14 on page 209).

Figure 10-14 List of wedges in the Wedge Definition Manager

4 Press (Manage).
5 Choose Import to import your wedge from
\Storage Card\App\PA\User\Wedge towards the DiskOnChip on
\User\PA\Wedge.

To export a wedge

1 On the Main menu, select Probe/Part and press (Select).


2 In the Select list, select Defines (see Figure 10-13 on page 208).

Probe Management Procedures 209


3 Press (Define Wedge) to open the Wedge Definition Manager (see Figure
10-14 on page 209).

4 Press (Manage).
5 Choose Export to export your wedge from the DiskOnChip on \User\PA\Wedge
towards \Storage Card\App\PA\User\Wedge.

10.5 Characterizing a Probe

This section describes how to characterize a probe.

To characterize a probe

1 Have a probe fire on an object with a spherical reflector. The best configuration is
a small metal ball (diameter of 2.5 mm) in water.

2 On the Main menu, select UT, press (Receiver), and then proceed as follows:
a) In the Filter list, select None (see Figure 10-15 on page 211).
b) Set Video Filter to Off.
c) In the Rectifier list, select RF.

210 Chapter 10
Figure 10-15 The Receiver parameters in the UT menu

3 Press (General).
4 Using the Start and Range option buttons adjust the time-base scale on the A-scan
to only fit the ball signal in the view.

Note: Use a very small range.

5 On the Main menu, select Gate/Alarm and press (Gate).


6 In the Gate list, select A (see Figure 10-16 on page 212).

Probe Management Procedures 211


Figure 10-16 The Gate parameters

7 Using the Start and Width option buttons, set gate A across the signal, as shown
in Figure 10-17 on page 212.

Figure 10-17 Gate A on the ball signal

8 On the Main menu, select Probe/Part, press (Characterize), and proceed as


follows:
a) If applicable, in the Procedure button, enter the name of the characterization
procedure.
b) In the Block Name button, enter the name of the part used in the
characterization.
c) Set FFT to OFF.
d) In the message that appears asking if you want to save the characterization,
select Yes.

212 Chapter 10
10.6 Defining the Part to Inspect

This procedure describes how to define a part that is to be inspected.

To define the part to inspect

1 On the Main menu, select Probe/Part, press (Parts).


2 In the Geometry list, select the option that defines the geometry of the part to be
inspected (see Figure 10-18 on page 213).
Plate for a flat part, or OD or ID for the external or internal inspection of a curved
part.
3 In Thickness, enter the part thickness and, if you have selected OD or ID in step
2, enter the part diameter in Diameter.
4 In the Material list, select the type of material the part is made of.
If you have selected Plate in the Geometry list, set Overlay to On.

Figure 10-18 Part definition parameters and list of materials

This concludes the probe characterization procedure.

Probe Management Procedures 213


214 Chapter 10
11. Calibration Procedures

This chapter contains calibration procedures for various types of inspections.

11.1 Sound Velocity Calibration

This section describes the sound velocity calibration procedures for the three most
common cases.

According to the type of probe and the calibration block used, calibration can be made
using radius, depth, or thickness (see Figure 11-1 on page 215).

Radius

Depth

Thickness

Figure 11-1 Three calibration cases

Calibration Procedures 215


IMPORTANT
The sound velocity calibration must be done before the wedge delay calibration
because the OmniScan PA uses the sound velocity determination for the wedge
delay calibration. If you calibrate the wedge delay first, you will get a message
warning you that the wedge delay calibration will be lost once you perform the
sound velocity calibration.

11.1.1 Sound Velocity Using Radius


This section presents the procedure to calibrate for sound velocity for an angle beam
probe using a calibration block with two known curvatures.

To calibrate the sound velocity using the radius

1 Place the probe on the calibration block as shown in Figure 11-2 on page 216).

Radius 1
Radius 2

Figure 11-2 Calibration block with curvatures

2 Press to open the Main menu, select UT, and press .

3 Press (General) and (Range), and set the time-base range in order to see
the two signals from the two radii.

216 Chapter 11
4 Press (Gain) and set the gain in order to see the first signal at about 80% of
the full screen height.
5 On the Main menu select Calibration.

6 Press (Phased Array) and (Mode), and select Velocity (see Figure 11-3
on page 217).

Figure 11-3 The Select Mode step of the calibration wizard

7 In the Select Mode step of the calibration wizard, press (Next).

8 Press (Angle) and enter the angle of the focal law you want to use for the
calibration (see Figure 11-4 on page 217).
The Gain, Start, and Range buttons can be used to make changes to your original
setup without having to leave the wizard.

Figure 11-4 The Select AScan step of the calibration wizard

9 Press (Next).

10 Press (Echo Type) and select Radius (see Figure 11-5 on page 217).

Figure 11-5 The Set Radius 1 and 2 step of the calibration wizard

Calibration Procedures 217


11 In Radius 1, enter the radius that corresponds to the first signal on the A-scan
time base.
12 In Radius 2, enter the radius that corresponds to the second signal on the A-scan
time base.

13 Press (Next).
14 In the Start and Width buttons, enter the start and width of gate A (red) so that
the first signal crosses the gate in the middle and that the gate is wide enough to
contain the complete width of the signal (see Figure 11-6 on page 218).

Figure 11-6 The Set Gate A on Radius 1 step of the calibration wizard

15 Set the Threshold value at 20% or 25%.

16 Press (Get Position).


17 In the Start and Width buttons, enter values to set gate A on the second signal the
same way it was done for the first signal.

18 Set the Threshold value at 20% or 25% and press (Get Position).

19 Press (Accept) if you agree with the value in the Material Velocity button.
OR

Press (Restart) if you want to repeat the procedure (see Figure 11-7 on
page 218).

Figure 11-7 The Accept step of the calibration wizard

The OmniScan PA is now calibrate for the sound velocity.

218 Chapter 11
11.1.2 Sound Velocity Using Depth
This section presents the procedure to calibrate for sound velocity for an angle beam
probe using a calibration block with two identical calibration defects at two different
known depths.

To calibrate the sound velocity using depth

1 Place the probe on the calibration block as shown in Figure 11-8 on page 219.

Depth 1

Depth 2

Figure 11-8 Calibration block with calibration defects

2 Press to open the Main menu, select UT, and press .

3 Press (General) and (Range), and set the time-base range in order to see
the two signals from the two calibration defects.

4 Press (Gain) and set the gain in order to see the first signal at about 80% of
the full screen height.
5 On the Main menu select Calibration.

6 Press (Phased Array) and (Mode), and select Velocity (see Figure 11-9
on page 220).

Calibration Procedures 219


Figure 11-9 The Select Mode step of the calibration wizard

7 In the Select Mode step of the calibration wizard, press (Next).

8 Press (Angle) and enter the angle of the focal law you want to use for the
calibration (see Figure 11-10 on page 220).
The Gain, Start, and Range buttons can be used to make changes to your original
setup without having to quit the wizard.

Figure 11-10 The Select AScan step of the calibration wizard

9 Press (Next).

10 Press (Echo Type) and select Depth (see Figure 11-11 on page 221).

220 Chapter 11
Figure 11-11 Setting the velocity calibration on depth

11 In Depth 1, enter the depth of the defect that corresponds to the first signal on the
A-scan time base (see Figure 11-12 on page 221).

Figure 11-12 The Set Depth 1 and 2 step of the calibration wizard

12 In Depth 2, enter the depth of the defect that corresponds to the second signal on
the A-scan time base.

13 Press (Next).

Calibration Procedures 221


14 In the Start and Width buttons, enter the start and width of gate A (red) so that
the first signal crosses the gate in the middle and that the gate is wide enough to
contain the complete width of the signal (see Figure 11-13 on page 222).

Figure 11-13 The Set Gate A on Depth 1 step of the calibration wizard

15 Press (Get Position).


16 In the Start and Width buttons, enter values to set gate A on the second signal the
same way it was done for the first signal.

17 Set the Threshold value at 20% or 25% and press (Get Position).

18 Press (Accept) if you agree with the value in the Material Velocity button.
OR

Press (Restart) if you want to repeat the procedure (see Figure 11-14 on
page 222).

Figure 11-14 The Accept step of the calibration wizard

The OmniScan PA is now calibrate for the sound velocity.

11.1.3 Sound Velocity Using Thickness


This section presents the procedure to calibrate for sound velocity for a 0-degree beam
using a calibration block with two known thicknesses.

222 Chapter 11
To calibrate the sound velocity using thickness

1 Place the probe on the calibration block as shown in Figure 11-15 on page 223).

Depth 1 Depth 2

Figure 11-15 Calibration block with two thicknesses

2 In UT > General > Range, set the time-base range in order to see a few multiples
of the back-wall signal.
3 In UT > General > Gain, set the gain in order to see the first signal at about 80% of
the full screen height.
4 Go to Calibration > UT Axis > Mode, and then select the Velocity option (see
Figure 11-16 on page 223).

Figure 11-16 The Select Mode step of the calibration wizard

5 In the Select Mode step of the calibration wizard, choose Next.


6 In the Echo Type list, select Thickness.
7 Choose the Thickness 1 edit button, and enter the first thickness.
8 Choose the Thickness 2 edit button, and enter the second thickness.
9 In Set Thickness 1 and 2, choose Next.

Calibration Procedures 223


10 In the Set Gate A on Thickness 1 step of the calibration wizard, proceed as
follows to set gate A on the first back-wall signal:
a) Set the Start and Width values so that the edges of gate A (red) are located on
each side of the signal.
b) Set the Threshold value at 25%.
11 Choose Get Position.
12 In the Set Gate A on Thickness 2 step of the calibration wizard, proceed as
follows to set gate A on the first back-wall signal of the second thickness:
a) Set the Start and Width values so that the edges of gate A (red) are located on
each side of the signal.
b) Set the Threshold value at 25%.
13 Choose Get Position.
14 Choose Accept if you agree with the value of the Material Velocity option button.
OR
Choose Restart if you want to repeat the procedure (see Figure 11-17 on
page 224).

Figure 11-17 Accept step of the calibration wizard

The OmniScan PA is now calibrate for the sound velocity

11.2 Wedge Delay Calibration

This section describes the wedge delay calibration procedure for the three most
common cases.

According to the type of probe and the calibration block used, calibration can be made
using radius, depth, or thickness (see Figure 11-18 on page 225).

224 Chapter 11
Radius

Depth

Thickness

Figure 11-18 Three calibration cases

IMPORTANT
The sound velocity calibration must be done before the wedge delay calibration
because the OmniScan PA uses the sound velocity determination for the wedge
delay calibration. If you calibrate the wedge delay first, you will get a message
warning you that the wedge delay calibration will be lost once you perform the
sound velocity calibration.

Calibration Procedures 225


11.2.1 Wedge Delay Using Radius
This section presents the procedure to calibrate the wedge delay for an angle beam
probe using a calibration block with two known curvatures.

To calibrate the wedge delay using radius

1 Place the probe on the calibration block as shown in Figure 11-19 on page 226).

Radius A
Radius B

Figure 11-19 Calibration block with curvatures

2 Press to open the Main menu, select UT, and press .

3 Press (General) and (Range), and set the time-base range in order to see
the two signals from the two calibration defects.

4 Press (Gain) and set the gain in order to see the first signal at about 80% of
the full screen height.
5 On the Main menu, select Display.

6 Press (Rulers), and (UT Unit), and select Sound Path (see Figure 11-20
on page 227).

226 Chapter 11
Figure 11-20 Ultrasound unit settings

7 On the Main menu, select Calibration.

8 Press (Phased Array) and (Mode), and select Wedge Delay (see Figure
11-21 on page 227).

Figure 11-21 Wedge delay calibration mode

9 Press (Next).

10 Press (Echo Type) and select Radius (see Figure 11-22 on page 228).

Calibration Procedures 227


Figure 11-22 The Set Radius A step of the calibration wizard

11 Press (Radius A) and enter the radius that corresponds to the first signal on
the A-scan time base.
12 For the Tolerance parameter, keep the default value. You may change it if you
need to.

13 Press (Next).
14 In the Start and Width buttons, enter the start and width of gate A (red) so that
the first signal crosses the gate in the middle and that the gate is wide enough to
contain the complete width of the signal (see Figure 11-23 on page 228).

Gate start

Gate width

Figure 11-23 Setting gate A on each side of the signal

228 Chapter 11
15 Set the Threshold value at 20% or 25%.

16 Press (Next).
17 Move the probe forward and backward over the calibration defect to build the
envelope (see Figure 11-24 on page 229).

Figure 11-24 Building the signal envelope for the wedge delay calibration

18 Press (Calibrate).
19 Again move the probe forward and backward over the calibration defect to see if
the envelop is correctly calibrated.
If the calibration is correct, the envelope is between the two red dotted lines (see
Figure 11-25 on page 230).
If the calibration is incorrect, clear the envelope (Clear Env.)and make a new pass
over the defect or restart (Restart) the calibration.

Calibration Procedures 229


Figure 11-25 The wedge delay calibrated using radii

20 When calibration is satisfactory, press (Accept).


The wedge delay is now calibrated.

11.2.2 Wedge Delay Using Depth


This section presents the procedure to calibrate the wedge delay for an angle beam
probe using a calibration block with two identical calibration defects at two different
known depths.

To calibrate the wedge delay using depth

1 Place the probe on the calibration block as shown in Figure 11-26 on page 231.

230 Chapter 11
Depth A

Depth B

Figure 11-26 Calibration block with calibration defects

2 Press to open the Main menu, select UT, and press .

3 Press (General) and (Range), and set the time-base range in order to see
the two signals from the two calibration defects.

4 Press (Gain) and set the gain in order to see the first signal at about 80% of
the full screen height.
5 On the Main menu, select Display.

6 Press (Rulers), and (UT Unit), and select True Depth (see Figure 11-27
on page 231).

Figure 11-27 Ultrasound unit settings

Calibration Procedures 231


7 On the Main menu, select Calibration.

8 Press (Phased Array) and (Mode), and select Wedge Delay (see Figure
11-28 on page 232).

Figure 11-28 Wedge delay calibration mode

9 Press (Next).

10 Press (Echo Type) and select Depth (see Figure 11-29 on page 232).

Figure 11-29 The Set Depth A step of the calibration wizard

11 Press (Depth A) and enter the depth that corresponds to the first signal on
the A-scan time base.
12 For the Tolerance parameter, keep the default value. You may change it if you
need to.

13 Press (Next).
14 In the Start and Width buttons, enter the start and width of gate A (red) so that
the first signal crosses the gate in the middle and that the gate is wide enough to
contain the complete width of the signal (see Figure 11-30 on page 233).

232 Chapter 11
Gate start

Gate width

Figure 11-30 The Set Gate A on Depth A step of the calibration wizard

15 Set the Threshold value at 20% or 25%.

16 Press (Next).
17 Move the probe forward and backward over the calibration defect to build the
envelope (see Figure 11-31 on page 233).

Figure 11-31 Building the signal envelope for the wedge delay calibration

Calibration Procedures 233


18 Press (Calibrate).
19 Again move the probe forward and backward over the calibration defect to see if
the envelop is correctly calibrated.
If the calibration is correct, the envelope is between the two red dotted lines (see
Figure 11-32 on page 234).
If the calibration is incorrect, clear the envelope (Clear Env.)and make a new pass
over the defect or restart (Restart) the calibration.

Figure 11-32 The wedge delay calibrated using radii

20 When calibration is satisfactory, press (Accept).


The wedge delay is now calibrated.

234 Chapter 11
11.2.3 Wedge Delay for Thickness
This section presents the procedure to calibrate the wedge delay for a 0-degree beam
probe using a calibration block with two known thicknesses.

To calibrate the wedge delay using the Thickness echo type

1 Place the probe on the calibration block as shown in Figure 11-33 on page 235).

Depth 1

Figure 11-33 Calibration block with two thicknesses

2 In UT > General > Range, set the time-base range in order to see a few multiples
of the back-wall signal.
3 In UT > General > Gain, set the gain in order to see the first signal at about 80% of
the full screen height.
4 Choose Display > Rulers > UT Unit > True Depth (see Figure 11-34 on page 236).

Calibration Procedures 235


Figure 11-34 Ultrasound unit settings

5 Go to Calibration > UT Axis > Mode, and then select the Wedge Delay option
(see Figure 11-35 on page 236).

Figure 11-35 Wedge delay calibration mode

6 In the Select Mode step of the calibration wizard, choose Next.


7 In the Echo Type list, select Thickness.
8 Choose the Depth A edit button, and enter the depth of the first back-wall signal.
9 In Set Thickness A, choose Next.
10 In the Set Gate A on Thickness A step of the calibration wizard, proceed as
follows to set gate A on the first back-wall signal:
a) Set the Start and Width values so that the edges of gate A (red) are located on
each side of the signal.
b) Set the Threshold value for the appropriate height of gate A.

236 Chapter 11
11 Choose Next.
12 In the Build Envelope and calibrate step of the calibration wizard, choose
Calibrate.
The calibration is automatically done (see Figure 11-36 on page 237).

Figure 11-36 Wedge delay calibration on a thickness

13 Choose Accept if you agree with the value of the Wedge Delay option button.
OR
Choose Restart if you prefer to repeat the procedure.
The wedge delay is now calibrated.

Calibration Procedures 237


11.3 Sensitivity Calibration

This section describes the sensitivity calibration procedure for angle-beam and zero-
degree scans.

11.3.1 Angle-Beam Scan Using a Side-drilled Hole


This section presents the procedure to calibrate for sensitivity for an angle-beam
probe, using a calibration block with a side-drilled hole.

IMPORTANT
To perform this calibration, an angle beam configuration must be set using a
sectorial or linear scan type.

To perform an angle-beam sensitivity calibration on a side-drilled hole

1 Place the probe on the calibration block as shown in Figure 11-37 on page 238.

Figure 11-37 Calibration block with a calibration defect

2 Press to open the Main menu, select Display, and press .

3 Press (Selection) and (Display), and select A-S-[C] A-Scan S-Scan


[C-Scan] (see Figure 11-38 on page 239).

238 Chapter 11
Figure 11-38 Display list

4 Press (Rulers), and (UT Unit), and select True Depth.


5 On the Main menu, select Calibration.

6 Press (Phased Array) and (Mode), and select Sensitivity (see Figure
11-39 on page 240).

Calibration Procedures 239


Figure 11-39 The Select Mode of the sensitivity calibration wizard

7 Press (Next).

8 Press (Ref. Amplitude) and enter the reference amplitude value (see Figure
11-40 on page 240).

Figure 11-40 The Set Reference Amplitude step of the sensitivity calibration
wizard

9 For the Tolerance parameter, keep the default value. You may change it if you
need to.

240 Chapter 11
10 Press (Next).
11 In the Start and Width buttons, enter the start and width of gate A (red) so that
the first signal crosses the gate in the middle and that the gate is wide enough to
contain the complete width of the signal (see Figure 11-41 on page 241).

Gate start

Gate width

Figure 11-41 The Set Gate A on Echo A step of the calibration wizard

12 Set the Threshold value at 20% or 25%.

13 Press (Next).
14 You may need to enter a compensation gain if the signal amplitudes have too
much of a difference (see Figure 11-42 on page 241).

Figure 11-42 The Set Compensation Gain step of the calibration wizard

Calibration Procedures 241


15 Press (Next).
16 Move the probe forward and backward over the calibration defect to build the
envelope (see Figure 11-43 on page 242).

Figure 11-43 Building the signal envelope for the sensitivity calibration

17 Press (Calibrate).
18 Again move the probe forward and backward over the calibration defect to see if
the envelop is correctly calibrated.
If the calibration is correct, the envelope is between the two red dotted lines (see
Figure 11-44 on page 243).
If the calibration is incorrect, clear the envelope (Clear Env.) and make a new pass
over the defect or restart (Restart) the calibration.

242 Chapter 11
Figure 11-44 The sensitivity calibration is inside the tolerance.

19 When calibration is satisfactory, press (Accept).


The OmniScan PA is now calibrated for sensitivity.

11.3.2 Angle-Beam Scan Using a Radius


This section presents the procedure to calibrate for sensitivity for an angle-beam
probe, using the radius of a calibration block.

IMPORTANT
To perform this calibration, an angle beam configuration must be set using a
sectorial or linear scan type.

Calibration Procedures 243


To perform an angle-beam sensitivity calibration on a radius

1 Place the probe on the calibration block as shown in Figure 11-45 on page 244.

Figure 11-45 Calibration block with a calibration defect

2 Press to open the Main menu, select Display, and press .

3 Press (Selection) and (Display), and select A-S-[C] A-Scan S-Scan


[C-Scan] (see Figure 11-46 on page 244).

Figure 11-46 Display list

244 Chapter 11
4 Press (Rulers), and (UT Unit), and select Sound Path.
5 On the Main menu, select Calibration.

6 Press (Phased Array) and (Mode), and select Sensitivity (see Figure
11-47 on page 245).

Figure 11-47 The Select Mode of the sensitivity calibration wizard

7 Press (Next).

8 Press (Ref. Amplitude) and set (see Figure 11-48 on page 246).

Calibration Procedures 245


Figure 11-48 The Set Reference Amplitude step of the sensitivity calibration
wizard

9 For the Tolerance parameter, keep the default value. You may change it if you
need to.

10 Press (Next).
11 In the Start and Width buttons, enter the start and width of gate A (red) so that
the first signal crosses the gate in the middle and that the gate is wide enough to
contain the complete width of the signal (see Figure 11-49 on page 246).

Gate start

Gate width

Figure 11-49 The Set Gate A on Echo A step of the calibration wizard

12 Set the Threshold value at 20% or 25%.

246 Chapter 11
13 Press (Next).
14 You may need to (see Figure 11-50 on page 247).

Figure 11-50 The Set Compensation Gain step of the calibration wizard

15 Press (Next).
16 Move the probe forward and backward over the calibration defect to build the
envelope (see Figure 11-51 on page 247).

Figure 11-51 Building the signal envelope for the sensitivity calibration

Calibration Procedures 247


17 Press (Calibrate).
18 Again move the probe forward and backward over the calibration defect to see if
the envelop is correctly calibrated.
If the calibration is correct, the envelope is between the two red dotted lines (see
Figure 11-52 on page 248).
If the calibration is incorrect, clear the envelope (Clear Env.) and make a new pass
over the defect or restart (Restart) the calibration.

Figure 11-52 The sensitivity calibration is inside the tolerance.

19 When calibration is satisfactory, press (Accept).


The OmniScan PA is now calibrated for sensitivity.

248 Chapter 11
11.3.3 Zero-Degree Scan
This section presents the procedure to calibrate for sensitivity for a zero-degree probe,
using the thickness of a calibration block.

To perform a zero-degree sensitivity calibration

1 Place the probe on the calibration block at a location where there is no defect
between the surface and the back wall as shown in (see Figure 11-53 on page 249).

Figure 11-53 Sensitivity calibration block

2 Press to open the Main menu, select Calibration and press (Phased
Array).
3 In the Mode list, select Sensitivity (see Figure 11-54 on page 250).

Calibration Procedures 249


Figure 11-54 The Select Mode of the sensitivity calibration wizard

4 Press (Next).

5 Press (Ref. Amplitude) and enter the reference amplitude value (see Figure
11-55 on page 251)

250 Chapter 11
Reference
amplitude

Tolerance

Figure 11-55 Reference amplitude and tolerance for sensitivity calibration

6 For the Tolerance parameter, keep the default value. You may change it if you
need to.

7 Press (Next).
8 In the Start and Width buttons, enter the start and width of gate A (red) so that
the back wall signal crosses the gate in the middle and that the gate is wide
enough to contain the complete width of the signal (see Figure 11-56 on page 252).

Calibration Procedures 251


Gate start

Gate width

Figure 11-56 Gate A on the back wall signal

9 Set the Threshold value so that the back-wall signal crosses the gate on every
aperture.

10 You may want to adjust the gain, if not, press (Next) [see Figure 11-57 on
page 252].

Figure 11-57 The Set Compensation Gain step of the calibration wizard

11 In the Calibrate and Accept step of the sensitivity calibration wizard, press
(Calibrate) [see Figure 11-58 on page 253].

252 Chapter 11
Figure 11-58 The signal calibrated for sensitivity

If the calibration is correct, the envelope is between the two red dotted lines.
If the calibration is incorrect, clear the envelope (Clear Env.) and restart (Restart)
the calibration.

12 When calibration is satisfactory, press (Accept).


The OmniScan PA is now calibrated for sensitivity.

11.4 TCG Calibration

This section describes how to perform a calibration based on the TCG (time-corrected
gain) function of the OmniScan PA.

To perform a TCG calibration

1 Place the probe on a calibration block that either contains a number of identical
defects at different know depths or presents a number of known thicknesses (see
Figure 11-59 on page 254).

Calibration Procedures 253


Figure 11-59 Calibration blocks for the TCG calibration

2 Press to open the Main menu, select Calibration, and press (TCG) [see
Figure 11-60 on page 254].

Figure 11-60 Starting the TCG calibration

3 In the Start step of the TCG calibration wizard, press (Start).

254 Chapter 11
4 In the Set Reference Amplitude step of the TCG calibration wizard, the
Amplitude value is set by default at 80. You can keep this value or change it (see
Figure 11-61 on page 255).
5 The Tolerance value is set by default at 5. You can keep this value or change it.

Figure 11-61 The Set Reference Amplitude step of the TCG calibration wizard

6 Press (Next).
7 In the Set Gate A on Echo step (see Figure 11-62 on page 255) of the TCG
calibration wizard, in the Start and Width buttons, enter the start and width of
gate A (red) so that the signal crosses the gate in the middle and that the gate is
wide enough to contain the complete width of the signal.

Figure 11-62 The Set Gate A on Echo step of the TCG Calibration Wizard

8 Set the Threshold value so that the signal crosses the gate on every aperture.

9 Press (Next).

10 In the Add point step of the TCG calibration wizard, press (Add Point) [see
Figure 11-63 on page 256].

Calibration Procedures 255


Figure 11-63 Adding a TCG point

11 In the Accept step (see Figure 11-64 on page 256) of the TCG calibration wizard,

press (Next Point) to add another TCG point and repeat steps 4 through .11.

Figure 11-64 Keep on building the TCG curve or accept it

OR

Press (Accept TCG) if the TCG curve is finished.


This concludes the TCG calibration procedure.

11.5 Encoder Calibration

This section describes how to calibrate an encoder.

Note: Before performing this procedure, an X or XY encoder must be


properly connected to the Alarm and I/O connectors.

To calibrate an encoder

1 Press to open the Main menu, select Scan and press (Encoder).

256 Chapter 11
2 In the Type list, select the encoder type.
Quad (quadrature) is the default setting (see Figure 11-65 on page 257).

Figure 11-65 The list of encoder types

3 Press to open the Main menu, select Calibration and press (Axis).
4 In the Encoder list, select 1 (see Figure 11-66 on page 257).

Figure 11-66 The Select Encoder step of the encoder calibration wizard

5 Press (Next).
6 In the Set Origin step of the calibration wizard, in the Origin button, enter the
start point of the inspection pass (see Figure 11-67 on page 258).

Calibration Procedures 257


Figure 11-67 The Set Origin step of the encoder calibration wizard

7 Press (Next).
8 Physically move the encoder to a mark point.
9 Note this distance. It will be used as reference for the calibration distance.
10 Physically move the encoder to a second mark point and note the distance
traveled.
11 In the Set Distance step of the calibration wizard, in the Distance button, enter
the distance of the inspection pass (B minus A) [see Figure 11-68 on page 258].

Figure 11-68 The Set Distance step of the encoder calibration wizard

12 Press (Calibrate).
This automatically calibrates the encoder. At this point, a resolution and the
encoder position are displayed.

13 Press (Accept).
14 Move the calibrated axis to point (A) to validate the resolution.

15 Press .
16 Move to point (B) and observe the upper-left pane of the data view to see if the
calibrated axis (X or Y) has moved over the correct distance.
If the distance is not acceptable, repeat steps 4 to 16.

258 Chapter 11
17 To calibrate the encoder for a second axis, proceed as follows:
♦ In the Encoder list, select 2, and then repeat steps 5 to 16.

This concludes the encoder calibration procedure.

Calibration Procedures 259


260 Chapter 11
12. Inspection Procedures with Ready-Made Setups

This chapter presents procedures that can be used when inspections are done using
ready-made setups. These setups cover a number of inspections of the most widely
used ones.

This chapter contains the following sections:

• “Weld Inspection: RD_Linear60deg_oneLine.ops Setup” on page 261


• “Weld Inspection: RD_Sectorial_oneLine.ops Setup” on page 279
• “Weld Inspection: RD_Weld_1side_Linear.ops Setup” on page 297
• “Weld Inspection: RD_Weld_1side_Sectorial.ops Setup” on page 316
• “Flaw Detection: RD_FlawDetector_35-70SW.ops Setup” on page 336
• “Corrosion Detection: RD_Linear0deg_corrosion_oneLine.ops Setup” on
page 351

12.1 Weld Inspection: RD_Linear60deg_oneLine.ops Setup

This section presents the setup to make a weld inspection with a 60° refracted beam,
in a single pass using electronic linear scanning (see Figure 12-1 on page 262).

Inspection Procedures with Ready-Made Setups 261


Figure 12-1 Electronic linear scan for a weld inspection

12.1.1 Recommended Probe and Wedge Combinations


The following probes and wedges are recommended for this inspection procedure;
however, other probe and shear-wave wedge combinations can be used.

• 5L64-A2 probe with SA2-N55S wedge


• 2L64-A2 probe with SA2-N55S wedge
You also need a mini-encoder and a one-axis scanner.

12.1.2 Settings and Calibration


This section presents the procedure to set the parameters for the probe, the part, the
data view screen, and the encoder as well as the calibration procedures for the wedge
delay and the sensitivity.

12.1.2–A To set the parameters for the probe and the part

1 Load the RD_Linear60deg_oneLine.ops setup as follows:

a) Press to open the Main menu (see Figure 12-2 on page 263), select File,

and press .

262 Chapter 12
Remember that you must press the Accept key to confirm a selection or a new
parameter.

Figure 12-2 The Main menu

b) Press (File) and (Open), and select RD_Linear60deg_oneLine.ops.

c) Press or to open the selected setup file.


2 Connect the probe to the OmniScan PA.
The probe is automatically detected by the OmniScan PA and the focal laws are
calculated accordingly.
3 On the Main menu, select Probe/Part.

4 Press (Select) and (Select Wedge), and then select the appropriate
wedge (see Figure 12-3 on page 264).

Inspection Procedures with Ready-Made Setups 263


SA2-N55S
55° SW

Figure 12-3 The list of predefined wedges

5 Press (Parts) and (Thickness), and then enter the thickness of the part
to inspect.

6 Press (Material) and, in the list, select the type of material the part to inspect
is made of.
7 Place the probe on the block over the calibration defect.

12.1.2–B To calibrate the wedge delay

1 Press and, in the Mode list, select Wedge Delay.

2 Press (Next).

3 Press (Echo Type) and select Depth.

4 Press (Depth) and enter the depth of the calibration defect you are using.

264 Chapter 12
5 Press (Tolerance) and enter 1 mm or 0.04 in.

6 Press (Next).
7 Set the gate on each side of the defect signal a follows:
a) On the Main menu, select Gate/Alarm.

b) Press (Gate) and (Gate Select), and then select A (see Figure 12-4
on page 265).

Figure 12-4 Setting the gate

c) Press (Gate Start) and enter the position of beginning of the gate (see
Figure 12-5 on page 266).

Inspection Procedures with Ready-Made Setups 265


d) Press (Width) and enter the width of the gate (see Figure 12-5 on
page 266).

Gate start

Gate width

Figure 12-5 Gate A on each side of the signal

e) Press (Threshold) and enter 10.

f) Press (Next).

8 Press (Gain) and set the value in order to have the calibration defect signal
crossing the gate for all laws (beams).
9 Move the probe forward and backward over the calibration defect to build the
envelope (see Figure 12-6 on page 267).

266 Chapter 12
Figure 12-6 Building the signal envelope for the wedge delay calibration

10 Press (Calibrate).
11 Again move the probe forward and backward over the calibration defect to see if
the envelop is correctly calibrated.
If the calibration is correct, the envelope is between the two red dotted lines (see
Figure 12-7 on page 268).
If the calibration is incorrect, clear the envelope (Clear Env.)and make a new pass
over the defect or restart (Restart) the calibration.

Inspection Procedures with Ready-Made Setups 267


Figure 12-7 The wedge delay calibrated

12 When calibration is satisfactory, press (Accept).


13 Continue with the sensitivity calibration procedure, which follows.

12.1.2–C To calibrate the OmniScan PA and probe sensitivity

1 Press and, in the Mode list, select Sensitivity.

2 Press (Next).
3 Set the amplitude threshold to 80% (Ref. Amplitude) and the tolerance to 5%
(Tolerance) [see Figure 12-8 on page 269].

268 Chapter 12
Figure 12-8 Sensitivity calibration

4 Press (Next).
5 Place the probe on the calibration block and make sure the probe will not skew as
you move it forward and backward. Either use a guide or manual scanner, or
place the calibration block on one side (see Figure 12-9 on page 270).

Inspection Procedures with Ready-Made Setups 269


Figure 12-9 The calibration block on one side to guide the probe motion

6 Set the gate on each side of the defect signal a follows:


a) On the Main menu, select Gate/Alarm.
b) Choose Gate and, in the Gate Select list, select A.
c) In Gate Start, enter the position of beginning of the gate.
d) In Width, enter the width of the gate.
e) In Threshold, enter 10.

f) Press (Next).

7 Press (Gain) and set the value to 75% of the full screen height.
8 Move the probe forward and backward over the calibration defect to build the
envelope (see Figure 12-10 on page 271).

270 Chapter 12
Figure 12-10 Building the signal envelope for the sensitivity calibration

9 Press (Calibrate).
10 Again move the probe forward and backward over the calibration defect to see if
the envelop is correctly calibrated.
If the calibration is correct, the envelope is between the two red dotted lines (see
Figure 12-11 on page 272).
If the calibration is incorrect, clear the envelope (Clear Env.) and make a new pass
over the defect or restart (Restart) the calibration.

Inspection Procedures with Ready-Made Setups 271


Figure 12-11 The sensitivity calibrated

11 When calibration is satisfactory, press (Accept).


12 Continue with the procedure to set the reference level and the inspection gate,
which follows.

12.1.2–D To set the reference level and the inspection gate

1 Press and (Gain) [see Figure 12-12 on page 273], and set the gain so
that the signal level reaches 80% of the full screen height.

272 Chapter 12
Figure 12-12 Gain and time-base range for 60° linear scanning

2 Press (Start) and set the start of the time-base range at the interface signal.

3 Press (Range) and set the length of the time-base range to include the
complete thickness of the part (for the half and full skip, which is twice the
thickness).

4 Press and (Gate Select), and then select A (see Figure 12-13 on
page 274).

Inspection Procedures with Ready-Made Setups 273


Figure 12-13 Setting the inspection gate

5 Press (Gate Start) [see Figure 12-13 on page 274] and enter the position of
beginning of the gate.
The gate should begin just after the entry signal.

6 Press (Width) [see Figure 12-13 on page 274] and enter the width of the gate.
The width should be big enough to include the complete thickness of the part,
from the half to the full skip (a little over twice the thickness).

7 Press (Threshold) [see Figure 12-13 on page 274] and enter the gate level.
8 Continue with the procedure to set the encoder parameters, which follows.

274 Chapter 12
12.1.2–E To set the encoder parameters

1 On the Main menu, select Scan.

2 Press (Encoder) and (Resolution), and then enter the encoder


resolution.
3 Move the probe forward and look at the X value in the upper left corner of the
screen (see Figure 12-14 on page 275).
If the increments are going in the positive direction, this setting is correct.
If the increments are going in the negative direction, in Polarity, select Inverse.

Figure 12-14 The X-axis value

4 Press (Area) and (Scan End), and then enter the length to be scanned.

5 Press (Scan Resolution) and enter the distance between each acquisition
points.

6 On the Main menu, select Probe/Part and press (Position).

7 Press (Index Offset) and enter the distance between the weld center line and
the front of the wedge (see Figure 12-15 on page 276).

Inspection Procedures with Ready-Made Setups 275


Skew angle Weld
centerline
Scan axis +

270°
Index axis +
90°
180°
Index
offset

+ Scan
offset

Scan
axis

– – 0, 0 +
Index axis

Figure 12-15 Scan and index offsets

8 Press (Scan Offset) and type the distance between the side and the middle of
the wedge.
The index and scan offset values will be positive or negative according to the
probe position on the part to inspect.

12.1.3 Inspection
This section presents the inspection procedure and some related functions you can
use.

12.1.3–A To make an inspection

1 Place the probe at the start point of the scan.

2 Press and start moving the probe.

276 Chapter 12
3 At the end of the scan, to keep the data on screen an evaluate the inspection result,

press to freeze the data view.


To return to inspection, you must press the freeze key again.

4 To save the inspection result, press .

12.1.4 Analysis Tools and Reporting


In the setup there are some analysis tools already selected.

The top of the screen displays four reading fields (see Figure 12-16 on page 277).

Figure 12-16 The four reading fields

They are the following:

A%
Is the maximum amplitude in gate A.
ViA
Is the distance on the index axis, on the part surface, between the reference point
and an indication (see Figure 12-17 on page 278).
DA
Is the depth of the indication in the part.
VsA
Is the distance on the scan axis, on the part surface, between the reference point
and an indication (see Figure 12-17 on page 278).

Inspection Procedures with Ready-Made Setups 277


ViA

VsA

Negative index Reference 0/0 Positive index

Figure 12-17 Distances with regard to the reference point

To get the analysis cursors, press and (Select), and then select Data.

VPA
Is used to move the cursor through the focal laws (beams).
Scan
Is used to move the cursor along the encoded axis to display information on the
indication.
Add Entry
Is used to enter the indication in the defect table and add the indication to the
report.

12.1.4–A To make a report

1 On the Main menu, select File.

2 Press (Report) and (Build).


You get a preview of the report for all the entered indications.

278 Chapter 12
3 Choose one of the following options:
— Print to print the report.
— Save and close to save the report and return to the analysis.
— Close to close the report without saving it.
For a detailed procedure on making a report, refer to “Configuring a Report” on
page 140.

12.2 Weld Inspection: RD_Sectorial_oneLine.ops Setup

This section presents the setup to make a weld inspection in a single pass using
sectorial scanning (see Figure 12-18 on page 279).

Figure 12-18 Electronic sectorial scan for a weld inspection

Inspection Procedures with Ready-Made Setups 279


12.2.1 Recommended Probe and Wedge Combinations
The following probes and wedges are recommended for this inspection procedure;
however, other probe and shear-wave wedge combinations can be used.

• 10L32-A1 probe with SA1-N60S wedge


• 5L16-A1 probe with SA1-N60S wedge
• 2L16-A1 probe with SA1-N60S wedge
• 5L64-A2 probe with SA2-N55S wedge
• 2L64-A2 probe with SA2-N55S wedge
You also need a mini-encoder and a one-axis scanner.

12.2.2 Settings and Calibration


This section presents the procedure to set the parameters for the probe, the part, the
data view screen, and the encoder as well as the calibration procedures for the wedge
delay and the sensitivity.

12.2.2–A To set the parameters for the probe and the part

1 Load the RD_Sectorial_oneLine.ops setup as follows:

a) Press to open the Main menu (see Figure 12-19 on page 281), select File,

and press (remember that you must press the Accept key to confirm a
selection or a new parameter).

280 Chapter 12
Figure 12-19 The Main menu

b) Press (File) and (Open), and select RD_Sectorial_oneLine.ops.

c) Press or to open the selected setup file.


2 Connect the probe to the OmniScan PA.
The probe is automatically detected by the OmniScan PA and the focal laws are
calculated accordingly.
3 On the Main menu, select Probe/Part.

4 Press (Select) and (Select Wedge), and then select the appropriate
wedge (see Figure 12-20 on page 282).

Inspection Procedures with Ready-Made Setups 281


SA2-N55S
55° SW

Figure 12-20 The list of predefined wedges

5 Press (Parts) and (Thickness), and then enter the thickness of the part
to inspect.

6 Press (Material) and, in the list, select the type of material the part to inspect
is made of.
7 Place the probe on the block over the calibration defect.

12.2.2–B To calibrate the wedge delay

1 Press and, in the Mode list, select Wedge Delay.

2 Press (Next).

3 Press (Echo Type) and select Depth.

4 Press (Depth) and enter the depth of the calibration defect you are using.

282 Chapter 12
5 Press (Tolerance) and enter 1 mm or 0.04 in.

6 Press (Next).
7 Set the gate on each side of the defect signal a follows:
a) On the Main menu, select Gate/Alarm.

b) Press (Gate) and (Gate Select), and then select A (see Figure 12-21
on page 283).

Figure 12-21 Setting the gate

c) Press (Gate Start) and enter the position of beginning of the gate (see
Figure 12-22 on page 284).

Inspection Procedures with Ready-Made Setups 283


d) Press (Width) and enter the width of the gate (see Figure 12-22 on
page 284).

Gate start

Gate width

Figure 12-22 Gate A on each side of the signal

e) Press (Threshold) and enter 10.

f) Press (Next).

8 Press (Gain) and set the value in order to have the calibration defect signal
crossing the gate for all laws (beams).
9 Move the probe forward and backward over the calibration defect to build the
envelope (see Figure 12-23 on page 285).

284 Chapter 12
Figure 12-23 Building the signal envelope for the wedge delay calibration

10 Press (Calibrate).
11 Again move the probe forward and backward over the calibration defect to see if
the envelop is correctly calibrated.
If the calibration is correct, the envelope is between the two red dotted lines (see
Figure 12-24 on page 286).
If the calibration is incorrect, clear the envelope (Clear Env.)and make a new pass
over the defect or restart (Restart) the calibration.

Inspection Procedures with Ready-Made Setups 285


Figure 12-24 The wedge delay calibrated

12 When calibration is satisfactory, press (Accept).


13 Continue with the sensitivity calibration procedure, which follows.

12.2.2–C To calibrate the OmniScan PA and probe sensitivity

1 Press and, in the Mode list, select Sensitivity.

2 Press (Next).
3 Set the amplitude threshold to 80% (Ref. Amplitude) and the tolerance to 5%
(Tolerance) [see Figure 12-25 on page 287].

286 Chapter 12
Figure 12-25 Sensitivity calibration

4 Press (Next).
5 Place the probe on the calibration block and make sure the probe will not skew as
you move it forward and backward. Either use a guide or manual scanner, or
place the calibration block on one side (see Figure 12-26 on page 288).

Inspection Procedures with Ready-Made Setups 287


Figure 12-26 The calibration block on one side to guide the probe motion

6 Set the gate on each side of the defect signal a follows:


a) On the Main menu, select Gate/Alarm.
b) Choose Gate and, in the Gate Select list, select A.
c) In Gate Start, enter the position of beginning of the gate.
d) In Width, enter the width of the gate.
e) In Threshold, enter 10.

f) Press (Next).

7 Press (Gain) and set the value to 75% of the full screen height.
8 Move the probe forward and backward over the calibration defect to build the
envelope (see Figure 12-27 on page 289).

288 Chapter 12
Figure 12-27 Building the signal envelope for the sensitivity calibration

9 Press (Calibrate).
10 Again move the probe forward and backward over the calibration defect to see if
the envelop is correctly calibrated.
If the calibration is correct, the envelope is between the two red dotted lines (see
Figure 12-28 on page 290).
If the calibration is incorrect, clear the envelope (Clear Env.) and make a new pass
over the defect or restart (Restart) the calibration.

Inspection Procedures with Ready-Made Setups 289


Figure 12-28 The sensitivity calibrated

11 When calibration is satisfactory, press (Accept).


12 Continue with the procedure to set the reference level and the inspection gate,
which follows.

12.2.2–D To set the reference level and the inspection gate

1 Press and (Gain) [see Figure 12-29 on page 291], and set the gain so
that the signal level reaches 80% of the full screen height.

290 Chapter 12
Figure 12-29 Gain and time-base range for sectorial scanning

2 Press (Start) and set the start of the time-base range at the interface signal.

3 Press (Range) and set the length of the time-base range to include the
complete thickness of the part (for the half and full skip, which is twice the
thickness).

4 Press and (Gate Select), and then select A (see Figure 12-30 on
page 292).

Inspection Procedures with Ready-Made Setups 291


Figure 12-30 Setting the inspection gate

5 Press (Gate Start) [see Figure 12-30 on page 292] and enter the position of
beginning of the gate.
The gate should begin just after the entry signal.

6 Press (Width) [see Figure 12-30 on page 292] and enter the width of the gate.
The width should be big enough to include the complete thickness of the part,
from the half to the full skip (a little over twice the thickness).

7 Press (Threshold) [see Figure 12-30 on page 292] and enter the gate level.
8 Continue with the procedure to set the encoder parameters, which follows.

292 Chapter 12
12.2.2–E To set the encoder parameters

1 On the Main menu, select Scan.

2 Press (Encoder) and (Resolution), and then enter the encoder


resolution.
3 Move the probe forward and look at the X value in the upper left corner of the
screen (see Figure 12-31 on page 293).
If the increments are going in the positive direction, this setting is correct.
If the increments are going in the negative direction, in Polarity, select Inverse.

Figure 12-31 The X-axis value

4 Press (Area) and (Scan End), and then enter the length to be scanned.

5 Press (Scan Resolution) and enter the distance between each acquisition
points.

6 On the Main menu, select Probe/Part and press (Position).

7 Press (Index Offset) and enter the distance between the weld center line and
the front of the wedge (see Figure 12-32 on page 294).

Inspection Procedures with Ready-Made Setups 293


Skew angle Weld
centerline
Scan axis +

270°
Index axis +
90°
180°
Index
offset

+ Scan
offset

Scan
axis

– – 0, 0 +
Index axis

Figure 12-32 Scan and index offsets

8 Press (Scan Offset) and type the distance between the side and the middle of
the wedge.
The index and scan offset values will be positive or negative according to the
probe position on the part to inspect.

12.2.3 Inspection
This section presents the inspection procedure and some related functions you can
use.

12.2.3–A To make an inspection

1 Place the probe at the start point of the scan.

2 Press and start moving the probe.

294 Chapter 12
3 At the end of the scan, to keep the data on screen an evaluate the inspection result,

press to freeze the view.


To return to inspection, you must press the freeze key again.

4 To save the inspection result, press .

12.2.4 Analysis Tools and Reporting


In the setup there are some analysis tools already selected.

The top of the screen displays four reading fields (see Figure 12-33 on page 295).

Figure 12-33 The four reading fields

They are the following:

A%
Is the maximum amplitude in gate A.
ViA
Is the distance on the index axis, on the part surface, between the reference point
and an indication (see Figure 12-34 on page 296).
DA
Is the depth of the indication in the part.
VsA
Is the distance on the scan axis, on the part surface, between the reference point
and an indication (see Figure 12-34 on page 296).

Inspection Procedures with Ready-Made Setups 295


ViA

VsA

Negative index Reference 0/0 Positive index

Figure 12-34 Distances with regard to the reference point

To get the analysis cursors, press and (Select), and then select Data.

VPA
Is used to move the cursor through the focal laws (beams).
Scan
Is used to move the cursor along the encoded axis to display information on the
indication.
Add Entry
Is used to enter the indication in the defect table and add the indication to the
report.

12.2.4–A To make a report

1 On the Main menu, select File.

2 Press (Report) and (Build).


You get a preview of the report for all the entered indications.

296 Chapter 12
3 Choose one of the following options:
— Print to print the report.
— Save and close to save the report and return to the analysis.
— Close to close the report without saving it.
For a detailed procedure on making a report, refer to “Configuring a Report” on
page 140.

12.3 Weld Inspection: RD_Weld_1side_Linear.ops Setup

This section presents the setup to make a weld inspection with two refracted beam
angles, in a single pass using electronic linear scanning (see Figure 12-35 on page 297).

Figure 12-35 Electronic linear scan for two angles using two groups of focal laws

The parameters for the two angles are set in two groups. You adjust the setup for the
first group and then for the second group.

Inspection Procedures with Ready-Made Setups 297


12.3.1 Recommended Probe and Wedge Combinations
The following probes and wedges are recommended for this inspection procedure;
however, other probe and shear-wave wedge combinations can be used.

• 5L64-A2 probe with SA2-N55S wedge


• 2L64-A2 probe with SA2-N55S wedge
You also need a mini-encoder and a one-axis scanner.

12.3.2 Settings and Calibration


This section presents the procedure to set the parameters for the probe, the part, the
data view screen, and the encoder as well as the calibration procedures for the wedge
delay and the sensitivity.

12.3.2–A To set the parameters for the probe and the part

1 Load the RD_Weld_1side_Linear.ops setup as follows:

a) Press to open the Main menu (see Figure 12-36 on page 298), select File,

and press (remember that you must press the Accept key to confirm a
selection or a new parameter).

Figure 12-36 The Main menu

298 Chapter 12
b) Press (File) and (Open), and select RD_Weld_1side_Linear.ops.

c) Press or to open the selected setup file.


2 On the Main menu, select Probe/Part.

3 Press (Select) and (Group), and then select 1 (see Figure 12-37 on
page 299).

Figure 12-37 Selecting a group

4 Connect the probe to the OmniScan PA.


The probe is automatically detected by the OmniScan PA and the focal laws are
calculated accordingly.

5 Press (Select) and (Select Wedge), and then select the appropriate
wedge (see Figure 12-38 on page 300).

Inspection Procedures with Ready-Made Setups 299


SA2-N55S
55° SW

Figure 12-38 The list of predefined wedges

6 Press (Parts) and (Thickness), and then enter the thickness of the part
to inspect.

7 Press (Material) and, in the list, select the type of material the part to inspect
is made of.
8 Place the probe on the block over the calibration defect.

12.3.2–B To calibrate the wedge delay

1 Press and, in the Mode list, select Wedge Delay.

2 Press (Next).

3 Press (Echo Type) and select Depth.

4 Press (Depth) and enter the depth of the calibration defect you are using.

300 Chapter 12
5 Press (Tolerance) and enter 1 mm or 0.04 in.

6 Press (Next).
7 Set the gate on each side of the defect signal a follows:
a) On the Main menu, select Gate/Alarm.

b) Press (Gate) and (Gate Select), and then select A (see Figure 12-39
on page 301).

Figure 12-39 Setting the gate

c) Press (Gate Start) and enter the position of beginning of the gate (see
Figure 12-40 on page 302).

Inspection Procedures with Ready-Made Setups 301


d) Press (Width) and enter the width of the gate (see Figure 12-40 on
page 302).

Gate start

Gate width

Figure 12-40 Gate A on each side of the signal

e) Press (Threshold) and enter 10.

f) Press (Next).

8 Press (Gain) and set the value in order to have the calibration defect signal
crossing the gate for all laws (beams).
9 Move the probe forward and backward over the calibration defect to build the
envelope (see Figure 12-41 on page 303).

302 Chapter 12
Figure 12-41 Building the signal envelope for the wedge delay calibration

10 Press (Calibrate).
11 Again move the probe forward and backward over the calibration defect to see if
the envelop is correctly calibrated.
If the calibration is correct, the envelope is between the two red dotted lines (see
Figure 12-42 on page 304).
If the calibration is incorrect, clear the envelope (Clear Env.)and make a new pass
over the defect or restart (Restart) the calibration.

Inspection Procedures with Ready-Made Setups 303


Figure 12-42 The wedge delay calibrated

12 When calibration is satisfactory, press (Accept).


13 Continue with the sensitivity calibration procedure, which follows.

12.3.2–C To calibrate the OmniScan PA and probe sensitivity

1 Press and, in the Mode list, select Sensitivity.

2 Press (Next).
3 Set the amplitude threshold to 80% (Ref. Amplitude) and the tolerance to 5%
(Tolerance) [see Figure 12-43 on page 305].

304 Chapter 12
Figure 12-43 Sensitivity calibration

4 Press (Next).
5 Place the probe on the calibration block and make sure the probe will not skew as
you move it forward and backward. Either use a guide or manual scanner, or
place the calibration block on one side (see Figure 12-44 on page 306).

Inspection Procedures with Ready-Made Setups 305


Figure 12-44 The calibration block on one side to guide the probe motion

6 Set the gate on each side of the defect signal a follows:


a) On the Main menu, select Gate/Alarm.
b) Choose Gate and, in the Gate Select list, select A.
c) In Gate Start, enter the position of beginning of the gate.
d) In Width, enter the width of the gate.
e) In Threshold, enter 10.

f) Press (Next).

7 Press (Gain) and set the value to 75% of the full screen height.
8 Move the probe forward and backward over the calibration defect to build the
envelope (see Figure 12-45 on page 307).

306 Chapter 12
Figure 12-45 Building the signal envelope for the sensitivity calibration

9 Press (Calibrate).
10 Again move the probe forward and backward over the calibration defect to see if
the envelop is correctly calibrated.
If the calibration is correct, the envelope is between the two red dotted lines (see
Figure 12-46 on page 308).
If the calibration is incorrect, clear the envelope (Clear Env.) and make a new pass
over the defect or restart (Restart) the calibration.

Inspection Procedures with Ready-Made Setups 307


Figure 12-46 The sensitivity calibrated

11 When calibration is satisfactory, press (Accept).


12 Continue with the procedure to set the reference level and the inspection gate,
which follows.

12.3.2–D To set the reference level and the inspection gate

1 Press and (Gain) [see Figure 12-47 on page 309], and set the gain so
that the signal level reaches 80% of the full screen height.

308 Chapter 12
Figure 12-47 Gain and time-base range for 60° linear scanning

2 Press (Start) and set the start of the time-base range at the interface signal.

3 Press (Range) and set the length of the time-base range to include the
complete thickness of the part (for the half and full skip, which is twice the
thickness).

4 Press and (Gate Select), and then select A (see Figure 12-48 on
page 310).

Inspection Procedures with Ready-Made Setups 309


Figure 12-48 Setting the inspection gate

5 Press (Gate Start) [see Figure 12-48 on page 310] and enter the position of
beginning of the gate.
The gate should begin just after the entry signal.

6 Press (Width) [see Figure 12-48 on page 310] and enter the width of the gate.
The width should be big enough to include the complete thickness of the part,
from the half to the full skip (a little over twice the thickness).

7 Press (Threshold) [see Figure 12-48 on page 310] and enter the gate level.
8 Continue with the procedure to set the second inspection angle.

310 Chapter 12
12.3.2–E To set the second inspection angle

1 On the Main menu, select Probe/Part.

2 Press (Select) and (Group), and then select 2.


3 Repeat all the previous procedures starting at step 5 in “Settings and Calibration”
on page 298.
Once you have the two groups, you can switch from one group to the other by

using the channel key ( ).

Press and hold and, upon releasing the key, the title bar of the selected
group becomes highlighted (see Figure 12-49 on page 311).

Figure 12-49 The highlighted title bar of the selected group

4 Continue with the procedure to set the encoder parameters, which follows.

Inspection Procedures with Ready-Made Setups 311


12.3.2–F To set the encoder parameters

1 On the Main menu, select Scan.

2 Press (Encoder) and (Resolution), and then enter the encoder


resolution.
3 Move the probe forward and look at the X value in the upper left corner of the
screen (see Figure 12-50 on page 312).
If the increments are going in the positive direction, this setting is correct.
If the increments are going in the negative direction, in Polarity, select Inverse.

Figure 12-50 The X-axis value

4 Press (Area) and (Scan End), and then enter the length to be scanned.

5 Press (Scan Resolution) and enter the distance between each acquisition
points.

6 On the Main menu, select Probe/Part and press (Position).

7 Press (Index Offset) and enter the distance between the weld center line and
the front of the wedge (see Figure 12-51 on page 313).

312 Chapter 12
Skew angle Weld
centerline
Scan axis +

270°
Index axis +
90°
180°
Index
offset

+ Scan
offset

Scan
axis

– – 0, 0 +
Index axis

Figure 12-51 Scan and index offsets

8 Press (Scan Offset) and type the distance between the reference position on
the part to inspect and the middle of the wedge.
The index and scan offset values will be positive or negative according to the
probe position on the part to inspect.

12.3.3 Inspection
This section presents the inspection procedure and some related functions you can
use.

12.3.3–A To make an inspection

1 Place the probe at the start point of the scan.

2 Press and start moving the probe.

Inspection Procedures with Ready-Made Setups 313


3 At the end of the scan, to keep the data on screen an evaluate the inspection result,

press to freeze the view.


To return to inspection, you must press the freeze key again.

4 To save the inspection result, press .

12.3.4 Analysis Tools and Reporting


In the setup there are some analysis tools already selected.

The top of the screen displays four reading fields (see Figure 12-52 on page 314).

Figure 12-52 The four reading fields

They are the following:

A%
Is the maximum amplitude in gate A.
ViA
Is the distance on the index axis, on the part surface, between the reference point
and an indication (see Figure 12-53 on page 315).
DA
Is the depth of the indication in the part.
VsA
Is the distance on the scan axis, on the part surface, between the reference point
and an indication (see FFigure 12-53 on page 315).

314 Chapter 12
ViA

VsA

Negative index Reference 0/0 Positive index

Figure 12-53 Distances with regard to the reference point

To get the analysis cursors, press and (Select), and then select Data.

VPA
Is used to move the cursor through the focal laws (beams).
Scan
Is used to move the cursor along the encoded axis to display information on the
indication.
Add Entry
Is used to enter the indication in the defect table and add the indication to the
report.

12.3.4–A To make a report

1 On the Main menu, select File.

2 Press (Report) and (Build).


You get a preview of the report for all the entered indications.

Inspection Procedures with Ready-Made Setups 315


3 Choose one of the following options:
— Print to print the report.
— Save and close to save the report and return to the analysis.
— Close to close the report without saving it.
For a detailed procedure on making a report, refer to “Configuring a Report” on
page 140.

12.4 Weld Inspection: RD_Weld_1side_Sectorial.ops Setup

This section presents the setup to make a weld inspection in a single pass using two
sectorial scans from a single probe (see Figure 12-54 on page 316).

Figure 12-54 Two electronic sectorial scans using two groups of focal laws

316 Chapter 12
12.4.1 Recommended Probe and Wedge Combinations
The following probes and wedges are recommended for this inspection procedure;
however, other probe and shear-wave wedge combinations can be used.

• 10L32-A1 probe with SA1-N60S wedge


• 5L16-A1 probe with SA1-N60S wedge
• 2L16-A1 probe with SA1-N60S wedge
• 5L64-A2 probe with SA2-N55S wedge
• 2L64-A2 probe with SA2-N55S wedge
You also need a mini-encoder and a one-axis scanner.

12.4.2 Settings and Calibration


This section presents the procedure to set the parameters for the probe, the part, the
data view screen, and the encoder as well as the calibration procedures for the wedge
delay and the sensitivity.

12.4.2–A To set the parameters for the probe and the part

1 Load the RD_Weld_1side_Sectorial.ops setup as follows:

a) Press to open the Main menu (see Figure 12-55 on page 318), select File,

and press (remember that you must press the Accept key to confirm a
selection or a new parameter).

Inspection Procedures with Ready-Made Setups 317


Figure 12-55 The Main menu

b) Press (File) and (Open), and select RD_Weld_1side_Sectorial.ops.

c) Press or to open the selected setup file.


2 Connect the probe to the OmniScan PA.
The probe is automatically detected by the OmniScan PA and the focal laws are
calculated accordingly.
3 On the Main menu, select Probe/Part.

4 Press (Select) and (Group), and then select 2 (see Figure 12-56 on
page 319).

318 Chapter 12
Figure 12-56 Selecting a group

5 Press (Select) and (Select Wedge), and then select the appropriate
wedge (see Figure 12-57 on page 320).

Inspection Procedures with Ready-Made Setups 319


SA2-N55S
55° SW

Figure 12-57 The list of predefined wedges

6 Press (Parts) and (Thickness), and then enter the thickness of the part
to inspect.

7 Press (Material) and, in the list, select the type of material the part to inspect
is made of.
8 Place the probe on the block over the calibration defect.

12.4.2–B To calibrate the wedge delay

1 Press and, in the Mode list, select Wedge Delay.

2 Press (Next).

3 Press (Echo Type) and select Depth.

4 Press (Depth) and enter the depth of the calibration defect you are using.

320 Chapter 12
5 Press (Tolerance) and enter 1 mm or 0.04 in.

6 Press (Next).
7 Set the gate on each side of the defect signal a follows:
a) On the Main menu, select Gate/Alarm.

b) Press (Gate) and (Gate Select), and then select A (see Figure 12-58
on page 321).

Figure 12-58 Setting the gate

c) Press (Gate Start) and enter the position of beginning of the gate (see
Figure 12-59 on page 322).

Inspection Procedures with Ready-Made Setups 321


d) Press (Width) and enter the width of the gate (see Figure 12-59 on
page 322).

Gate start

Gate width

Figure 12-59 Gate A on each side of the signal

e) Press (Threshold) and enter 10.

f) Press (Next).

8 Press (Gain) and set the value in order to have the calibration defect signal
crossing the gate for all laws (beams).
9 Move the probe forward and backward over the calibration defect to build the
envelope (see Figure 12-60 on page 323).

322 Chapter 12
Figure 12-60 Building the signal envelope for the wedge delay calibration

10 Press (Calibrate).
11 Again move the probe forward and backward over the calibration defect to see if
the envelop is correctly calibrated.
If the calibration is correct, the envelope is between the two red dotted lines (see
Figure 12-61 on page 324).
If the calibration is incorrect, clear the envelope (Clear Env.)and make a new pass
over the defect or restart (Restart) the calibration.

Inspection Procedures with Ready-Made Setups 323


Figure 12-61 The wedge delay calibrated

12 When calibration is satisfactory, press (Accept).


13 Continue with the sensitivity calibration procedure, which follows.

12.4.2–C To calibrate the OmniScan PA and probe sensitivity

1 Press and, in the Mode list, select Sensitivity.

2 Press (Next).
3 Set the amplitude threshold to 80% (Ref. Amplitude) and the tolerance to 5%
(Tolerance) [see Figure 12-62 on page 325].

324 Chapter 12
Figure 12-62 Sensitivity calibration

4 Press (Next).
5 Place the probe on the calibration block and make sure the probe will not skew as
you move it forward and backward. Either use a guide or manual scanner, or
place the calibration block on one side (see Figure 12-63 on page 326).

Inspection Procedures with Ready-Made Setups 325


Figure 12-63 The calibration block on one side to guide the probe motion

6 Set the gate on each side of the defect signal a follows:


a) On the Main menu, select Gate/Alarm.
b) Choose Gate and, in the Gate Select list, select A.
c) In Gate Start, enter the position of beginning of the gate.
d) In Width, enter the width of the gate.
e) In Threshold, enter 10.

f) Press (Next).

7 Press (Gain) and set the value to 75% of the full screen height.
8 Move the probe forward and backward over the calibration defect to build the
envelope (see Figure 12-64 on page 327).

326 Chapter 12
Figure 12-64 Building the signal envelope for the sensitivity calibration

9 Press (Calibrate).
10 Again move the probe forward and backward over the calibration defect to see if
the envelop is correctly calibrated.
If the calibration is correct, the envelope is between the two red dotted lines (see
Figure 12-65 on page 328).
If the calibration is incorrect, clear the envelope (Clear Env.) and make a new pass
over the defect or restart (Restart) the calibration.

Inspection Procedures with Ready-Made Setups 327


Figure 12-65 The sensitivity calibrated

11 When calibration is satisfactory, press (Accept).


12 Continue with the procedure to set the reference level and the inspection gate,
which follows.

12.4.2–D To set the reference level and the inspection gate

1 Press and (Gain) [see Figure 12-66 on page 329], and set the gain so
that the signal level reaches 80% of the full screen height.

328 Chapter 12
Figure 12-66 Gain and time-base range for sectorial scanning

2 Press (Start) and set the start of the time-base range at the interface signal.

3 Press (Range) and set the length of the time-base range to include the
complete thickness of the part (for the half and full skip, which is twice the
thickness).

4 Press and (Gate Select), and then select A (see Figure 12-67 on
page 330).

Inspection Procedures with Ready-Made Setups 329


Figure 12-67 Setting the inspection gate

5 Press (Gate Start) [see Figure 12-67 on page 330] and enter the position of
beginning of the gate.
The gate should begin just after the entry signal.

6 Press (Width) [see Figure 12-67 on page 330] and enter the width of the gate.
The width should be big enough to include the complete thickness of the part,
from the half to the full skip (a little over twice the thickness).

7 Press (Threshold) [see Figure 12-67 on page 330] and enter the gate level.
8 Continue with the procedure to set the second sectorial scan.

330 Chapter 12
12.4.2–E To set the second sectorial scan

1 On the Main menu, select Probe/Part.

2 Press (Select) and (Group), and then select 2.


3 Repeat all the previous procedures starting at step 5 in “Settings and Calibration”
on page 317.
Once you have the two groups, you can switch from one group to the other by

using the Group Selector function key ( ).

Press and hold for two seconds and, upon releasing the key, the title bar of
the selected group becomes highlighted (see Figure 12-68 on page 331).

Figure 12-68 The highlighted title bar of the selected group

4 Continue with the procedure to set the encoder parameters, which follows.

Inspection Procedures with Ready-Made Setups 331


12.4.2–F To set the encoder parameters

1 On the Main menu, select Scan.

2 Press (Encoder) and (Resolution), and then enter the encoder


resolution.
3 Move the probe forward and look at the X value in the upper left corner of the
screen (see Figure 12-69 on page 332).
If the increments are going in the positive direction, this setting is correct.
If the increments are going in the negative direction, in Polarity, select Inverse.

Figure 12-69 The X-axis value

4 Press (Area) and (Scan End), and then enter the length to be scanned.

5 Press (Scan Resolution) and enter the distance between each acquisition
points.

6 On the Main menu, select Probe/Part and press (Position).

7 Press (Index Offset) and enter the distance between the weld center line and
the front of the wedge (see Figure 12-70 on page 333).

332 Chapter 12
Skew angle Weld
centerline
Scan axis +

270°
Index axis +
90°
180°
Index
offset

+ Scan
offset

Scan
axis

– – 0, 0 +
Index axis

Figure 12-70 Scan and index offsets

8 Press (Scan Offset) and type the distance between the side and the middle of
the wedge.
The index and scan offset values will be positive or negative according to the
probe position on the part to inspect.

12.4.3 Inspection
This section presents the inspection procedure and some related functions you can
use.

12.4.3–A To make an inspection

1 Place the probe at the start point of the scan.

2 Press and start moving the probe.

Inspection Procedures with Ready-Made Setups 333


3 At the end of the scan, to keep the data on screen an evaluate the inspection result,

press to freeze the view.


To return to inspection, you must press the freeze key again.

4 To save the inspection result, press .

12.4.4 Analysis Tools and Reporting


In the setup there are some analysis tools already selected.

The top of the screen displays four reading fields (see Figure 12-71 on page 334).

Figure 12-71 The four reading fields

They are the following:

A%
Is the maximum amplitude in gate A.
ViA
Is the distance on the index axis, on the part surface, between the reference point
and an indication (see Figure 12-72 on page 335).
DA
Is the depth of the indication in the part.
VsA
Is the distance on the scan axis, on the part surface, between the reference point
and an indication (see Figure 12-72 on page 335).

334 Chapter 12
ViA

VsA

Negative index Reference 0/0 Positive index

Figure 12-72 Distances with regard to the reference point

To get the analysis cursors, press and (Select), and then select Data.

VPA
Is used to move the cursor through the focal laws (beams).
Scan
Is used to move the cursor along the encoded axis to display information on the
indication.
Add Entry
Is used to enter the indication in the defect table and add the indication to the
report.

12.4.4–A To make a report

1 On the Main menu, select File.

2 Press (Report) and (Build).


You get a preview of the report for all the entered indications.

Inspection Procedures with Ready-Made Setups 335


3 Choose one of the following options:
— Print to print the report.
— Save and close to save the report and return to the analysis.
— Close to close the report without saving it.
For a detailed procedure on making a report, refer to “Configuring a Report” on
page 140.

12.5 Flaw Detection: RD_FlawDetector_35-70SW.ops Setup

This section presents the procedure and the ready-made setup to make an inspection
for flaw detection in a single pass using a range of shear-wave beam angles from 35°
through 70° (see Figure 12-73 on page 336).

Figure 12-73 Electronic sectorial scan for flaw detection

336 Chapter 12
12.5.1 Recommended Probe and Wedge Combinations
The following probes and wedges are recommended for this inspection procedure;
however, other probe and shear-wave wedge combinations can be used.

• 10L32-A1 probe with SA1-N60S wedge


• 5L16-A1 probe with SA1-N60S wedge
• 2L16-A1 probe with SA1-N60S wedge
• 5L64-A2 probe with SA2-N55S wedge
• 2L64-A2 probe with SA2-N55S wedge

12.5.2 Settings and Calibration


This section presents the procedure to set the parameters for the probe, the part, and
the data view screen as well as the calibration procedures for the wedge delay and the
sensitivity.

12.5.2–A To set the parameters for the probe and the part

1 Load the RD_FlawDetector_35-70SW.ops setup as follows:

a) Press to open the Main menu (see Figure 12-74 on page 338), select File,

and press (remember that you must press the Accept key to confirm a
selection or a new parameter).

Inspection Procedures with Ready-Made Setups 337


Figure 12-74 The Main menu

b) Press (File) and (Open), and select RD_FlawDetector_35-70SW.ops.

c) Press or to open the selected setup file.


2 Connect the probe to the OmniScan PA.
The probe is automatically detected by the OmniScan PA and the focal laws are
calculated accordingly.
3 On the Main menu, select Probe/Part.

4 Press (Select) and (Select Wedge), and then select the appropriate
wedge (see Figure 12-75 on page 339).

338 Chapter 12
SA2-N55S
55° SW

Figure 12-75 The list of predefined wedges

5 Press (Parts) and (Thickness), and then enter the thickness of the part
to inspect.

6 Press (Material) and, in the list, select the type of material the part to inspect
is made of.
7 Place the probe on the block over the calibration defect.
8 Continue with the wedge delay calibration, which follows.

12.5.2–B To calibrate the wedge delay

1 Press and, in the Mode list, select Wedge Delay.

2 Press (Next).

3 Press (Echo Type) and select Depth.

Inspection Procedures with Ready-Made Setups 339


4 Press (Depth) and enter the depth of the calibration defect you are using.

5 Press (Tolerance) and enter 1 mm or 0.04 in.

6 Press (Next).
7 Set the gate on each side of the defect signal a follows:
a) On the Main menu, select Gate/Alarm.

b) Press (Gate) and (Gate Select), and then select A (see Figure 12-76
on page 340).

Figure 12-76 Setting the gate

340 Chapter 12
c) Press (Gate Start) and enter the position of beginning of the gate (see
Figure 12-77 on page 341).

d) Press (Width) and enter the width of the gate (see Figure 12-77 on
page 341).

Gate start

Gate width

Figure 12-77 Gate A on each side of the signal

e) Press (Threshold) and enter 10.

f) Press (Next).

8 Press (Gain) and set the value in order to have the calibration defect signal
crossing the gate for all laws (beams).
9 Move the probe forward and backward over the calibration defect to build the
envelope (see Figure 12-78 on page 342).

Inspection Procedures with Ready-Made Setups 341


Figure 12-78 Building the signal envelope for the wedge delay calibration

10 Press (Calibrate).
11 Again move the probe forward and backward over the calibration defect to see if
the envelop is correctly calibrated.
If the calibration is correct, the envelope is between the two red dotted lines (see
Figure 12-79 on page 343).
If the calibration is incorrect, clear the envelope (Clear Env.)and make a new pass
over the defect or restart (Restart) the calibration.

342 Chapter 12
Figure 12-79 The wedge delay calibrated

12 When calibration is satisfactory, press (Accept).


13 Continue with the sensitivity calibration procedure, which follows.

12.5.2–C To calibrate the OmniScan PA and probe sensitivity

1 Press and, in the Mode list, select Sensitivity.

2 Press (Next).
3 Set the amplitude threshold to 80% (Ref. Amplitude) and the tolerance to 5%
(Tolerance) [see Figure 12-80 on page 344].

Inspection Procedures with Ready-Made Setups 343


Figure 12-80 Sensitivity calibration

4 Press (Next).
5 Place the probe on the calibration block and make sure the probe will not skew as
you move it forward and backward. Either use a guide or manual scanner, or
place the calibration block on one side (see Figure 12-81 on page 345).

344 Chapter 12
Figure 12-81 The calibration block on one side to guide the probe motion

6 Set the gate on each side of the defect signal a follows:


a) On the Main menu, select Gate/Alarm.
b) Choose Gate and, in the Gate Select list, select A.
c) In Gate Start, enter the position of beginning of the gate.
d) In Width, enter the width of the gate.
e) In Threshold, enter 10.

f) Press (Next).

7 Press (Gain) and set the value to 75% of the full screen height.
8 Move the probe forward and backward over the calibration defect to build the
envelope (see Figure 12-82 on page 346).

Inspection Procedures with Ready-Made Setups 345


Figure 12-82 Building the signal envelope for the sensitivity calibration

9 Press (Calibrate).
10 Again move the probe forward and backward over the calibration defect to see if
the envelop is correctly calibrated.
If the calibration is correct, the envelope is between the two red dotted lines (see
Figure 12-83 on page 347).
If the calibration is incorrect, clear the envelope (Clear Env.) and make a new pass
over the defect or restart (Restart) the calibration.

346 Chapter 12
Figure 12-83 The sensitivity calibrated

11 When calibration is satisfactory, press (Accept).


12 Continue with the procedure to set the reference level and the inspection gate,
which follows.

12.5.2–D To set the reference level and the inspection gate

1 Press and (Gain) [see Figure 12-84 on page 348], and set the gain so
that the signal level reaches 80% of the full screen height.

Inspection Procedures with Ready-Made Setups 347


Figure 12-84 Gain and time-base range for sectorial scanning

2 Press (Start) and set the start of the time-base range at the interface signal.

3 Press (Range) and set the length of the time-base range to include the
complete thickness of the part (for the half and full skip, which is twice the
thickness).

4 Press and (Gate Select), and then select A (see Figure 12-85 on
page 349).

348 Chapter 12
Figure 12-85 Setting the inspection gate

5 Press (Gate Start) [see Figure 12-85 on page 349] and enter the position of
beginning of the gate.
The gate should begin just after the entry signal.

6 Press (Width) [see Figure 12-85 on page 349] and enter the width of the gate.
The width should be big enough to include the complete thickness of the part,
from the half to the full skip (a little over twice the thickness).

7 Press (Threshold) [see Figure 12-85 on page 349] and enter the gate level.

Inspection Procedures with Ready-Made Setups 349


12.5.3 Inspection
This section presents the inspection procedure and some related functions you can
use.

12.5.3–A To make an inspection

1 Place the probe at the start point of the scan.

2 Press and start moving the probe.


3 At the end of the scan, to keep the data on screen an evaluate the inspection result,

press to freeze the view.


To return to inspection, you must press the freeze key again.

4 To save the inspection result, press .

12.5.4 Analysis Tools and Reporting


In the setup there are some analysis tools already selected.

The top of the screen displays four reading fields. They are the following:

A%
Is the maximum amplitude in gate A.
PA
Is the distance, on the part surface, between the front of the wedge and an
indication.
DA
Is the depth of the indication in the part.
U(m-r)
Is the distance between the measurement and the reference cursors (measurement
minus reference), which is the vertical extent of the indication.

To get the analysis cursors, press and (Select), and then select Data.

350 Chapter 12
VPA
Is used to move the cursor through the focal laws (beams).
Scan
Is used to move the cursor along the encoded axis to display information on the
indication.
Add Entry
Is used to enter the indication in the defect table and add the indication to the
report.

12.5.4–A To make a report

1 On the Main menu, select File.

2 Press (Report) and (Build).


You get a preview of the report for all the entered indications.
3 Choose one of the following options:
— Print to print the report.
— Save and close to save the report and return to the analysis.
— Close to close the report without saving it.
For a detailed procedure on making a report, refer to “Configuring a Report” on
page 140.

12.6 Corrosion Detection: RD_Linear0deg_corrosion_oneLine.ops


Setup

This section presents the procedure and the ready-made setup to make an inspection
for corrosion detection in a single pass using electronic linear focusing (see Figure
12-86 on page 352).

Inspection Procedures with Ready-Made Setups 351


Figure 12-86 Corrosion detection setup

12.6.1 Recommended Probe and Wedge Combinations


The following probes and wedges are recommended for this inspection procedure;
however, other probe and shear-wave wedge combinations can be used.

• 5L128-12 probe with water box


• 10L128-12 probe with water box
• 5L64-I1 probe with SI1-0L wedge or water box
• 10L64-I1 probe with SI1-0L wedge or water box
• 2L128-13 probe with water box
• 5L64-A2 probe with SA2-0L wedge
You also need a mini-encoder and a one-axis scanner.

12.6.2 Settings and Calibration


This section presents the procedure to set the parameters for the probe, the part, the
data view screen, and the encoder as well as the calibration procedures for the
sensitivity and the wedge delay.

352 Chapter 12
12.6.2–A To set the parameters for the probe and the part

1 Load the RD_Linear0deg_corrosion_oneLine.ops setup as follows:

a) Press to open the Main menu (see Figure 12-87 on page 353), select File,

and press (remember that you must press the Accept key to confirm a
selection or a new parameter).

Figure 12-87 The Main menu

b) Press (File) and (Open), and select


RD_Linear0deg_corrosion_oneLine.ops.

c) Press or to open the selected setup file.


2 Connect the probe to the OmniScan PA.
The probe is automatically detected by the OmniScan PA and the focal laws are
calculated accordingly.
3 On the Main menu, select Probe/Part.

4 Press (Select) and (Select Wedge), and then select the appropriate
wedge (see Figure 12-88 on page 354).

Inspection Procedures with Ready-Made Setups 353


SA2-0L
0° LW

Figure 12-88 The list of predefined wedges

5 Press (Parts) and (Thickness), and then enter the thickness of the part
to inspect.

6 Press (Material) and, in the list, select the type of material the part to inspect
is made of.
7 Place the probe on the calibration block on a place that is free of defects.
8 Continue with the sensitivity calibration procedure, which follows.

12.6.2–B To calibrate the OmniScan PA and probe sensitivity

1 Press and, in the Mode list, select Sensitivity.

2 Press (Next).
3 Set the amplitude threshold to 80% (Ref. Amplitude) and the tolerance to 5%
(Tolerance).

354 Chapter 12
4 Press (Next).
5 Set the gate on each side of the back-wall signal a follows:
a) On the Main menu, select Gate/Alarm.
b) Choose Gate and, in the Gate Select list, select A.
c) In Gate Start, enter the position of beginning of the gate.
d) In Width, enter the width of the gate.
e) In Threshold, enter 10.

f) Press (Next).

6 Press (Gain) and set the value to 75% of the full screen height (see Figure
12-89 on page 355).

Figure 12-89 Building the signal envelope for the sensitivity calibration

Inspection Procedures with Ready-Made Setups 355


7 Press (Clear Env.).

8 Press (Calibrate).
If the calibration is correct, the envelope is between the two red dotted lines (see
Figure 12-90 on page 356).
If the calibration is incorrect, clear the envelope (Clear Env.) restart (Restart) the
calibration.

Figure 12-90 The sensitivity calibrated

9 When calibration is satisfactory, press (Accept).


10 Continue with the procedure to set the reference level and the inspection gate,
which follows.

356 Chapter 12
12.6.2–C To set the reference level and the inspection gate

1 Press and (Gain) [see Figure 12-91 on page 357], and set the gain so
that the back-wall signal level reaches 80% of the full screen height.

Figure 12-91 Back-wall signal

2 Press (Start) and set the start of the time-base range at the interface signal.

3 Press (Range) and set the length of the time-base range to include the
complete thickness of the part (for the half and full skip, which is twice the
thickness).

4 Press and (Gate Select), and then select A (see Figure 12-92 on
page 358).

Inspection Procedures with Ready-Made Setups 357


Figure 12-92 Setting the inspection gate

5 Press (Gate Start) [see Figure 12-92 on page 358] and enter the position of
beginning of the gate.
The gate should begin just after the entry signal.

6 Press (Width) [see Figure 12-92 on page 358] and enter the width of the gate.
The width should be big enough to include the back wall.

7 Press (Thickness) to adjust the color palette as follows:

a) Press (Min) and enter the minimum thickness (red); which usually is
half the thickness of the part to inspect.

358 Chapter 12
b) Press (Max) and enter the maximum thickness (blue); which usually is
the actual thickness of the part to inspect.
To change the type of results you get from the readings inside the gate, go to Scan
> Synchro > Source. For example, select a^ to get the maximum amplitude in the
gate or a/ to get the crossing point in the gate.
8 Continue with the wedge delay adjustment, which follows.

12.6.2–D To adjust the wedge delay

1 On the Main menu, select UT and then General.

2 Press (Wedge Delay) and change the value in order to get the back-wall
signal at the actual thickness (look at the T information field).
3 Continue with the procedure to set the encoder parameters, which follows.

12.6.2–E To set the encoder parameters

1 On the Main menu, select Scan.

2 Press (Encoder) and (Resolution), and then enter the encoder


resolution.
3 Move the probe forward and look at the X value in the upper left corner of the
screen (seeFigure 12-93 on page 360).
If the increments are going in the positive direction, this setting is correct.
If the increments are going in the negative direction, in Polarity, select Inverse.

Inspection Procedures with Ready-Made Setups 359


Figure 12-93 The X-axis value

4 Press (Area) and (Scan End), and then enter the length to be scanned.

5 Press (Scan Resolution) and enter the distance between each acquisition
points.

6 On the Main menu, select Probe/Part and press (Position).

7 Press (Index Offset) and enter the distance between the weld center line and
the front of the wedge (see Figure 12-94 on page 361).

360 Chapter 12
Skew angle Weld
centerline
Scan axis +

270°
Index axis +
90°
180°
Index
offset

+ Scan
offset

Scan
axis

– – 0, 0 +
Index axis

Figure 12-94 Scan and index offsets

8 Press (Scan Offset) and type the distance between the side and the middle of
the wedge.
The index and scan offset values will be positive or negative according to the
probe position on the part to inspect.

12.6.3 Inspection
This section presents the inspection procedure and some related functions you can
use.

12.6.3–A To make an inspection

1 Place the probe at the start point of the scan.

2 Press and start moving the probe.

Inspection Procedures with Ready-Made Setups 361


3 At the end of the scan, to keep the data on screen an evaluate the inspection result,

press to freeze the view.


To return to inspection, you must press the freeze key again.

4 To save the inspection result, press .


It saves the complete wave form and C-scan. The gate position can be change at

the time of analysis using the freeze ( ) function and gate position ( ).

12.6.4 Analysis Tools and Reporting


In the setup there are some analysis tools already selected.

The top of the screen displays four reading fields (see Figure 12-95 on page 362).

Figure 12-95 The four reading fields

T
Is the thickness of the part obtained as a result of the inspection.
A%
Is the maximum amplitude in gate A.
Sm-r
Is the distance, on the scan axis, between the measurement and the reference
cursors (measurement minus reference), which is the vertical extent of the
indication.
Im-r
Is the distance, on the index axis, between the measurement and the reference
cursors (measurement minus reference), which is the width of the indication.

362 Chapter 12
The S-scan is the cumulation of all the beams to create a cross section of the part.

The C-scan is color coded based on the material thickness.

The acquisition is based on the internal clock. An encoded C-scan can be used by
going to Scan > Synchro > Source and changing Clock to One Axis.

To get the analysis cursors, press and (Select), and then select Data.

VPA
Is used to move the cursor through the focal laws (beams).
Scan
Is used to move the cursor along the encoded axis to display information on the
indication.
Add Entry
Is used to enter the indication in the defect table and add the indication to the
report.

12.6.4–A To make a report

1 On the Main menu, select File.

2 Press (Report) and (Build).


You get a preview of the report for all the entered indications.
3 Choose one of the following options:
— Print to print the report.
— Save and close to save the report and return to the analysis.
— Close to close the report without saving it.
For more details on making a report, refer to “Configuring a Report” on page 140.

Inspection Procedures with Ready-Made Setups 363


364 Chapter 12
13. Inspection-related Procedures

This chapter groups procedures that relate to inspections using the OmniScan®
Phased Array Software.

13.1 Setting an Alarm

This section explains how to set alarms.

There are eight possible alarms available on the OmniScan PA. These alarms can be
output on:

• The three indicator lights on the front panel of the unit


• The internal speaker
• The three outputs on the alarm and I/O connector
In order to trigger an alarm, at least one gate must be set, because all the alarm
conditions are linked to the gates.

To set an alarm

1 Press , select Gate/Alarm and press (Alarms).


2 In the Alarm list, select which one of the eight alarms will be triggered (see Figure
13-1 on page 366).

Inspection-related Procedures 365


Figure 13-1 The Alarm list

3 In the Group A list, select the group to which the selection made in the first
Condition list will apply.
4 In the Condition list of group A select the parameter that will trigger the alarm
(see Figure 13-2 on page 367).
For a more complex alarm, you may want to use a second condition. In this case
continue to step 5. If one condition is sufficient, the procedure stops here.

366 Chapter 13
Figure 13-2 The alarm Condition list

5 In the Group B list, select the group to which the selection made in the second
Condition button will apply.
Groups A and B may be the same but they cannot have the same condition.
6 In the Condition list of group B select the parameter that will trigger the alarm.
7 In the Operator list, select one of the following option to link two conditions:
• OR, if you want to set the parameters so that an alarm is activated when
either condition is reached.
• AND, if you want to set the parameters so that an alarm is activated when
both conditions are reached.

13.2 Setting an Output

This section explains how to set an output.

To set an output

1 Press , select Gate/Alarm and press (Output).


2 In the Output list, select which output is activated (see Figure 13-3 on page 368).

Inspection-related Procedures 367


Figure 13-3 The Output list

3 In the Alarm # list, select which alarm is assigned to the output selected in step 2.
4 If you need a condition count, proceed as follows or continue to step 5.
♦ In the Count button, enter the number of times the alarm condition must be
met before triggering the alarm.
5 If you need a sound alarm, proceed as follows or continue to step 6.
♦ In the Buzzer list, select the sound frequency of the alarm (see Figure 13-4 on
page 368).

Figure 13-4 The possible alarm pitch

6 If need a delay between the occurrence of the alarm condition and the actual
alarm trigger, proceed as follows or continue to step 7.
♦ In the Delay button, enter the delay value according to the time unit used.
7 If you need a specific duration for the alarm, proceed as follows:
♦ In the Hold Time button, enter the time length after which the alarm is
turned off.

368 Chapter 13
13.3 Using the Zoom Function

This section describes how to use the zoom function.

To zoom in using the mouse

1 Place the mouse cursor at one of the corners of the area on which you want to
zoom in.
2 Drag the mouse towards the opposite corner of the desired area.
A green, hollow rectangle is formed.
3 Release the mouse button.

To zoom out using the mouse


♦ Double-click on the zoom bar inside the rulers of the data view (see Figure 13-5 on
page 369).
OR

♦ Click one end of the zoom bar and drag the end towards the other end of the
zoom bar.

Zoom bar

Figure 13-5 The zoom bar inside a ruler

Tip: You can resize the zoom bar using the mouse.

To zoom in without the mouse

1 Press , select Display and press (Zoom).

Inspection-related Procedures 369


2 In the Display list, select the desired zoom option (see Figure 13-6 on page 370).
For more information about the zoom options, refer to “Zoom” on page 79.

Figure 13-6 The list of zoom options

3 According to the option selected, a series of options are available (see Figure 13-7
on page 370). Set them accordingly.

Figure 13-7 Example of options for the A-scan zoom option

To zoom out without the mouse

♦ Press , select Display and press (Zoom).


♦ In the Display list, select Off (see Figure 13-8 on page 371).

370 Chapter 13
Figure 13-8 No zooming selected

13.4 Configuring a Thickness C-Scan

This section describes how to configure a thickness C-scan. The thickness C-scan is
used when the part thickness is to be monitored as for corrosion inspection for
example.

To configure a thickness C-scan

1 Place the probe on a calibration block.

2 Press , select UT and press (General).


3 In the Wedge Delay button, enter the value of the wedge delay (see Figure 13-9 on
page 372).
If the value is unknown, refer to “Wedge Delay Calibration” on page 224.

Inspection-related Procedures 371


Figure 13-9 The General submenu options

4 In the Velocity button, select velocity of the ultrasound in the part to be inspected.
If the value is unknown, refer to “Sound Velocity Calibration” on page 215.

5 Press , select Probe/Part and press (Parts).


6 In the Geometry list, select the type of part that will be inspected (see Figure 13-10
on page 373).

372 Chapter 13
Figure 13-10 The Geometry list

7 In the Thickness edit button, enter the thickness of the part that will be inspected.
8 In the Material list button, select the type of material that will be inspected.

9 Press , select UT and press (General).


10 In the Start button, enter the value of start of the time base.
11 In the Range button, enter the length of the time-base range according to the part
thickness.

12 Press , select Gate/Alarm and press (Gate).


13 Set gate A on the back-wall signal as follows:
a) In the Gate list, select A (see Figure 13-11 on page 374).

Inspection-related Procedures 373


Figure 13-11 Gate A parameters

b) In the Start button, enter the start of gate A (see Figure 13-12 on page 374)

Figure 13-12 Gate A options

c) In the Width set the width of gate A in order to include the complete length of
the signal according to the gate threshold selected.
14 Set gate I on the back-wall signal as follows:
a) In the Start button, enter the start of gate I (see Figure 13-13 on page 374).

Figure 13-13 Gate I options

374 Chapter 13
b) In the Width set the width of gate I in order to include the complete length of
the signal according to the gate threshold selected.
c) In the Synchro list button, select I.

Note: Reading fields 1 and 2 are reserved for the analysis of gate A or
other matters. Reading fields 3 and 4 are reserved for the analysis of gate B or
other matters.

15 Choose one of the following procedures depending if you want to analyze gate A
or gate B:

• To analyze gate A, on the Main menu, select Reading and press (Result),
and proceed as follows:
(1) In the Field 1 list, select A%.
(2) In the Field 2 list, select A^.
(3) In the Field 3 list, select ML.
(4) In the Field 4 list, select T (see Figure 13-14 on page 375).

Figure 13-14 Source codes for gate A

OR

• To analyze gate B, on the Main menu, select Reading and press (Result),
and then proceed as follows:
(1) In the Field 1 list, select ML.
(2) In the Field 2 list, select T.
(3) In the Field 3 list, select B%.
(4) In the Field 4 list, select B^.

16 Press , select Display and press (Selection).

Inspection-related Procedures 375


17 In the Display list, select A-C-[C].
18 In the C-Scan 1 list, select Thickness.
The thickness C-scan has been configured.

13.5 Configuring the DAC Curve Manually

This section describes how to configure the DAC curve manually.

Note: When setting a DAC curve manually, the curve points will be at the
same sound path and same amplitude on each beam.

To configure the DAC curve manually

1 Press , select Display and press (Selection).


2 In the Display list, select A.

3 Press , select Gate/Alarm and press DAC/TCG.


4 In the Mode list, select Setup.
5 In the Curve list, select DAC (see Figure 13-15 on page 376) and proceed as
follows:

Figure 13-15 Curve list

376 Chapter 13
a) Using the Ref. Amplitude option, set the reference level of the first point at
0 µs of the time base. The default level is 80%.
b) On the A-scan, bring the signal of the first point to add on the DAC curve (see
Figure 13-16 on page 377).

Figure 13-16 The first point of the DAC curve

c) If the gain of that signal is higher or lower than the reference amplitude, then
choose the Reference Gain option button and reduce or increase the gain to
have it reach the calibration level.
6 In the Mode list, select Edit (see Figure 13-17 on page 377).

Figure 13-17 Edit mode options

7 Press (Add).

Inspection-related Procedures 377


8 In the Point option list, select 2. This point of the DAC curve appears as a red dot
in the data view. Then proceed as follows:
a) If the red dot is not visible, increase or decrease the Amplitude value by 2
until the dot is visible.
b) Set the value of the Position option button in order to bring the red dot to the
time of flight of the defect.
c) Set the value of the Amplitude option button in order to move the DAC curve
on the defect signal (see Figure 13-18 on page 378).

Figure 13-18 The DAC curve on the next signal

9 Press (Add).
10 In the Point list, select the new point (in this case, 3), and then repeat steps 8a
through 9 until the curve is complete.
11 If you want to erase a point on the curve, then proceed as follows:
a) In the Point list, select the point you want to delete.

b) Press (Delete).
12 If you want to verify the DAC curve, on the Main menu, select Display and press

(Properties) [see Figure 13-19 on page 379], and then proceed as follows:
a) In the Display list, select A-Scan.

378 Chapter 13
Figure 13-19 The Envelope list

b) In the Envelope list, select Infinite.


c) Go back on each defect and verify that they are all on the DAC curve (see
Figure 13-20 on page 379).

Figure 13-20 Verification of the DAC curve

Inspection-related Procedures 379


13 To reset the envelope, press .

13.6 Configuring the TCG Curve Manually

This section describes how to configure the TCG (time-corrected gain) curve
manually.

To configure the TCG curve manually

1 Press , select Display and press (Selection).


2 In the Display list, select A.

3 Press , select Gate/Alarm and press DAC/TCG.


4 In the Mode list, select Setup.
5 In the Curve list, select TCG (see Figure 13-15 on page 376).

Figure 13-21 Selecting TCG in the Curve list

6 In the Mode list, select Edit.

Figure 13-22 Edit mode options

380 Chapter 13
7 In the Point option list, select 2. This point of the TCG curve appears as a red dot
on the data display. Then proceed as follows:
a) If the red dot is not visible, increase the Gain value by 2 until the dot is visible
(see Figure 13-23 on page 381).

Figure 13-23 The first point of the TCG curve

b) Set the value of the Position option button in order to bring the red dot to the
time of flight of the defect.
c) In the Gain option button, adjust the gain value up or down in order to set the
signal at the desired level (80% is the suggested value).

d) If you want to see the exact amplitude of the defect, press (Gate), and
then set the option values so that gate A is placed over the defect.
The amplitude is displayed in the A% reading field at the top of the screen.
8 Move to the next defect or look at the next back-wall signal.

9 Press (Add) to add a new point to the TCG curve.


10 In the Point option list, select the new point (in this case, 3), and then repeat
steps 7a through 9 until the curve is complete.
11 If you want to erase a point on the curve, then proceed as follows:
a) In the Point list, select the point you want to delete.

b) Press (Delete).

12 To verify the TCG curve, on the Main menu, select Display and press
(Properties) [see Figure 13-19 on page 379], and then proceed as follows:

Inspection-related Procedures 381


a) In the Display list, select A-Scan.

Figure 13-24 The Envelope list

b) In the Envelope list, select Infinite.


c) Go over the calibrated defect and check if all the peaks reach 80% (see Figure
13-25 on page 382).

Figure 13-25 An envelope with peaks at 80%

13 To reset the envelope, press .

382 Chapter 13
13.7 Setting Up a Scan Using Encoders

This section describes how to set up a scan using encoders.

Note: Before performing this procedure, an X or XY encoder must be


properly connected to the Alarm and I/O connector.

To set up a scan using encoders

1 Press , select Scan, press (Encoder), and proceed as follows:


a) In the Encoder list, select 1 (see Figure 13-26 on page 383).

Figure 13-26 The Encoder option button

b) Move the encoder in the scan direction and check the upper-left corner of the
data view to see if the numbers of the X-axis are moving in the positive
direction.
If the number are moving in the negative direction, in the Polarity list, select
Inverse.
c) In the Type list, select the encoder type. Quad (quadrature) is set by default.
d) In the Resolution button, enter the encoder resolution. If the resolution is
unknown, calibrate the encoders of one or two of the axes using the
procedure explained in “Encoder Calibration” on page 256.
e) In the Origin option button, enter the value that will be set when the Preset
command is used. The default value is set to 0.
f) If only one axis is used, go to step 2. If a two-axis encoder is connected, then
continue with step 1g.
g) In the Encoder list, select 2.

Inspection-related Procedures 383


h) Move the encoder in the index direction and check the upper-left corner of the
data view to see if the numbers of the Y-axis are moving in the positive
direction.
If the number are moving in the negative direction, in the Polarity list, select
Inverse.
i) In the Type option button, select the encoder type. Quad is set by default.
j) In the Resolution option button, enter the encoder resolution. If the
resolution is unknown, calibrate the encoders of one or two of the axes using
the procedure explained in “Encoder Calibration” on page 256.
k) In the Origin option button, enter the value that will be set when the Preset
command is used. The default value is set to 0.

2 Press (Synchro) and proceed as follows:


a) In the Source list, select the number of axes used to scan the part (see Figure
13-27 on page 384).

Figure 13-27 The Source list button

b) In the Scan list, select the encoder that is used for the scan axis. The other axis
automatically becomes the index axis.

3 Press (Area), and then proceed as follows:


a) In the Scan Start button, enter the starting position along the scan axis (see
Figure 13-28 on page 384).

Figure 13-28 The option buttons of the scanning area

384 Chapter 13
b) In the Scan End button, enter the length of the scan along the scan axis.
c) In the Scan Resolution button, enter the resolution of the scan along the scan
axis.
If you have selected one axis in the Source list, the procedure is now
completed. If you have selected two axes in the Source list, continue to
step 3d.
d) In the Index Start button, enter the starting position along the index axis.
e) In the Index End button, enter the length of the scan along the index axis.
f) In the Index Resolution button, enter the resolution of the scan along the
index axis.

4 When you are ready to scan, press .

13.8 Configuring Gain Reference Levels

This section describes how to scan using gain reference levels.

Note: Before performing this procedure, UT settings must be properly


configured and appropriate calibration must be performed.

To scan using gain reference levels

1 Place the probe on the calibration block containing a known defect.


2 Adjust a gate on the defect signal in order to get a reading of the signal amplitude
in the reading fields.
3 Adjust the gain so that the defect signal reaches the reference level (80% of full-
screen height is the suggested value). On the Main menu, select UT and use one of
the following methods:

• Press (General) and, in the Gain button enter the gain value.
OR

Inspection-related Procedures 385


• Press (Advanced) and (Set 80%) [see Figure 13-29 on page 386]. The
defect signal is automatically set to 80%.

Figure 13-29 The Set 80% button

4 Press , select UT, and press (Advanced).

5 Press (Set Ref) [see Figure 13-30 on page 386].


This sets the actual gain as the reference level.

Figure 13-30 The UT > Advanced submenu options

6 Set dB Ref. to On.


This enables the gain in relation to the reference gain.

7 On the Main menu, select Reading, press (Result), and select the AdBr
option in one of the four buttons for the reading field parameters (see Figure 13-31
on page 387).

386 Chapter 13
Figure 13-31 The first list of four reading fields

This displays the difference between the signal in gate A and the reference signal.

13.9 Working with Multiple Groups

This section presents the procedures to create groups and link some of their settings.

13.9.1 Adding and Removing a Group


The following procedures describe how to add a group and to remove a group. The
quantity of groups that can be linked is limited by the number of pulsers of the
acquisition module.

You can also use the Group Wizard to add or remove groups, refer to “Wizard” on
page 97.

Inspection-related Procedures 387


Note: Any changes of parameters are applied to the selected group. The
display shows the selected group, except in the case of multiple views.

This procedure concerns only the modules that supports multiple groups.

To add a group

1 On the Main menu, select Probe/Part and press (Select).


2 In the Group list, select Add (see Figure 13-32 on page 388).

Figure 13-32 Adding a group

Once a group is added it is automatically selected (see Figure 13-33 on page 389)
and becomes the group to which all new parameters will apply.

388 Chapter 13
Figure 13-33 The newly created group selected

To remove a group

1 On the Main menu, select Probe/Part and press (Select).


2 In the Group list, select Remove (see Figure 13-34 on page 389).

Note: Group 1 can never be removed. The group that is removed is always
the last one created.

The previous group is automatically selected and becomes the group to which all
new parameters will apply. For example, if group 4 has been removed, group 3
becomes the selected group.

Figure 13-34 Removing a group

Inspection-related Procedures 389


13.9.2 Linking and Unlinking Groups
The following procedures describe how to link groups and unlink groups. You can
only link a group with the previous group; therefore, you cannot select a link for
Group 1. You can link many groups together as long as you select the same type of
link. The other types of link will not be available. Table 6 on page 391 lists the
parameters that can be linked according to the selection in the Group Link button of
the Probe/Part > Select submenu: MultiProbe, MultiGain, or MultiGate.

When you have four groups or more, it is possible to create separate group links. For
example, if you set a link for Group 2, it becomes linked with Group 1. Then if you set
a different link for Group 4, without setting any for Group 3, Group 4 becomes linked
with Group 3. As a result, there are two linked groups: Group 1 with Group 2, and
Group 3 with Group 4.

To see the link type, open the Group list of the Probe/Part > Select submenu. If there
is an asterisk (*) next to the group number, it means that it is the first group of a
number of linked groups. Otherwise, you see the link type next to the group number.
The asterisk is used to quickly identify groups of the same link (see Figure 13-35 on
page 390).

Figure 13-35 Groups 1 and 2 linked with MultiGate, and groups 3 and 4 linked
with MultiGain

390 Chapter 13
Table 6 Link parameters

Parameters MultiProbe MultiGain MultiGate


UT General Gain No No Yes
Start Yes Yes Yes
Range Yes Yes Yes
Wedge delay No Yes Yes
Velocity Yes Yes Yes
Pulser Pulser No Yes Yes
Tx/Rx Mode Yes Yes Yes
Frequency Yes Yes Yes
Voltage Yes Yes Yes
Pulse width Yes Yes Yes
Receiver Receiver No Yes Yes
Filter Yes Yes Yes
Rectification Yes Yes Yes
Video Filter Yes Yes Yes
Average Yes Yes Yes
Beam Scan Offset No Yes Yes
Index Offset No Yes Yes
Angle Yes Yes Yes
Advanced Pts Qty Yes Yes Yes
Gate/Alarm Gate All Yes Yes No
parameters
DAC/TGC All Yes No No
parameters
Display Rulers UT unit Yes Yes Yes

Inspection-related Procedures 391


To link groups

1 On the Main menu, select Probe/Part and press (Select).


2 In the Group list, select the group you want to link with the preceding one (see
Figure 13-36 on page 392).

Figure 13-36 Linking group 3 to group 2

3 In the Group Link list, select the type of link (refer to Table 6 on page 391) you
require (see Figure 13-37 on page 392).

Figure 13-37 Linking groups with the MultiGate parameters

392 Chapter 13
The groups that are linked together and the type of link is indicated in the Group
list (see Figure 13-38 on page 393).

Figure 13-38 Groups 2, 3, and 4 linked with the MultiGate parameters

To unlink groups

1 On the Main menu, select Probe/Part and press (Select).


2 In the Group list, select the group you want to unlink.

Note: Unlinking is only done for the last group of a group of groups. For
example, if you have five groups and Group 2, Group 3, and Group 4 are linked,
you can only unlink Group 4. Group 2 and Group 3 remain linked.

3 In the Group Link list, select Off (see Figure 13-39 on page 394).

Inspection-related Procedures 393


Figure 13-39 Unlinking group 3

13.10 Configuring and Building a Defect Table

This section describes how to configure and build a defect table. It also provides
information on how to delete and modify entries, and how to make a report. For more
information about the defect table, refer to “Table” on page 56.

To configure a defect table

1 On the Main menu, select Reading and press Table.


2 In the Display Table list, select On to display the defect table at the bottom of the
data view (see Figure 13-40 on page 394).

Figure 13-40 The empty defect table at the bottom of the views

394 Chapter 13
3 In the Entry Image list, select On to include the data view when adding an entry.

4 On the Main menu, select Display and press Selection.


5 In the Display list, select the view layout. (The layout description is found in
“Selection” on page 70 under “Display.”)

6 On the Main menu, select Reading and press (Result) to select the reading
fields you want to associate with the indication information when it is added in
the defect table.

To add an indication in the defect table

1 On the Main menu, select File and press (File).


2 In the Save Mode list, select Table.

3 Press , or choose File > File > Save Data each time you want to enter an
indication in the table.
OR

1 On the Main menu, select Reading and press (Table).

2 Press (Add Entry) each time you want to enter an indication in the table.
It is possible to modify the information of the entries.

To modify an indication or delete it from the defect table

1 On the Main menu, select Reading and press (Table).

2 Press (Select Entry), and use the Scroll knob or the function keys to enter the
number of the indication you want (see Figure 13-41 on page 396).

Inspection-related Procedures 395


Figure 13-41 Selecting an entry in the defect table

3 To add comments associated with the entry, connect a keyboard to the


OmniScan MX.

4 Press (Edit Comments) and type your comments (see Figure 13-42 on
page 397).

It is possible to modify the comment by pressing (Select Entry) and pressing

(Edit Comments).

5 To delete an entry, select it as in step 2 and press (Delete Entry).

Note: An asterisk (*) appears next to an entry for which a comment has
been added. This asterisk only appears once you add another entry.

396 Chapter 13
Figure 13-42 Entries accompanied by comments marked with an asterisk

To make a report with the defect table

1 On the Main menu, select File and press (Format).


2 In the View list, select Table to enter the defect table in the report.

Note: The defect table will be in the report only if there is at least one entry
in the table.

3 To include data views with the defect table, proceed as follows:

a) On the Main menu, select Reading and press (Table)


b) In the Display Table list, select On to display the defect table at the bottom of
the data view.
c) In the Entry Image list, select On to include the data view when adding an
entry.

4 On the Main menu, select File and press (Report).

5 Press (Build) to create the report.


You can print the report, save it, or close it without saving it using the option
buttons at the bottom of the screen.

Inspection-related Procedures 397


13.11 Importing OmniScan PA Data into TomoView

This section describes how to import data from the OmniScan PA into TomoView™.

Note: To import data into TomoView, the data must be acquired using
either the C-scan or A-scan storage mode.

To import OmniScan PA data into TomoView

1 On the Main menu, select File and press (File).


2 In the Save Mode list, select the type of data you want to save (see Figure 13-43 on
page 398).

Figure 13-43 The Save Mode list

3 Press (Save Data).

398 Chapter 13
4 Transfer the file to a computer by using a memory card reader or by linking the
OmniScan MX to the computer through the Ethernet port. For more information
about networking the OmniScan MX, refer to “Connecting the OmniScan MX
Directly to a Computer (Windows XP)” on page 148.
5 Make sure that the appropriate hardware key is connected to the parallel port of
the computer.
6 Start the TomoView software.

7 Once TomoView has finished loading, click the OmniScan button ( ).


A dialog box appears.
8 Browse and select the file to be imported.
9 Click the Open button.
TomoView converts the file into the .rdt format.
10 Save the new .rdt file in the desired folder.

Note: For more information about configuring and analyzing the data
from the files, consult the TomoView 2 Reference Manual.

Inspection-related Procedures 399


400 Chapter 13
Appendix A: Acquisition Module Description and
Replacement Procedure

This appendix presents the general specifications, the connectors, and the procedure
to replace and connect an acquisition module used with the OmniScan® MX unit and
the procedure to clean the module fan filter.

A.1 General Specifications

This section presents the general specifications common to all acquisition modules.

Overall dimensions
OMNI-M-PA1616, OMNI-M-PA16128, and OMNI-M-PA16128PR
244 mm × 182 mm × 57 mm
(9.62 in. × 7.17 in. × 2.15 in.)
OMNI-M-PA3232, OMNI-M-PA32128, and OMNI-M-PA32128PR
250 mm × 190 mm × 57 mm
(9.84 in. × 7.48 in. × 2.15 in.)
Weight 1.2 kg (2.6 lb)
Probe recognition Automatic probe recognition and setup
Operating temperature
OMNI-M-PA1616, OMNI-M-PA16128, and OMNI-M-PA16128PR
0°C to 40°C
OMNI-M-PA3232, OMNI-M-PA32128, and OMNI-M-PA32128PR
0°C to 35°C
Storage temperature –20°C to 70°C
Relative humidity 95% non condensing.

Acquisition Module Description and Replacement Procedure 401


A.2 Connectors

The acquisition modules are equipped with one phased array (all models) connector
and two BNC connectors (only OMNI-M-PA1616, OMNI-M-PA16128, and OMNI-M-
PA16128PR).

R1 BNC connector used for the reception of ultrasound signals


when using the pulser-receiver inspection technique (also
called or transmit-receive technique).
P1 BNC connector used for the transmission of ultrasound
signals when using the pulser-receiver inspection technique.
PHASED ARRAY Connector used for phased array probes.
The compatible probe connectors are presented in Figure A-1 on page 402.

Figure A-1 The BNC (left) and the phased array (right) probe connectors

402 Appendix A
A.3 Replacement Procedure

This section presents the procedure to replace an acquisition module and connect the
phased array probe to it.

CAUTION
Do not remove an acquisition module while the OmniScan is turned on. Doing so
can damage the circuits and cause the loss of any unsaved data. Always make
sure to turn off the OmniScan before removing an acquisition module.

To replace an acquisition module

1 Turn off the OmniScan.


2 Disconnect the DC power adapter if it is present.
3 Place the instrument face down on a stable surface.
4 Unscrew the two captive screws either by hand or using a flat-head screwdriver.
When the captive screws are sufficiently loose, they pop out on their own because
of a small metal spring.

CAUTION
Do not try to remove the captive screws entirely, as they are not designed to do
so. Trying to remove them will result in material damage.

5 Using the two module extractors (the two plastic levers located on the opposite
side of the captive screws), loosen the module.
6 Remove the module.
7 Align the connector of the new module on top of the OmniScan connector, and
then gently press down.

Acquisition Module Description and Replacement Procedure 403


8 Secure the new module by snapping the extractors on the module.
9 Screw the two captive screws either by hand or using a flat-head screwdriver.
10 Connect the DC power adapter if needed.
11 Connect the phased array probe connector as follows:
a) Align the phased array probe connector correctly by matching its guide pins
and the PHASED ARRAY module connector (see Figure A-2 on page 404).

Figure A-2 The phased array probe connector guide pins

b) Gently press the phased array probe connector into the PHASED ARRAY
module connector until it is completely set in.
c) Tighten the retaining screws located on each side of the phased array probe
connector.
This concludes the procedure to replace an acquisition module and connect a phased
array probe.

404 Appendix A
A.4 Fan Filter Cleaning Procedure

This section presents the procedure to clean the fan filters of the acquisition modules,
models OMNI-M-PA3232, OMNI-M-PA32128, and OMNI-M-PA32128PR.

To clean the fan filter

1 On the fan grille, remove the screw that secure the grille to the module (see Figure
A-3 on page 405).

Figure A-3 The grille and the filter of the OMNI-M-PA32xx model

2 Remove the filter.


3 Using soap and water, clean the filter.
4 Rinse thoroughly with clear water and let dry.
5 Reinstall the filter inside the fan opening.
6 Reinstall the grille and secure it with the screw.
This concludes the procedure to clean the module fan filter.

Acquisition Module Description and Replacement Procedure 405


406 Appendix A
Appendix B: OMNI-M-PA1616 Module Specifications

This appendix presents the technical specifications of the acquisition module model
OMNI-M-PA1616 (see Figure B-1 on page 407).

Figure B-1 The phased array module, model OMNI-M-PA1616

B.1 Acoustic Specifications

This section presents the acoustic specifications for the pulser, the receiver, and the
beam formation.

OMNI-M-PA1616 Module Specifications 407


Pulser
Supported voltage Low: 40 V
High: 80 V
Pulse width Adjustable from 30 ns to 500 ns, resolution of 2.5 ns
Fall time <10 ns
Pulse shape Negative square pulse
Output impedance <25 ohms

Receiver
Gain range 0–74 dB maximum input signal 1.32 Vp-p
Input impedance 75 ohms
Bandwidth of the system 0.75–18 MHz (–3 dB)

Beam formation
Scan type Azimuthal and linear
Aperture 16 elements
Number of elements 16 elements
Number of focal laws 256
Delay range transmission) 0–10 µs in 2.5-ns increments
Delay range reception) 0–10 µs in 2.5-ns increments

B.2 Acquisition Specifications

This section presents the acquisition specifications on frequency, data display, and
synchronization.

Digitizing frequency 100 MHz (10 bits)


A-scan (acquisition) Up to 6,000 A-scans per second (512-point, 8-bit
A-scan)
Maximum pulsing rate Up to 10 kHz (C-scan)
Depth in material 59.8 meters in steel (longitudinal wave), 10 ms with
compression
0.49 meter in steel (longitudinal wave), 81.9 µs
without compression

408 Appendix B
Display
Refresh rate A-scan: 60 Hz; S-scan: 20–30 Hz
Envelope (echo-dynamic mode) Yes; volume-corrected S-scan (30 Hz)

Synchronization
On internal clock 1 Hz to 10 kHz
External pace Yes
On encoder On 2 axes; from 1 to 65,536 steps

B.3 Data Specifications

This section presents the data specifications on processing, TCG, and storage.

Processing
Number of data points Up to 8,000
Real-time averaging 2, 4, 8, and 16
Rectification RF, full wave, halfwave+, halfwave–
Filtering Low-pass (adjusted to probe frequency), digital
filtering (bandwidth, frequency range)
Video filtering Smoothing (adjusted to the probe frequency range)

Programmable TCG
Number of points 16; one TCG (time-corrected gain) curve per channel
for focal laws

Storage
A-scan recording 6,000 A-scans per second (512-point 8-bit A-scan)
C-scan recording I, A, B, up to 10 kHz
Maximum file size Limited by the memory size

OMNI-M-PA1616 Module Specifications 409


410 Appendix B
Appendix C: OMNI-M-PA16128 Module Specifications

This appendix presents the technical specifications of the acquisition module model
OMNI-M-PA16128 (see Figure C-1 on page 411).

Figure C-1 The phased array module, model OMNI-M-PA16128

C.1 Acoustic Specifications

This section presents the acoustic specifications for the pulser, the receiver, and the
beam formation.

OMNI-M-PA16128 Module Specifications 411


Pulser
Supported voltage Low: 40 V
High: 80 V
Pulse width Adjustable from 30 ns to 500 ns, resolution of 2.5 ns
Fall time <10 ns
Pulse shape Negative square pulse
Output impedance <25 ohms

Receiver
Gain range 0–74 dB maximum input signal 1.32 Vp-p
Input impedance 75 ohms
Bandwidth of the system 0.75–18 MHz (–3 dB)

Beam formation
Scan type Azimuthal and linear
Aperture 16 elements
Number of elements 128 elements
Number of focal laws 256
Delay range transmission) 0–10 µs in 2.5-ns increments
Delay range reception) 0–10 µs in 2.5-ns increments

C.2 Acquisition Specifications

This section presents the acquisition specifications on frequency, data display, and
synchronization.

Digitizing frequency 100 MHz (10 bits)


A-scan (acquisition) Up to 6,000 A-scans per second (512-point, 8-bit
A-scan)
Maximum pulsing rate Up to 10 kHz (C-scan)
Depth in material 59.8 meters in steel (longitudinal wave), 10 ms with
compression
0.49 meter in steel (longitudinal wave), 81.9 µs
without compression

412 Appendix C
Display
Refresh rate A-scan: 60 Hz; S-scan: 20–30 Hz
Envelope (echo-dynamic mode) Yes; volume-corrected S-scan (30 Hz)

Synchronization
On internal clock 1 Hz to 10 kHz
External pace Yes
On encoder On 2 axes; from 1 to 65,536 steps

C.3 Data Specifications

This section presents the data specifications on processing, TCG, and storage.

Processing
Number of data points Up to 8,000
Real-time averaging 2, 4, 8, and 16
Rectification RF, full wave, halfwave+, halfwave–
Filtering Low-pass (adjusted to probe frequency), digital
filtering (bandwidth, frequency range)
Video filtering Smoothing (adjusted to the probe frequency range)

Programmable TCG
Number of points 16; one TCG (time-corrected gain) curve per channel
for focal laws

Storage
A-scan recording 6,000 A-scans per second (512-point 8-bit A-scan)
C-scan recording I, A, B, up to 10 kHz
Maximum file size Limited by the memory size

OMNI-M-PA16128 Module Specifications 413


414 Appendix C
Appendix D: OMNI-M-PA16128PR Module Specifications

This appendix presents the technical specifications of the acquisition module model
OMNI-M-PA16128PR (see Figure D-1 on page 415).

Figure D-1 The phased array module, model OMNI-M-PA16128PR

D.1 Acoustic Specifications

This section presents the acoustic specifications for the pulser, the receiver, and the
beam formation.

OMNI-M-PA16128PR Module Specifications 415


Pulser
Supported voltage Low: 40 V
High: 80 V
Pulse width Adjustable from 30 ns to 500 ns, resolution of 2.5 ns
Fall time <10 ns
Pulse shape Negative square pulse
Output impedance <25 ohms

Receiver
Gain range 0–74 dB maximum input signal 1.32 Vp-p
Input impedance 50 ohms (pulse-echo channel)
150 ohms (pitch and catch channel)
Bandwidth of the system 0.75–18 MHz (–3 dB)

Beam formation
Scan type Azimuthal and linear
Aperture 16 elements
Number of elements 128 elements
Number of focal laws 256
Delay range transmission) 0–10 µs in 2.5-ns increments
Delay range reception) 0–10 µs in 2.5-ns increments

D.2 Acquisition Specifications

This section presents the acquisition specifications on frequency, data display, and
synchronization.

Digitizing frequency 100 MHz (10 bits)


A-scan (acquisition) Up to 6,000 A-scans per second (512-point, 8-bit
A-scan)
Maximum pulsing rate Up to 10 kHz (C-scan)
Depth in material 59.8 meters in steel (longitudinal wave), 10 ms with
compression
0.49 meter in steel (longitudinal wave), 81.9 µs
without compression

416 Appendix D
Display
Refresh rate A-scan: 60 Hz; S-scan: 20–30 Hz
Envelope (echo-dynamic mode) Yes; volume-corrected S-scan (30 Hz)

Synchronization
On internal clock 1 Hz to 10 kHz
External pace Yes
On encoder On 2 axes; from 1 to 65,536 steps

D.3 Data Specifications

This section presents the data specifications on processing, TCG, and storage.

Processing
Number of data points Up to 8,000
Real-time averaging 2, 4, 8, and 16
Rectification RF, full wave, halfwave+, halfwave–
Filtering Low-pass (adjusted to probe frequency), digital
filtering (bandwidth, frequency range)
Video filtering Smoothing (adjusted to the probe frequency range)

Programmable TCG
Number of points 16; one TCG (time-corrected gain) curve per channel
for focal laws

Storage
A-scan recording 6,000 A-scans per second (512-point 8-bit A-scan)
C-scan recording I, A, B, up to 10 kHz
Maximum file size Limited by the memory size

OMNI-M-PA16128PR Module Specifications 417


418 Appendix D
Appendix E: OMNI-M-PA3232 Module Specifications

This appendix presents the technical specifications of the acquisition module model
OMNI-M-PA3232 (see Figure E-1 on page 419).

Figure E-1 The phased array module, model OMNI-M-PA3232

E.1 Acoustic Specifications

This section presents the acoustic specifications for the pulser, the receiver, and the
beam formation.

OMNI-M-PA3232 Module Specifications 419


Pulser
Supported voltage Low: 50 V
Medium: 100 V
High: 200 V
Pulse width Adjustable from 30 ns to 500 ns, in steps of 2.5 ns,
resolution of 5 ns or ±10%, the greatest value
Fall time <5 ns
Pulse shape Negative square pulse
Output impedance <3 ohms

Receiver
Gain range 0–74 dB, in steps of 0.1 dB, maximum input signal
1.1 Vp-p
Input impedance 50 ohms
Bandwidth of the system 0.53–23 MHz, ±10% (–3 dB)

Beam formation
Scan type Azimuthal and linear
Aperture 32 elements
Number of elements 32 elements
Number of focal laws 256
Delay range transmission) 0–10 µs in 2.5-ns increments
Delay range reception) 0–10 µs in 2.5-ns increments

E.2 Acquisition Specifications


This section presents the acquisition specifications on frequency, data display, and
synchronization.

Digitizing frequency 100 MHz (10 bits)


A-scan (acquisition) Up to 6,000 A-scans per second (512-point, 8-bit
A-scan)
Maximum pulsing rate Up to 10 kHz (C-scan)
Depth in material 59.8 meters in steel (longitudinal wave), 10 ms with
compression
0.49 meter in steel (longitudinal wave), 81.9 µs
without compression

420 Appendix E
Display
Refresh rate A-scan: 60 Hz; S-scan: 20–30 Hz
Envelope (echo-dynamic mode) Yes; volume-corrected S-scan (30 Hz)

Synchronization
On internal clock 1 Hz to 10 kHz
External pace Yes
On encoder On 2 axes; from 1 to 65,536 steps

E.3 Data Specifications

This section presents the data specifications on processing, TCG, and storage.

Processing
Number of data points Up to 8,000
Real-time averaging 2, 4, 8, and 16
Rectification RF, full wave, halfwave+, halfwave–
Filtering Low-pass (adjusted to probe frequency), digital
filtering (bandwidth, frequency range)
Video filtering Smoothing (adjusted to the probe frequency range)

Programmable TCG
Number of points 16; one TCG (time-corrected gain) curve per channel
for focal laws

Storage
A-scan recording 6,000 A-scans per second (512-point 8-bit A-scan)
C-scan recording I, A, B, up to 10 kHz
Maximum file size Limited by the memory size

OMNI-M-PA3232 Module Specifications 421


422 Appendix E
Appendix F: OMNI-M-PA32128 Module Specifications

This appendix presents the technical specifications of the acquisition module model
OMNI-M-PA32128 (see Figure F-1 on page 423).

Figure F-1 The phased array module, model OMNI-M-PA32128

F.1 Acoustic Specifications

This section presents the acoustic specifications for the pulser, the receiver, and the
beam formation.

OMNI-M-PA32128 Module Specifications 423


Pulser
Supported voltage Low: 45 V
High: 90 V
Pulse width Adjustable from 30 ns to 500 ns, in steps of 2.5 ns,
resolution of 5 ns or ±10%, the greatest value
Fall time <5 ns
Pulse shape Negative square pulse
Output impedance <30 ohms

Receiver
Gain range 0–74 dB, in steps of 0.1 dB, maximum input signal
1.25 Vp-p
Input impedance 50 ohms
Bandwidth of the system 0.53–21 MHz, ±10% (–3 dB)

Beam formation
Scan type Azimuthal and linear
Aperture 32 elements
Number of elements 128 elements
Number of focal laws 256
Delay range transmission) 0–10 µs in 2.5-ns increments
Delay range reception) 0–10 µs in 2.5-ns increments

F.2 Acquisition Specifications

This section presents the acquisition specifications on frequency, data display, and
synchronization.

Digitizing frequency 100 MHz (10 bits)


A-scan (acquisition) Up to 6,000 A-scans per second (512-point, 8-bit
A-scan)
Maximum pulsing rate Up to 10 kHz (C-scan)
Depth in material 59.8 meters in steel (longitudinal wave), 10 ms with
compression
0.49 meter in steel (longitudinal wave), 81.9 µs
without compression

424 Appendix F
Display
Refresh rate A-scan: 60 Hz; S-scan: 20–30 Hz
Envelope (echo-dynamic mode) Yes; volume-corrected S-scan (30 Hz)

Synchronization
On internal clock 1 Hz to 10 kHz
External pace Yes
On encoder On 2 axes; from 1 to 65,536 steps

F.3 Data Specifications

This section presents the data specifications on processing, TCG, and storage.

Processing
Number of data points Up to 8,000
Real-time averaging 2, 4, 8, and 16
Rectification RF, full wave, halfwave+, halfwave–
Filtering Low-pass (adjusted to probe frequency), digital
filtering (bandwidth, frequency range)
Video filtering Smoothing (adjusted to the probe frequency range)

Programmable TCG
Number of points 16; one TCG (time-corrected gain) curve per channel
for focal laws

Storage
A-scan recording 6,000 A-scans per second (512-point 8-bit A-scan)
C-scan recording I, A, B, up to 10 kHz
Maximum file size Limited by the memory size

OMNI-M-PA32128 Module Specifications 425


426 Appendix F
Appendix G: OMNI-M-PA32128PR Module Specifications

This appendix presents the technical specifications of the acquisition module model
OMNI-M-PA32128PR (see Figure G-1 on page 427).

Figure G-1 The phased array module, model OMNI-M-PA32128PR

G.1 Acoustic Specifications

This section presents the acoustic specifications for the pulser, the receiver, and the
beam formation.

OMNI-M-PA32128PR Module Specifications 427


Pulser
Supported voltage Low: 45 V
High: 90 V
Pulse width Adjustable from 30 ns to 500 ns, in steps of 2.5 ns,
resolution of 5 ns or ±10%, the greatest value
Fall time <5 ns
Pulse shape Negative square pulse
Output impedance <30 ohms

Receiver
Gain range 0–74 dB, in steps of 0.1 dB, maximum input signal
1.3 Vp-p (pulse-echo channel) and 0.9 Vp-p (pitch and
catch channel)
Input impedance 50 ohms (pulse-echo channel) and 150 ohms (pitch
and catch channel)
Bandwidth of the system 0.53–21 MHz, ±10% (–3 dB)

Beam formation
Scan type Azimuthal and linear
Aperture 32 elements
Number of elements 128 elements
Number of focal laws 256
Delay range transmission) 0–10 µs in 2.5-ns increments
Delay range reception) 0–10 µs in 2.5-ns increments

G.2 Acquisition Specifications


This section presents the acquisition specifications on frequency, data display, and
synchronization.

Digitizing frequency 100 MHz (10 bits)


A-scan (acquisition) Up to 6,000 A-scans per second (512-point, 8-bit
A-scan)
Maximum pulsing rate Up to 10 kHz (C-scan)
Depth in material 59.8 meters in steel (longitudinal wave), 10 ms with
compression
0.49 meter in steel (longitudinal wave), 81.9 µs
without compression

428 Appendix G
Display
Refresh rate A-scan: 60 Hz; S-scan: 20–30 Hz
Envelope (echo-dynamic mode) Yes; volume-corrected S-scan (30 Hz)

Synchronization
On internal clock 1 Hz to 10 kHz
External pace Yes
On encoder On 2 axes; from 1 to 65,536 steps

G.3 Data Specifications

This section presents the data specifications on processing, TCG, and storage.

Processing
Number of data points Up to 8,000
Real-time averaging 2, 4, 8, and 16
Rectification RF, full wave, halfwave+, halfwave–
Filtering Low-pass (adjusted to probe frequency), digital
filtering (bandwidth, frequency range)
Video filtering Smoothing (adjusted to the probe frequency range)

Programmable TCG
Number of points 16; one TCG (time-corrected gain) curve per channel
for focal laws

Storage
A-scan recording 6,000 A-scans per second (512-point 8-bit A-scan)
C-scan recording I, A, B, up to 10 kHz
Maximum file size Limited by the memory size

OMNI-M-PA32128PR Module Specifications 429


430 Appendix G
List of Figures

Figure 2-1 S-scan interpolation ............................................................................................. 7


Figure 2-2 Views for three inspection groups .................................................................... 8
Figure 2-3 Eight A-scan views for eight inspection groups ............................................. 9
Figure 2-4 Example of the Focal Law Wizard .................................................................. 10
Figure 2-5 Example for sensitivity calibration ................................................................. 11
Figure 2-6 Groups to inspect two sides of a weld or to cover two zones at once ....... 14
Figure 3-1 Scan axis ruler in B-scan (left) and C-scan (right) views ............................... 16
Figure 3-2 Index axis ruler in C-scan (left) and S-scan (right) views ............................. 16
Figure 3-3 Amplitude axis ruler in A-scan (top) and sensitivity calibration (bottom)
views .................................................................................................................... 17
Figure 3-4 Ultrasound axis ruler in wedge delay calibration (top), S-scan (left), and
A-scan (right) views ........................................................................................... 18
Figure 3-5 Palette function displayed in two multiple view configurations for one
group (left) and two groups (right) .................................................................. 19
Figure 3-6 VPA (top) and Angle (bottom) function ruler in the sensitivity calibration
view ..................................................................................................................... 20
Figure 3-7 Red outline for the Gate start, Width, and Threshold option buttons ....... 21
Figure 3-8 Dark pink for the ultrasound ruler and the UT Unit option button .......... 21
Figure 3-9 Three reading outlined red and one outlined dark pink ............................. 22
Figure 7-1 The list of menus ................................................................................................ 37
Figure 7-2 The Template list in the Report submenu ...................................................... 40
Figure 7-3 Gate A on the signal and A%, A^, and A/ information ............................... 44
Figure 7-4 Gate A on the signal and AdBA information ................................................ 45
Figure 7-5 Gate A on the signal and AdBR information ................................................. 46
Figure 7-6 Corrosion inspection result, and T and ML information ............................. 47
Figure 7-7 A-scan signal and %(r), %(m), and %(m-r) information .............................. 48
Figure 7-8 Gate A on the signal and U(r), U(m), and U(m-r) information ................... 49
Figure 7-9 A-scan signal and %(Ur) information ............................................................. 50
Figure 7-10 A-scan signal and E%, E^, and E-6dB information ....................................... 51
Figure 7-11 Diagram of the RA, PA, DA, ViA, and VsA information ............................. 53

List of Figures 431


Figure 7-12 Diagram of the LA and SA information ......................................................... 54
Figure 7-13 RF mode .............................................................................................................. 63
Figure 7-14 HW+ rectification ............................................................................................... 63
Figure 7-15 HW– rectification ............................................................................................... 64
Figure 7-16 FW rectification .................................................................................................. 64
Figure 7-17 A (A-scan) views for four groups (left) and A-S-[C] views for three
groups (right) ...................................................................................................... 71
Figure 7-18 Description of the source codes ....................................................................... 72
Figure 7-19 The Group list of the Probe/Part > Select submenu ...................................... 73
Figure 7-20 The group angle at the top right corner of each A-scan view ..................... 74
Figure 7-21 Highlighted title bar of the view on the left to show the group selection . 75
Figure 7-22 Groups 1 and 2 linked with MultiGate, and groups 3 and 4 linked with
MultiGain ............................................................................................................ 76
Figure 7-23 The amplitude values at cursor position ........................................................ 78
Figure 7-24 Example of a color palette ................................................................................ 82
Figure 7-25 A-scan envelope curve ...................................................................................... 84
Figure 7-26 All Laws source .................................................................................................. 85
Figure 7-27 Normal source .................................................................................................... 85
Figure 7-28 Highest source .................................................................................................... 86
Figure 7-29 The Group list of the Probe/Part > Select submenu ...................................... 88
Figure 7-30 Highlighted title bar of the view on the left to show the group selection . 89
Figure 7-31 The probe reference point measurement ........................................................ 91
Figure 7-32 Probe orientation on the wedge ....................................................................... 93
Figure 7-33 The primary offset measurement .................................................................... 93
Figure 7-34 The height of the first element ......................................................................... 94
Figure 7-35 Offsets and skew angles .................................................................................... 95
Figure 7-36 Sectorial scanning .............................................................................................. 98
Figure 7-37 Linear scanning .................................................................................................. 98
Figure 7-38 Depth scanning .................................................................................................. 98
Figure 7-39 A gate resized on one side .............................................................................. 103
Figure 7-40 A gate moved elsewhere in the view ............................................................ 103
Figure 7-41 The DAC curve ................................................................................................. 108
Figure 7-42 Description of the source codes ..................................................................... 109
Figure 8-1 Setting the hour parameter ............................................................................. 116
Figure 8-2 Setting the half-day period ............................................................................. 116
Figure 8-3 Setting the year parameter .............................................................................. 117
Figure 8-4 The Save Mode list ........................................................................................... 118
Figure 8-5 The Destination list .......................................................................................... 118
Figure 8-6 A green grid is displayed when Green is selected in the Grid list ........... 121
Figure 8-7 The Select Key list ............................................................................................ 123
Figure 8-8 The Assign Key list .......................................................................................... 124
Figure 8-9 The five submenus of the User menu ........................................................... 124

432 List of Figures


Figure 8-10 The Select Key list ............................................................................................ 125
Figure 8-11 The Assign key list for the digital inputs ..................................................... 126
Figure 8-12 The list of color palette types ......................................................................... 131
Figure 8-13 The palette on the side of the A-scan view .................................................. 131
Figure 8-14 Selecting the TOFD-type color palette .......................................................... 132
Figure 8-15 The Thickness submenu of the Gate/Alarm menu ..................................... 133
Figure 8-16 Selecting the depth-type color palette .......................................................... 134
Figure 8-17 The depth palette display modes .................................................................. 134
Figure 8-18 Opening the file manager for the color palette files ................................... 135
Figure 8-19 The Color Palette Manager ............................................................................. 136
Figure 8-20 The Auto Program option .............................................................................. 137
Figure 8-21 The Law File Manager .................................................................................... 138
Figure 8-22 The list of scan types ....................................................................................... 139
Figure 8-23 Buttons to include information in the report ............................................... 141
Figure 8-24 The User Field submenu option buttons ...................................................... 141
Figure 8-25 The Label and Content user fields in a report ............................................. 142
Figure 8-26 Note options ..................................................................................................... 142
Figure 8-27 The header note (top) and the footer note (bottom) in the report .............. 143
Figure 8-28 The report submenu options .......................................................................... 144
Figure 8-29 The Acquisition Module section .................................................................... 147
Figure 8-30 The dialog box requesting a key number ..................................................... 147
Figure 8-31 The Network Connections icon ..................................................................... 149
Figure 8-32 The Local Area Connection Status dialog box (Windows XP) .................. 149
Figure 8-33 The Properties dialog box for the selected connection (Windows XP) .... 150
Figure 8-34 The Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties dialog box (Windows XP) ..... 151
Figure 8-35 The Computer Management window (Windows XP) ............................... 152
Figure 8-36 The New User dialog box (Windows XP) .................................................... 153
Figure 8-37 The Omniscan Properties dialog box (Windows XP) ................................. 154
Figure 8-38 The Tools menu ................................................................................................ 155
Figure 8-39 The Folder Options dialog box (Windows XP) ........................................... 155
Figure 8-40 The Permissions for Omniscan dialog box (Windows XP) ........................ 156
Figure 8-41 The Select Users or Groups dialog box (Windows XP) .............................. 157
Figure 8-42 The Permissions for Omniscan dialog box (Windows XP) ........................ 158
Figure 8-43 The Network and Dial-up Connections icon ............................................... 160
Figure 8-44 The Local Area Connection Status dialog box (Windows 2000) ............... 160
Figure 8-45 The Properties dialog box for the selected connection (Windows 2000) . 161
Figure 8-46 The Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties dialog box (Windows 2000) .. 162
Figure 8-47 The Users and Passwords dialog box (Windows 2000) ............................. 163
Figure 8-48 The Local Users and Groups window (Windows 2000) ............................ 164
Figure 8-49 The New User dialog box (Windows 2000) ................................................. 165
Figure 8-50 The Omniscan Properties dialog box (Windows 2000) .............................. 166
Figure 8-51 The Permissions for OmniScan dialog box (Windows 2000) .................... 167

List of Figures 433


Figure 8-52 The Select Users or Groups dialog box (Windows 2000) ........................... 168
Figure 8-53 The Permissions for Omniscan dialog box (Windows 2000) ..................... 169
Figure 8-54 The DHCP option button ................................................................................ 171
Figure 8-55 Remote computer connection ........................................................................ 171
Figure 9-1 The File Manager areas ................................................................................... 174
Figure 9-2 The status boxes ............................................................................................... 175
Figure 9-3 The File Type list of the File Manager ........................................................... 175
Figure 9-4 The parent folder icon ..................................................................................... 177
Figure 9-5 The Setup folder (left) and its parent folder (User) [right] ......................... 177
Figure 9-6 The source pane highlighted .......................................................................... 178
Figure 9-7 The destination list .......................................................................................... 179
Figure 9-8 The list of file storage locations ..................................................................... 180
Figure 9-9 File Manager to save a setup file ................................................................... 180
Figure 9-10 The list of modes to save data ........................................................................ 181
Figure 9-11 File Name option button ................................................................................. 182
Figure 9-12 The list of file storage locations ..................................................................... 183
Figure 9-13 The list of setup files in the File Manager .................................................... 184
Figure 9-14 The list of file storage locations ..................................................................... 185
Figure 9-15 The File Type list .............................................................................................. 186
Figure 9-16 The list of file storage locations ..................................................................... 187
Figure 9-17 The the list of image files and the image preview in the File Manager ... 188
Figure 9-18 The list of file storage locations ..................................................................... 189
Figure 9-19 The list of reports and the report preview in the File Manager ................ 190
Figure 9-20 The list of file storage locations ..................................................................... 191
Figure 9-21 The list of file storage locations ..................................................................... 192
Figure 9-22 The Setup Lock button in the File Manager ................................................. 193
Figure 9-23 Available submenus for a locked setup ........................................................ 194
Figure 9-24 Access to the Main menu after unlocking a setup ...................................... 195
Figure 9-25 The locked setup information in the File Manager ..................................... 196
Figure 10-1 The Defines parameter for probe and wedge definition ............................ 198
Figure 10-2 The Probe Definition Manager ...................................................................... 199
Figure 10-3 The probe reference point measurement ...................................................... 200
Figure 10-4 The Defines parameter for probe and wedge definition ............................ 201
Figure 10-5 The Probe Definition Manager ...................................................................... 202
Figure 10-6 The Defines option in the Select list .............................................................. 203
Figure 10-7 New wedge serial number ............................................................................. 204
Figure 10-8 Wedge parameters ........................................................................................... 205
Figure 10-9 The primary offset measurement .................................................................. 206
Figure 10-10 The secondary offset ........................................................................................ 206
Figure 10-11 The height of the first element ....................................................................... 207
Figure 10-12 The list of predefined and custom-defined wedges ................................... 207
Figure 10-13 The Defines parameter for probe and wedge definition ............................ 208

434 List of Figures


Figure 10-14 List of wedges in the Wedge Definition Manager ...................................... 209
Figure 10-15 The Receiver parameters in the UT menu .................................................... 211
Figure 10-16 The Gate parameters ....................................................................................... 212
Figure 10-17 Gate A on the ball signal ................................................................................. 212
Figure 10-18 Part definition parameters and list of materials .......................................... 213
Figure 11-1 Three calibration cases .................................................................................... 215
Figure 11-2 Calibration block with curvatures ................................................................. 216
Figure 11-3 The Select Mode step of the calibration wizard .......................................... 217
Figure 11-4 The Select AScan step of the calibration wizard ......................................... 217
Figure 11-5 The Set Radius 1 and 2 step of the calibration wizard ............................... 217
Figure 11-6 The Set Gate A on Radius 1 step of the calibration wizard ....................... 218
Figure 11-7 The Accept step of the calibration wizard ................................................... 218
Figure 11-8 Calibration block with calibration defects ................................................... 219
Figure 11-9 The Select Mode step of the calibration wizard .......................................... 220
Figure 11-10 The Select AScan step of the calibration wizard ......................................... 220
Figure 11-11 Setting the velocity calibration on depth ..................................................... 221
Figure 11-12 The Set Depth 1 and 2 step of the calibration wizard ................................ 221
Figure 11-13 The Set Gate A on Depth 1 step of the calibration wizard ........................ 222
Figure 11-14 The Accept step of the calibration wizard ................................................... 222
Figure 11-15 Calibration block with two thicknesses ........................................................ 223
Figure 11-16 The Select Mode step of the calibration wizard .......................................... 223
Figure 11-17 Accept step of the calibration wizard ........................................................... 224
Figure 11-18 Three calibration cases .................................................................................... 225
Figure 11-19 Calibration block with curvatures ................................................................. 226
Figure 11-20 Ultrasound unit settings ................................................................................. 227
Figure 11-21 Wedge delay calibration mode ...................................................................... 227
Figure 11-22 The Set Radius A step of the calibration wizard ......................................... 228
Figure 11-23 Setting gate A on each side of the signal ...................................................... 228
Figure 11-24 Building the signal envelope for the wedge delay calibration .................. 229
Figure 11-25 The wedge delay calibrated using radii ....................................................... 230
Figure 11-26 Calibration block with calibration defects ................................................... 231
Figure 11-27 Ultrasound unit settings ................................................................................. 231
Figure 11-28 Wedge delay calibration mode ...................................................................... 232
Figure 11-29 The Set Depth A step of the calibration wizard .......................................... 232
Figure 11-30 The Set Gate A on Depth A step of the calibration wizard ....................... 233
Figure 11-31 Building the signal envelope for the wedge delay calibration .................. 233
Figure 11-32 The wedge delay calibrated using radii ....................................................... 234
Figure 11-33 Calibration block with two thicknesses ........................................................ 235
Figure 11-34 Ultrasound unit settings ................................................................................. 236
Figure 11-35 Wedge delay calibration mode ...................................................................... 236
Figure 11-36 Wedge delay calibration on a thickness ....................................................... 237
Figure 11-37 Calibration block with a calibration defect .................................................. 238

List of Figures 435


Figure 11-38 Display list ........................................................................................................ 239
Figure 11-39 The Select Mode of the sensitivity calibration wizard ............................... 240
Figure 11-40 The Set Reference Amplitude step of the sensitivity calibration wizard 240
Figure 11-41 The Set Gate A on Echo A step of the calibration wizard .......................... 241
Figure 11-42 The Set Compensation Gain step of the calibration wizard ...................... 241
Figure 11-43 Building the signal envelope for the sensitivity calibration ...................... 242
Figure 11-44 The sensitivity calibration is inside the tolerance. ...................................... 243
Figure 11-45 Calibration block with a calibration defect .................................................. 244
Figure 11-46 Display list ........................................................................................................ 244
Figure 11-47 The Select Mode of the sensitivity calibration wizard ............................... 245
Figure 11-48 The Set Reference Amplitude step of the sensitivity calibration wizard 246
Figure 11-49 The Set Gate A on Echo A step of the calibration wizard .......................... 246
Figure 11-50 The Set Compensation Gain step of the calibration wizard ...................... 247
Figure 11-51 Building the signal envelope for the sensitivity calibration ...................... 247
Figure 11-52 The sensitivity calibration is inside the tolerance. ...................................... 248
Figure 11-53 Sensitivity calibration block ........................................................................... 249
Figure 11-54 The Select Mode of the sensitivity calibration wizard ............................... 250
Figure 11-55 Reference amplitude and tolerance for sensitivity calibration ................. 251
Figure 11-56 Gate A on the back wall signal ...................................................................... 252
Figure 11-57 The Set Compensation Gain step of the calibration wizard ...................... 252
Figure 11-58 The signal calibrated for sensitivity .............................................................. 253
Figure 11-59 Calibration blocks for the TCG calibration .................................................. 254
Figure 11-60 Starting the TCG calibration ........................................................................... 254
Figure 11-61 The Set Reference Amplitude step of the TCG calibration wizard .......... 255
Figure 11-62 The Set Gate A on Echo step of the TCG Calibration Wizard ................... 255
Figure 11-63 Adding a TCG point ........................................................................................ 256
Figure 11-64 Keep on building the TCG curve or accept it .............................................. 256
Figure 11-65 The list of encoder types ................................................................................. 257
Figure 11-66 The Select Encoder step of the encoder calibration wizard ....................... 257
Figure 11-67 The Set Origin step of the encoder calibration wizard ............................... 258
Figure 11-68 The Set Distance step of the encoder calibration wizard ........................... 258
Figure 12-1 Electronic linear scan for a weld inspection ................................................. 262
Figure 12-2 The Main menu ................................................................................................ 263
Figure 12-3 The list of predefined wedges ........................................................................ 264
Figure 12-4 Setting the gate ................................................................................................. 265
Figure 12-5 Gate A on each side of the signal ................................................................... 266
Figure 12-6 Building the signal envelope for the wedge delay calibration .................. 267
Figure 12-7 The wedge delay calibrated ............................................................................ 268
Figure 12-8 Sensitivity calibration ...................................................................................... 269
Figure 12-9 The calibration block on one side to guide the probe motion ................... 270
Figure 12-10 Building the signal envelope for the sensitivity calibration ...................... 271
Figure 12-11 The sensitivity calibrated ................................................................................ 272

436 List of Figures


Figure 12-12 Gain and time-base range for 60° linear scanning ...................................... 273
Figure 12-13 Setting the inspection gate ............................................................................. 274
Figure 12-14 The X-axis value ............................................................................................... 275
Figure 12-15 Scan and index offsets ..................................................................................... 276
Figure 12-16 The four reading fields ................................................................................... 277
Figure 12-17 Distances with regard to the reference point ............................................... 278
Figure 12-18 Electronic sectorial scan for a weld inspection ............................................ 279
Figure 12-19 The Main menu ................................................................................................ 281
Figure 12-20 The list of predefined wedges ........................................................................ 282
Figure 12-21 Setting the gate ................................................................................................. 283
Figure 12-22 Gate A on each side of the signal .................................................................. 284
Figure 12-23 Building the signal envelope for the wedge delay calibration .................. 285
Figure 12-24 The wedge delay calibrated ........................................................................... 286
Figure 12-25 Sensitivity calibration ...................................................................................... 287
Figure 12-26 The calibration block on one side to guide the probe motion ................... 288
Figure 12-27 Building the signal envelope for the sensitivity calibration ...................... 289
Figure 12-28 The sensitivity calibrated ................................................................................ 290
Figure 12-29 Gain and time-base range for sectorial scanning ........................................ 291
Figure 12-30 Setting the inspection gate ............................................................................. 292
Figure 12-31 The X-axis value ............................................................................................... 293
Figure 12-32 Scan and index offsets ..................................................................................... 294
Figure 12-33 The four reading fields ................................................................................... 295
Figure 12-34 Distances with regard to the reference point ............................................... 296
Figure 12-35 Electronic linear scan for two angles using two groups of focal laws ..... 297
Figure 12-36 The Main menu ................................................................................................ 298
Figure 12-37 Selecting a group ............................................................................................. 299
Figure 12-38 The list of predefined wedges ........................................................................ 300
Figure 12-39 Setting the gate ................................................................................................. 301
Figure 12-40 Gate A on each side of the signal .................................................................. 302
Figure 12-41 Building the signal envelope for the wedge delay calibration .................. 303
Figure 12-42 The wedge delay calibrated ........................................................................... 304
Figure 12-43 Sensitivity calibration ...................................................................................... 305
Figure 12-44 The calibration block on one side to guide the probe motion ................... 306
Figure 12-45 Building the signal envelope for the sensitivity calibration ...................... 307
Figure 12-46 The sensitivity calibrated ................................................................................ 308
Figure 12-47 Gain and time-base range for 60° linear scanning ...................................... 309
Figure 12-48 Setting the inspection gate ............................................................................. 310
Figure 12-49 The highlighted title bar of the selected group ........................................... 311
Figure 12-50 The X-axis value ............................................................................................... 312
Figure 12-51 Scan and index offsets ..................................................................................... 313
Figure 12-52 The four reading fields ................................................................................... 314
Figure 12-53 Distances with regard to the reference point ............................................... 315

List of Figures 437


Figure 12-54 Two electronic sectorial scans using two groups of focal laws ................. 316
Figure 12-55 The Main menu ................................................................................................ 318
Figure 12-56 Selecting a group .............................................................................................. 319
Figure 12-57 The list of predefined wedges ........................................................................ 320
Figure 12-58 Setting the gate ................................................................................................. 321
Figure 12-59 Gate A on each side of the signal ................................................................... 322
Figure 12-60 Building the signal envelope for the wedge delay calibration .................. 323
Figure 12-61 The wedge delay calibrated ............................................................................ 324
Figure 12-62 Sensitivity calibration ...................................................................................... 325
Figure 12-63 The calibration block on one side to guide the probe motion ................... 326
Figure 12-64 Building the signal envelope for the sensitivity calibration ...................... 327
Figure 12-65 The sensitivity calibrated ................................................................................ 328
Figure 12-66 Gain and time-base range for sectorial scanning ........................................ 329
Figure 12-67 Setting the inspection gate .............................................................................. 330
Figure 12-68 The highlighted title bar of the selected group ........................................... 331
Figure 12-69 The X-axis value ............................................................................................... 332
Figure 12-70 Scan and index offsets ..................................................................................... 333
Figure 12-71 The four reading fields .................................................................................... 334
Figure 12-72 Distances with regard to the reference point ............................................... 335
Figure 12-73 Electronic sectorial scan for flaw detection .................................................. 336
Figure 12-74 The Main menu ................................................................................................ 338
Figure 12-75 The list of predefined wedges ........................................................................ 339
Figure 12-76 Setting the gate ................................................................................................. 340
Figure 12-77 Gate A on each side of the signal ................................................................... 341
Figure 12-78 Building the signal envelope for the wedge delay calibration .................. 342
Figure 12-79 The wedge delay calibrated ............................................................................ 343
Figure 12-80 Sensitivity calibration ...................................................................................... 344
Figure 12-81 The calibration block on one side to guide the probe motion ................... 345
Figure 12-82 Building the signal envelope for the sensitivity calibration ...................... 346
Figure 12-83 The sensitivity calibrated ................................................................................ 347
Figure 12-84 Gain and time-base range for sectorial scanning ........................................ 348
Figure 12-85 Setting the inspection gate .............................................................................. 349
Figure 12-86 Corrosion detection setup .............................................................................. 352
Figure 12-87 The Main menu ................................................................................................ 353
Figure 12-88 The list of predefined wedges ........................................................................ 354
Figure 12-89 Building the signal envelope for the sensitivity calibration ...................... 355
Figure 12-90 The sensitivity calibrated ................................................................................ 356
Figure 12-91 Back-wall signal ............................................................................................... 357
Figure 12-92 Setting the inspection gate .............................................................................. 358
Figure 12-93 The X-axis value ............................................................................................... 360
Figure 12-94 Scan and index offsets ..................................................................................... 361
Figure 12-95 The four reading fields .................................................................................... 362

438 List of Figures


Figure 13-1 The Alarm list ................................................................................................... 366
Figure 13-2 The alarm Condition list ................................................................................. 367
Figure 13-3 The Output list ................................................................................................. 368
Figure 13-4 The possible alarm pitch ................................................................................. 368
Figure 13-5 The zoom bar inside a ruler ........................................................................... 369
Figure 13-6 The list of zoom options ................................................................................. 370
Figure 13-7 Example of options for the A-scan zoom option ........................................ 370
Figure 13-8 No zooming selected ....................................................................................... 371
Figure 13-9 The General submenu options ....................................................................... 372
Figure 13-10 The Geometry list ............................................................................................ 373
Figure 13-11 Gate A parameters ........................................................................................... 374
Figure 13-12 Gate A options ................................................................................................. 374
Figure 13-13 Gate I options ................................................................................................... 374
Figure 13-14 Source codes for gate A .................................................................................. 375
Figure 13-15 Curve list ........................................................................................................... 376
Figure 13-16 The first point of the DAC curve ................................................................... 377
Figure 13-17 Edit mode options ........................................................................................... 377
Figure 13-18 The DAC curve on the next signal ................................................................ 378
Figure 13-19 The Envelope list .............................................................................................. 379
Figure 13-20 Verification of the DAC curve ........................................................................ 379
Figure 13-21 Selecting TCG in the Curve list ...................................................................... 380
Figure 13-22 Edit mode options ........................................................................................... 380
Figure 13-23 The first point of the TCG curve .................................................................... 381
Figure 13-24 The Envelope list .............................................................................................. 382
Figure 13-25 An envelope with peaks at 80% ..................................................................... 382
Figure 13-26 The Encoder option button ............................................................................ 383
Figure 13-27 The Source list button ..................................................................................... 384
Figure 13-28 The option buttons of the scanning area ...................................................... 384
Figure 13-29 The Set 80% button .......................................................................................... 386
Figure 13-30 The UT > Advanced submenu options ......................................................... 386
Figure 13-31 The first list of four reading fields ................................................................. 387
Figure 13-32 Adding a group ................................................................................................ 388
Figure 13-33 The newly created group selected ................................................................. 389
Figure 13-34 Removing a group ........................................................................................... 389
Figure 13-35 Groups 1 and 2 linked with MultiGate, and groups 3 and 4 linked with
MultiGain .......................................................................................................... 390
Figure 13-36 Linking group 3 to group 2 ............................................................................ 392
Figure 13-37 Linking groups with the MultiGate parameters ......................................... 392
Figure 13-38 Groups 2, 3, and 4 linked with the MultiGate parameters ........................ 393
Figure 13-39 Unlinking group 3 ........................................................................................... 394
Figure 13-40 The empty defect table at the bottom of the views ..................................... 394
Figure 13-41 Selecting an entry in the defect table ............................................................ 396

List of Figures 439


Figure 13-42 Entries accompanied by comments marked with an asterisk ................... 397
Figure 13-43 The Save Mode list ........................................................................................... 398
Figure A-1 The BNC (left) and the phased array (right) probe connectors .................... 402
Figure A-2 The phased array probe connector guide pins ................................................ 404
Figure A-3 The grille and the filter of the OMNI-M-PA32xx model ............................... 405
Figure B-1 The phased array module, model OMNI-M-PA1616 ..................................... 407
Figure C-1 The phased array module, model OMNI-M-PA16128 ................................... 411
Figure D-1 The phased array module, model OMNI-M-PA16128PR .............................. 415
Figure E-1 The phased array module, model OMNI-M-PA3232 ..................................... 419
Figure F-1 The phased array module, model OMNI-M-PA32128 ................................... 423
Figure G-1 The phased array module, model OMNI-M-PA32128PR .............................. 427

440 List of Figures


List of Tables

Table 1 Function key chart ................................................................................................. 28


Table 2 Menu structure chart ............................................................................................ 33
Table 3 Correspondence of controls between the mouse and the main control area 60
Table 4 Groups in view configurations ............................................................................ 77
Table 5 RGB color codes ................................................................................................... 127
Table 6 Link parameters ................................................................................................... 391

List of Tables 441


442 List of Tables
Index

A OMNI-M-PA3232 model 420


A-B view, number of groups 70 acquisition modules 5
A-B-C view, number of groups 70 connectors 402
A-B-S view, number of groups 70 conventional ultrasound 6
A-C-[C] view, number of groups 70 dimensions 401
acoustic specifications fan filter cleaning 405
beam formation general specifications 401
OMNI-M-PA16128 model 412 OMNI-M-PA16128 model specifications
OMNI-M-PA16128PR model 416 411
OMNI-M-PA1616 model 408 OMNI-M-PA16128PR model specifica-
OMNI-M-PA32128 model 424 tions 415
OMNI-M-PA32128PR model 428 OMNI-M-PA1616 model specifications
OMNI-M-PA3232 model 420 407
pulser OMNI-M-PA32128 model specifications
OMNI-M-PA16128 model 412 423
OMNI-M-PA16128PR model 416 OMNI-M-PA32128PR model specifica-
tions 427
OMNI-M-PA1616 model 408
OMNI-M-PA3232 model specifications
OMNI-M-PA32128 model 424
419
OMNI-M-PA32128PR model 428
operating temperature 401
OMNI-M-PA3232 model 420
options 146
receiver
programming 147
OMNI-M-PA16128 model 412
probe recognition 401
OMNI-M-PA16128PR model 416
relative humidity 401
OMNI-M-PA1616 model 408
removal, caution 403
OMNI-M-PA32128 model 424
replacement 401, 403
OMNI-M-PA32128PR model 428
storage temperature 401

Index 443
weight 401 destination pane 174
acquisition specifications file path boxes 174
display source pane 174
OMNI-M-PA16128 model 413 status boxes 175
OMNI-M-PA16128PR model 417 A-scan
OMNI-M-PA1616 model 409 acquisition
OMNI-M-PA32128 model 425 OMNI-M-PA16128 model 412
OMNI-M-PA32128PR model 429 OMNI-M-PA16128PR model 416
OMNI-M-PA3232 model 421 OMNI-M-PA1616 model 408
synchronization OMNI-M-PA32128 model 424
OMNI-M-PA16128model 413 OMNI-M-PA32128PR model 428
OMNI-M-PA1612PR model 417 OMNI-M-PA3232 model 420
OMNI-M-PA1616 model 409 number of groups 70
OMNI-M-PA32128 model 425 recording
OMNI-M-PA32128PR model 429 OMNI-M-PA16128 model 413
OMNI-M-PA3232 model 421 OMNI-M-PA16128PR model 417
acquisition unit See OmniScan MX OMNI-M-PA1616 model 409
adding a group 387 OMNI-M-PA32128 model 425
administrative password 57 OMNI-M-PA32128PR model 429
Advanced submenu 65 OMNI-M-PA3232 model 421
Alarm/Gate function key 30 refresh rate
Alarm/Zone function key 30 OMNI-M-PA16128 model 413
Alarms submenu 104 OMNI-M-PA16128PR model 417
alarms, setting 365 OMNI-M-PA1616 model 409
amplitude axis 16 OMNI-M-PA32128 model 425
angle ruler 19 OMNI-M-PA32128PR model 429
aperture OMNI-M-PA3232 model 421
OMNI-M-PA16128 model 412 view options, configuring 121
OMNI-M-PA16128PR model 416 averaging, real-time
OMNI-M-PA1616 model 408 OMNI-M-PA16128 model 413
OMNI-M-PA32128 model 424 OMNI-M-PA16128PR model 417
OMNI-M-PA32128PR model 428 OMNI-M-PA1616 model 409
OMNI-M-PA3232 model 420 OMNI-M-PA32128 model 425
Aperture submenu 99 OMNI-M-PA32128PR model 429
Area submenu 68 OMNI-M-PA3232 model 421
areas, File Manager 174 axes
amplitude 16

444 Index
index 16 new parameters 10
palette 18 procedures 215
scan 15 sensitivity 238
ultrasound 17 angle-beam scan, radius 243
VPA or angle 19 angle-beam scan, side-drilled hole 238
Axis submenu 112 zero-degree scan 249
B sound velocity 215
depth 219
Balance function key 30
radius 216
bandwidth
thickness 222
OMNI-M-PA16128 model receiver 412
TCG 253
OMNI-M-PA16128PR model receiver
416 wedge delay 224
OMNI-M-PA1616 model receiver 408 depth 230
OMNI-M-PA32128 model receiver 424 radius 226
OMNI-M-PA32128PR model receiver thickness 235
428 Calibration function key 30
OMNI-M-PA3232 model receiver 420 Calibration menu 36, 110
beam formation specifications Axis 112
OMNI-M-PA16128 model 412 Code 113
OMNI-M-PA16128PR model 416 Phased Array 110
OMNI-M-PA1616 model 408 TCG 113
OMNI-M-PA32128 model 424 capacity, memory 14
OMNI-M-PA32128PR model 428 captive screws, caution 403
OMNI-M-PA3232 model 420 cautions
Beam submenu 65, 100 acquisition module removal 403
blue outline captive screws 403
reading fields changing
cursor, data 22 color palettes
B-scan amplitude 130
view options, configuring 121 depth 133
B-scan, number of groups 70 TOFD 132
building a defect table 394 company logo 145
buttons, option 3 all reports 146
C single report 145
calibration display 119
encoder 256 characteristics, new 6

Index 445
Characterize submenu 95 yellow, gate I 21, 22
characterizing a probe 210 palette ruler 18
charts, reference 27 scan axis 15
function keys 27 ultrasound axis 17
cleaning, fan filter 405 default unit 8
Clear function key 31 VPA ruler 19
clock, internal synchronization commands
OMNI-M-PA16128 model 413 first-level 3
OMNI-M-PA16128PR model 417 second-level 3
OMNI-M-PA1616 model 409 third-level 3
OMNI-M-PA32128 model 425 fourth-level 4
OMNI-M-PA32128PR model 429 company logo, changing 145
OMNI-M-PA3232 model 421 all reports 146
Code submenu 113 single report 145
Code-Based Calibration Wizard 113 Computer Management window (Win-
codes, reading fields 43 dows XP) 152
color Configuration submenu 97
codes 126 configuration, cursor 55
gates 101 configuring
scheme 57 A-scan view options 121
Color Palette Manager 135 B-scan view options 121
color palettes See palettes C-scan view options 122
Color submenu 81 DAC curve, manually 376
colors defect table 394
amplitude axis 16 digital input 125
angle ruler 19 display 119
index axis 16 FFT view options 122
outlines 20 gain reference levels 385
blue, cursor 22 OmniScan
green, cursor 22 Windows 2000 169
green, gate B 21, 22 Windows XP 158
pink, dark 21, 22 remote computer
pink, light 21, 22 Windows 2000 159
purple 21, 22 Windows XP 148
red, cursor 22 report 140
red, gate A 21, 22 TCG curve, manually 380

446 Index
thickness C-scan 371 recording
User menu 123 OMNI-M-PA16128 model 413
connecting OMNI-M-PA16128PR model 417
a phased array probe 404 OMNI-M-PA1616 model 409
hardware OMNI-M-PA32128 model 425
Windows 2000 159 OMNI-M-PA32128PR model 429
Windows XP 148 OMNI-M-PA3232 model 421
OmniScan directly to a computer Cursor function key 30
Windows 2000 159 cursors
OmniScan MX directly to a computer displaying 120
Windows XP 148 outlined reading fields 22
OmniScan to a network 170 selection and configuration 55
connectors
Cursors submenu 55
acquisition module 402
connecting a phased array probe 403 D
P1 402 DAC 78
PHASED ARRAY 402 configuring the curve manually 376
R1 402 example 378
conventional ultrasound options 106
acquisition modules 6 point 378
conventions 3 verifying the curve 378
corrosion detection, electronic linear focus- DAC/TCG submenu 106
ing 351 data
creating exportation, defect table 57
color palettes 126 files
file format 127 opening 184
rules 129 saving 181
shared folder on the remote computer importing into TomoView 398
Windows 2000 166 number of points
Windows XP 154 OMNI-M-PA16128 model 413
user account on the remote computer OMNI-M-PA16128PR model 417
Windows 2000 162 OMNI-M-PA1616 model 409
Windows XP 152 OMNI-M-PA32128 model 425
C-scan OMNI-M-PA32128PR model 429
configuring C-scan view options 122
OMNI-M-PA3232 model 421
configuring thickness C-scan 371
saving on the remote computer 171
number of groups 70
Windows 2000 170

Index 447
Windows XP 159 OMNI-M-PA1616 model 408
specifications OMNI-M-PA32128 model 424
processing OMNI-M-PA32128PR model 428
OMNI-M-PA16128 model 413 OMNI-M-PA3232 model 420
OMNI-M-PA16128PR model 417 transmission
OMNI-M-PA1616 model 409 OMNI-M-PA16128 model 412
OMNI-M-PA32128 model 425 OMNI-M-PA16128PR model 416
OMNI-M-PA32128PR model 429 OMNI-M-PA1616 model 408
OMNI-M-PA3232 model 421 OMNI-M-PA32128 model 424
programmable TCG OMNI-M-PA32128PR model 428
OMNI-M-PA16128 model 413 OMNI-M-PA3232 model 420
OMNI-M-PA16128PR model 417 delay, wedge calibration 224
OMNI-M-PA1616 model 409 depth in material
OMNI-M-PA32128 model 425 OMNI-M-PA16128 model 412
OMNI-M-PA32128PR model 429 OMNI-M-PA16128PR model 416
OMNI-M-PA3232 model 421 OMNI-M-PA1616 model 408
storage OMNI-M-PA32128 model 424
OMNI-M-PA16128 model 413 OMNI-M-PA32128PR model 428
OMNI-M-PA16128PR model 417 OMNI-M-PA3232 model 420
OMNI-M-PA1616 model 409 descriptions
OMNI-M-PA32128 model 425 function keys 29
OMNI-M-PA32128PR model 429 menu 37
OMNI-M-PA3232 model 421 reading field codes 43
Data submenu 69 destination pane (File Manager) 174
date, setting 58, 115 dialog boxes
defect table 56 Folder Options (Windows XP) 155
building 394 Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties
configuring 394 Windows 2000 162
data exportation 57 Windows XP 151
defining Local Area Connection Status
part to inspect 213 Windows 2000 160
probe 197 Windows XP 149
wedge 203 New User
delay range Windows 2000 165
reception Windows XP 153
OMNI-M-PA16128 model 412 Omniscan Properties
OMNI-M-PA16128PR model 416 Windows 2000 166

448 Index
Windows XP 154 Display function key 30
Permissions for Omniscan 156 Display menu 34, 70
Windows 2000 167, 168 Color 81
Windows XP 157 Properties 83
Properties, for the selected connection Rulers 77
Windows 2000 160 Selection 70
Windows XP 149 Zoom 79
Select Users or Groups distance-amplitude correction See DAC
Windows 2000 168
E
Windows XP 157
elements (total number)
Users and Passwords (Windows 2000)
OMNI-M-PA16128 model 412
163
differences between acquisition modules 5 OMNI-M-PA16128PR model 416
OMNI-M-PA1616 model 408
digital input, configuring 125
digitizing frequency OMNI-M-PA32128 model 424
OMNI-M-PA16128 model 412 OMNI-M-PA32128PR model 428
OMNI-M-PA16128PR model 416 OMNI-M-PA3232 model 420
OMNI-M-PA1616 model 408 encoder
OMNI-M-PA32128 model 424 calibration 256
OMNI-M-PA32128PR model 428 setting up a scan using ~ 383
synchronization
OMNI-M-PA3232 model 420
OMNI-M-PA16128 model 413
dimensions, acquisition module 401
OMNI-M-PA16128PR model 417
display
OMNI-M-PA1616 model 409
changing 119
OMNI-M-PA32128 model 425
configuring 119
OMNI-M-PA32128PR model 429
cursors 120
OMNI-M-PA3232 model 421
gates 120
Encoder Calibration Wizard 112
grid 120
refresh rate Encoder submenu 66
OMNI-M-PA16128 model 413 envelope
OMNI-M-PA16128 model 413
OMNI-M-PA16128PR model 417
OMNI-M-PA16128PR model 417
OMNI-M-PA1616 model 409
OMNI-M-PA1616 model 409
OMNI-M-PA32128 model 425
OMNI-M-PA32128PR model 429 OMNI-M-PA32128 model 425
OMNI-M-PA32128PR model 429
OMNI-M-PA3232 model 421
OMNI-M-PA3232 model 421
TCG curve 120
Erase function key 31
Display Delay function key 29

Index 449
Export submenu 57 interface 174
exporting navigation 176
defect table data 57 moving inside the pane 176
probe 202 switching between panes 177
wedge 209 option buttons 175
external pace synchronization usage 173
OMNI-M-PA16128 model 413 using 173
OMNI-M-PA16128PR model 417 File menu 33, 37
OMNI-M-PA1616 model 409 File 37
OMNI-M-PA32128 model 425, 429 Format 41
OMNI-M-PA3232 model 421 Notes 42
EZView 60 Report 40
F User Field 42
fall time File submenu 37
OMNI-M-PA16128 model pulser 412 files
OMNI-M-PA16128PR model pulser 416 data files
opening 184
OMNI-M-PA1616 model pulser 408
.htm 139, 145
OMNI-M-PA32128 model pulser 424
image files
OMNI-M-PA32128PR model pulser 428
opening 186
OMNI-M-PA3232 model pulser 420
.jpg 38, 39
features of the OmniScan PA, new See new
features of the OmniScan PA .law 136
FFT view options, configuring 122 logo.jpg 145, 146
file multimedia files
File Manager opening 191
using 173 names 39, 40
Law File Manager 137 navigation in the File Manager 176
File function key 30 opening 182
file management procedures 173 .pal 82, 126
File Manager 59 path boxes (File Manager) 174
areas 174 .rdt 399
destination pane 174 report files
file path boxes 174 opening 189
source pane 174 screen capture 38
status boxes 175 selection in the File Manager 176
closing 178 setup files
opening 182

450 Index
size OMNI-M-PA3232 model 420
OMNI-M-PA16128 model 413 Folder Options dialog box (Windows XP)
OMNI-M-PA16128PR model 417 155
OMNI-M-PA1616 model 409 folders
OMNI-M-PA32128 model 425 navigation in the File Manager 176
OMNI-M-PA32128PR model 429 selection in the File Manager 176
OMNI-M-PA3232 model 421 Format submenu 41
.xml 129 format, color palette file 127
filter, cleaning 405 fourth-level commands 4
filtering Freeze function key 30
data frequency
OMNI-M-PA16128 model 413, 417 digitizing
OMNI-M-PA1616 model 409 OMNI-M-PA16128 model 412
OMNI-M-PA32128 model 425 OMNI-M-PA16128PR model 416
OMNI-M-PA32128PR model 429 OMNI-M-PA1616 model 408
OMNI-M-PA3232 model 421 OMNI-M-PA32128 model 424
video OMNI-M-PA32128PR model 428
OMNI-M-PA16128 model 413 OMNI-M-PA3232 model 420
OMNI-M-PA16128PR model 417 Frequency function key 30
OMNI-M-PA1616 model 409 function key, Group Selector 76, 90
OMNI-M-PA32128 model 425 function keys 27
OMNI-M-PA32128PR model 429 Alarm/Gate 30
OMNI-M-PA3232 model 421 Alarm/Zone 30
first-level commands 3 Balance 30
flashing gate 103 Calibration 30
flaw detection, 35° through 70° 336 chart 28
Focal Law Wizard 101 Clear 31
focal laws 100 colors
importing 136 green 27
Law File Manager 137 white 27
number of yellow 27
OMNI-M-PA16128 model 412 Cursor 30
OMNI-M-PA16128PR model 416 description 29
OMNI-M-PA1616 model 408 Display 30
OMNI-M-PA32128 model 424 Display Delay 29
OMNI-M-PA32128PR model 428 Erase 31

Index 451
File 30 outlined option buttons 20
Freeze 30 outlined reading fields 22
Frequency 30 position 102
Gain 29 using a mouse 103
Group Selector 31 using the option buttons and function
Phase Rotation 29 keys 102
Range 30 using the option buttons and Scroll
Set Reference 31 knob 102
Start/Stop 31 selection 101
Store/Print 31 general procedures 115
General submenu 61
G
green function key 27
gain green outline
range option buttons
OMNI-M-PA16128 model receiver 412 gate B 21
OMNI-M-PA16128PR model receiver reading fields
416 cursor, measurement 22
OMNI-M-PA1616 model receiver 408 gate B 22
OMNI-M-PA32128 model receiver 424 grid, displaying 120
OMNI-M-PA32128PR model receiver Group Selector function key 31, 76, 90
428 Group Wizard 97
OMNI-M-PA3232 model receiver 420 groups
reference levels adding 387
configuring 385 A-scan and B-scan view 70
scanning using ~ 385
A-scan and C-scan(s) view 70
Gain function key 29
A-scan view 70
Gate submenu 101
A-scan, B-scan, and C-scan view 70
Gate/Alarm menu 35, 101
A-scan, B-scan, and S-scan view 70
Alarms 104
B-scan view 70
DAC/TCG 106
C-scan view 70
Gate 101
definition 88
Output 105
function key for selection 76, 90
Thickness 109
link 392
gates
linking 390
colors 101
number per view configuration 76
displaying 120
removing 387, 389
flashing 103
S-scan view 70

452 Index
unlink 393 OMNI-M-PA32128PR model 429
unlinking 390 OMNI-M-PA3232 model 421
Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties dia-
H
log box
.htm files 139, 145 Windows 2000 162
humidity, relative, acquisition module 401 Windows XP 151
I introduction 1
icons conventions 3
Network and Dial-up Connections 160 manual organization 1
Network Connections 149 J
parent folder 177
.jpg files 38, 39
image files, opening 186
importing K
focal law file 136 keys, function See function keys
OmniScan data into TomoView 398 keys, OmniScan MX 173
probe 200 L
wedge 208
Law File Manager 137
index axis 16
.law files 136
input impedance
law, Snell’s 92, 205
OMNI-M-PA16128 model receiver 412
laws See focal laws
OMNI-M-PA16128PR model receiver
Laws submenu 100
416
linking
OMNI-M-PA1616 model receiver 408
a procedure to a setup 139
OMNI-M-PA32128 model receiver 424
groups 390
OMNI-M-PA32128PR model receiver
linking groups 392
428
list, option 4
OMNI-M-PA3232 model receiver 420
loading a palette 135
input, configuring the digital 125
Local Area Connection Status dialog box
inspection, defining the part 213 Windows 2000 160
inspection-related procedures 365
Windows XP 149
interface
Local Users and Groups window (Win-
File Manager 174
dows 2000) 164
internal clock synchronization
locking a setup file 192
OMNI-M-PA16128 model 413
logo, changing 145
OMNI-M-PA16128PR model 417
all reports 146
OMNI-M-PA1616 model 409
single report 145
OMNI-M-PA32128 model 425

Index 453
logo.jpg file 145, 146 Tools (Windows XP) 155
M User 31, 36, 114
configuration 123
managers
UT 34, 61
Color Palette Manager 135
Utilities 33, 57
File Manager 59
using 173 models, supported 5
modes, operating 58
Law File Manager 137
Phased Array 25
Probe Definition Manager 90, 91
Wedge Definition Manager 90, 92 TomoView 25
manual Ultrasound 25
conventions 3 modules, acquisition See acquisition mod-
ules
manual organization 1
mouse
material 96
gate positioning 103
measurement unit, selecting 119
multimedia files, opening 191
memory capacity 14
memory size N
OMNI-M-PA16128 model 413 names, file 39, 40
OMNI-M-PA16128PR model 417 navigation, File Manager 176
OMNI-M-PA1616 model 409 moving inside the pane 176
OMNI-M-PA32128 model 425 switching between panes 177
OMNI-M-PA32128PR model 429 NDT (nondestructive testing) 1
OMNI-M-PA3232 model 421 Network and Dial-up Connections icon
menu button 3 160
menu structure 31 Network Connections icon 149
chart 33 Network submenu 60
menus networking
See also submenus configuring the OmniScan
Calibration 36, 110 Windows 2000 169
descriptions 37 Windows XP 158
Display 34, 70 connecting the OmniScan to a network
File 33, 37 170
Gate/Alarm 35, 101 Windows 2000 connection 159
PGM Probe 35, 97 Windows XP connection 148
Probe/Part 35, 87 new features of the OmniScan PA 5
Reading 33, 43 memory capacity 14
Scan 34, 66 new characteristics 6

454 Index
phased array acquisition modules 5 inspection-related procedures 365
software options 13 probe management procedures 197
New User dialog box reference charts 27
Windows 2000 165 software 1
Windows XP 153 installation 23
Notes submenu 42 menu descriptions 37
notices, safety overview 15
cautions
TomoView functions 13
acquisition module removal 403
upgrading 23
captive screws 403
software options 13
O startup 25
OMNI-M-PA16128 model specifications OmniScan Phased Array Software See
411 OmniScan PA: software
OMNI-M-PA16128PR model specifications Omniscan Properties dialog box
415 Windows 2000 166
OMNI-M-PA1616 model specifications 407 Windows XP 154
OMNI-M-PA32128 model specifications opening files 182
423 data files 184
OMNI-M-PA32128PR model specifications image files 186
427 multimedia files 191
OMNI-M-PA3232 model specifications 419 report files 189
OmniScan MX 1 setup files 182
keys 173 operating modes 58
OmniScan PA Phased Array 25
acquisition modules 401 TomoView 25
connectors 402 Ultrasound 25
general specifications 401 operation, OmniScan See OmniScan opera-
replacement 401 tion
introduction 1 option buttons 3
new features 5 File Manager 175
operation 115 Close 175
See also specific procedure entries Copy 176
calibration procedures 215 Create Folder 175
file management procedures 173 Delete 176
general procedures 115 File Type 175
inspection procedures with ready- Move 176
made setups 261

Index 455
Rename 176 OMNI-M-PA1616 model 409
Select 176 OMNI-M-PA32128 model 425
Select All 176 OMNI-M-PA32128PR model 429
gate positioning 102 OMNI-M-PA3232 model 421
outlined 20 .pal files 82, 126
green gate 21 palette
pink, dark ultrasound unit 21 Color Palette Manager 135
pink, light ultrasound unit 21 display 18
purple ultrasound unit 21 palettes
changing
red gate 21
amplitude 130
yellow gate 21
depth 133
option list 4
TOFD 132
Options submenu 60
creating 126
options, acquisition modules 146
file format 127
programming 147
loading 135
options, software 13
rules 129
organization of the manual 1
panes, switching (File Manager) 177
outlined option buttons 20
parent folder icon 177
outlined reading fields 21
part
output impedance
defining 213
OMNI-M-PA16128 model pulser 412
material 96
OMNI-M-PA16128PR model pulser 416
Parts submenu 96
OMNI-M-PA1616 model pulser 408
password, administrative 57
OMNI-M-PA32128 model pulser 424
Permissions for Omniscan dialog box 156
OMNI-M-PA32128PR model pulser 428
Windows 2000 167, 168
OMNI-M-PA3232 model pulser 420
Windows XP 157
Output submenu 105
PGM Probe menu 35, 97
output, setting 367
Aperture 99
overlays 77
Beam 100
overview 15
Configuration 97
P Laws 100
P1 connector 402 Wizard (Focal Law Wizard) 101
pace, external synchronization Phase Rotation function key 29
OMNI-M-PA16128 model 413 phased array acquisition modules See
OMNI-M-PA16128PR model 417 acquisition modules
Phased Array Calibration Wizard 110

456 Index
PHASED ARRAY connector 402 Characterize 95
Phased Array operating mode 25 Parts 96
Phased Array submenu 110 Position 94
pink, dark outline Probe Definition Manager 91
option buttons Select 88
sound path ultrasound units 21 Wedge Definition Manager 92
reading fields
Wizard (Group Wizard) 97
sound path ultrasound units 22 procedures
pink, light outline See also specific procedure entries
option buttons
calibration 215
time ultrasound units 21
defining a wedge 203
reading fields
file management 173
time ultrasound units 22
points, number of (TCG) general 115
OMNI-M-PA16128 model 413 inspection with ready-made setups 261
OMNI-M-PA16128PR model 417 inspection-related 365
OMNI-M-PA1616 model 409 linking groups 392
OMNI-M-PA32128 model 425 linking to a setup 139
OMNI-M-PA32128PR model 429 probe management 197
OMNI-M-PA3232 model 421 replacing an acquisition module 403
Position submenu 94 unlinking groups 393
verifying options on an acquisition mod-
Pref. submenu 57
ule 146
PRF (pulse repetition frequency) 62
processing, data specifications
printing a report from a remote computer
OMNI-M-PA16128 model 413
144
probe OMNI-M-PA16128PR model 417
automatic recognition 401 OMNI-M-PA1616 model 409
characterizing 210 OMNI-M-PA32128 model 425
connecting a phased array probe 404 OMNI-M-PA32128PR model 429
defining 197 OMNI-M-PA3232 model 421
programming a new option on an acquisi-
exporting 202
tion module 147
importing 200
Properties dialog box, for the selected con-
management procedures 197 nection
Probe Definition Manager 90, 91 Windows 2000 160
selecting 200 Windows XP 149
Probe Definition Manager 90, 91 Properties submenu 83
Probe/Part menu 35, 87 pulse repetition frequency (PRF) 62

Index 457
pulse shape Range function key 30
OMNI-M-PA16128 model pulser 412 RD_FlawDetector_35-70SW.ops setup 336
OMNI-M-PA16128PR model pulser 416 RD_Linear0deg_corrosion_oneLine.ops
OMNI-M-PA1616 model pulser 408 setup 351
OMNI-M-PA32128 model pulser 424 RD_Linear60deg_oneLine.ops setup 261
OMNI-M-PA32128PR model pulser 428 RD_Sectorial_oneLine.ops setup 279, 316
OMNI-M-PA3232 model pulser 420 RD_Weld_1side_Linear.ops setup 297
pulse width 62 .rdt files 399
OMNI-M-PA16128 model pulser 412 reading fields
OMNI-M-PA16128PR model pulser 416 code description 43
OMNI-M-PA1616 model pulser 408 new 11
OMNI-M-PA32128 model pulser 424 outlined 21
OMNI-M-PA32128PR model pulser 428 blue cursor 22
OMNI-M-PA3232 model pulser 420 green cursor 22
pulser specifications green gate 22
OMNI-M-PA16128 model 412 pink, dark ultrasound unit 22
OMNI-M-PA16128PR model 416 pink, light ultrasound unit 22
OMNI-M-PA1616 model 408 purple ultrasound unit 22
OMNI-M-PA32128 model 424 red cursor 22
OMNI-M-PA32128PR model 428 red gate 22
OMNI-M-PA3232 model 420 yellow gate 22
Pulser submenu 62 Reading menu 33, 43
pulsing rate Cursors 55
OMNI-M-PA16128 model 412 Export 57
OMNI-M-PA16128PR model 416 Result 43
OMNI-M-PA1616 model 408 Table 56
OMNI-M-PA32128 model 424 ready-made setups for inspection proce-
OMNI-M-PA32128PR model 428 dures 261
OMNI-M-PA3232 model 420 corrosion detection 351
purple outline flaw detection 336
option buttons weld inspection 261
true depth ultrasound units 21 real-time averaging
reading fields OMNI-M-PA16128 model 413
true depth ultrasound units 22 OMNI-M-PA16128PR model 417
R OMNI-M-PA1616 model 409
R1 connector 402 OMNI-M-PA32128 model 425

458 Index
OMNI-M-PA32128PR model 429 OMNI-M-PA32128 model 425
OMNI-M-PA3232 model 421 OMNI-M-PA32128PR model 429
receiver specifications OMNI-M-PA3232 model 421
OMNI-M-PA16128 model 412 red outline
OMNI-M-PA16128PR model 416 option buttons
OMNI-M-PA1616 model 408 gate A 21
OMNI-M-PA32128 model 424 reading fields
OMNI-M-PA32128PR model 428 cursor, reference 22
OMNI-M-PA3232 model 420 gate A 22
Receiver submenu 62 reference charts 27
reception delay range function keys 27
OMNI-M-PA16128 model 412 menu structure 31
OMNI-M-PA16128PR model 416 Calibration menu 36
OMNI-M-PA1616 model 408 Display menu 34
OMNI-M-PA32128 model 424 File menu 33
OMNI-M-PA32128PR model 428 Gate/Alarm menu 35
OMNI-M-PA3232 model 420 PGM Probe menu 35
recording, A-scan Probe/Part menu 35
OMNI-M-PA16128 model 413 Reading menu 33
OMNI-M-PA16128PR model 417 Scan menu 34
OMNI-M-PA1616 model 409 User menu 31, 36
OMNI-M-PA32128 model 425 UT menu 34
OMNI-M-PA32128PR model 429 Utilities menu 33
OMNI-M-PA3232 model 421 refresh rate
recording, C-scan OMNI-M-PA16128 model 413
OMNI-M-PA16128 model 413 OMNI-M-PA16128PR model 417
OMNI-M-PA16128PR model 417 OMNI-M-PA1616 model 409
OMNI-M-PA1616 model 409 OMNI-M-PA32128 model 425
OMNI-M-PA32128 model 425 OMNI-M-PA32128PR model 429
OMNI-M-PA32128PR model 429 OMNI-M-PA3232 model 421
OMNI-M-PA3232 model 421 removing a group 387
rectification 63 removing acquisition modules, caution
rectification, data 403
OMNI-M-PA16128 model 413 replacement, acquisition module 401, 403
OMNI-M-PA16128PR model 417 Report submenu 40
OMNI-M-PA1616 model 409 Reports 140

Index 459
reports 40 using gain reference levels 385
configuring 140 scan axis 15
file names 40 Scan menu 34, 66
opening report files 189 Area 68
printing from a remote computer 144 Data 69
template 40 Encoder 66
Result submenu 43 Start 69
RGB color codes 127 Synchro 67
rulers 15, 77, 369 scan type
amplitude axis 16 OMNI-M-PA16128 model 412
angle 19 OMNI-M-PA16128PR model 416
index axis 16 OMNI-M-PA1616 model 408
palette 18 OMNI-M-PA32128 model 424
scan axis 15 OMNI-M-PA32128PR model 428
ultrasound axis 17 OMNI-M-PA3232 model 420
ultrasound unit screen
default 8 captures 38
selection 120 color and contrast 57
VPA 19 indoor use 57
Rulers submenu 77 outdoor use 57
rules, palette 129 screws (captive), caution 403
Scroll knob
S
gate positioning 102
safety notices second-level commands 3
cautions
Select submenu 88
acquisition module removal 403
Select Users or Groups dialog box
captive screws 403
Windows 2000 168
saving
Windows XP 157
data file 181
selecting
OmniScan data on the remote computer
measurement unit 119
171
probe 200
Windows 2000 170
ultrasound ruler unit 120
Windows XP 159
wedge 208
setup file 179
Selection submenu 70
scales See rulers
scan sensitivity calibration 238
setup using encoders 383 angle-beam scan, radius 243

460 Index
angle-beam scan, side-drilled hole 238 Snell’s law 92, 205
zero-degree scan 249 software See OmniScan PA: software
Service submenu 58 sound velocity calibration 215
Set Reference function key 31 depth 219
setting radius 216
alarm 365 thickness 222
date 58 source pane (File Manager) 174
date and time 115 specifications
output 367 acoustic
storage mode 117 OMNI-M-PA16128 model 411
time 58 OMNI-M-PA16128PR model 415
setup files OMNI-M-PA1616 model 407
locking and unlocking 192 OMNI-M-PA32128 model 423
opening 182 OMNI-M-PA32128PR model 427
saving 179 OMNI-M-PA3232 model 419
setup, linking a procedure to a 139 acquisition
setups OMNI-M-PA16128 model 412
RD_FlawDetector_35-70SW.ops 336 OMNI-M-PA16128PR model 416
RD_Linear0deg_corrosion_oneLine.ops OMNI-M-PA1616 model 408
351 OMNI-M-PA32128 model 424
RD_Linear60deg_oneLine.ops 261 OMNI-M-PA32128PR model 428
RD_Sectorial_oneLine.ops 279, 316 OMNI-M-PA3232 model 420
RD_Weld_1side_Linear.ops 297 data
ready-made 261 OMNI-M-PA16128 model 413
corrosion detection 351 OMNI-M-PA16128PR model 417
flaw detection 336 OMNI-M-PA1616 model 409
weld inspection 261 OMNI-M-PA32128 model 425
shared folder, creating 154 OMNI-M-PA32128PR model 429
Windows 2000 166 OMNI-M-PA3232 model 421
shortcuts 114 dimensions 401
smoothing general 401
OMNI-M-PA16128 model 413, 417 operating temperature 401
OMNI-M-PA1616 model 409 relative humidity 401
OMNI-M-PA32128 model 425 storage temperature 401
OMNI-M-PA32128PR model 429 weight 401
OMNI-M-PA3232 model 421 S-scan
number of groups 70

Index 461
refresh rate DAC/TCG 106
OMNI-M-PA16128 model 413 Data 69
OMNI-M-PA16128PR model 417 Encoder 66
OMNI-M-PA1616 model 409 Export 57
OMNI-M-PA32128 model 425 File 37
OMNI-M-PA32128PR model 429 Format 41
OMNI-M-PA3232 model 421 Gate 101
Start submenu 69 General 61
Start/Stop function key 31 Laws 100
startup, software 25 Network 60
status boxes (File Manager) 175 Notes 42
storage Options 60
data
Output 105
OMNI-M-PA16128 model 413
Parts 96
OMNI-M-PA16128PR model 417
Phased Array 110
OMNI-M-PA1616 model 409
Position 94
OMNI-M-PA32128 model 425
Pref. 57
OMNI-M-PA32128PR model 429
Properties 83
OMNI-M-PA3232 model 421
Pulser 62
mode 38
Receiver 62
setting 117
Report 40
Store/Print function key 31
Result 43
submenu buttons 3
Rulers 77
submenus
See also menus Select 88
Advanced 65 Selection 70
Alarms 104 Service 58
Aperture 99 Start 69
Area 68 Synchro 67
Axis 112 System 57
Beam 65, 100 Table 56
Characterize 95 TCG 113
Code 113 Thickness 109
Color 81 User Field 42
Configuration 97 Wizard (Focal Law Wizard) 101
Cursors 55 Wizard (Group Wizard) 97
Zoom 79

462 Index
supported models 5 temperature
Synchro submenu 67 operating, acquisition module 401
synchronization specifications storage, acquisition module 401
OMNI-M-PA161128PR model 417 template, reports 40
OMNI-M-PA16128 model 413 thickness C-scan, configuring 371
OMNI-M-PA1616 model 409 Thickness submenu 109
OMNI-M-PA32128 model 425 third-level commands 3
OMNI-M-PA32128PR model 429 time
OMNI-M-PA3232 model 421 setting 58, 115
System submenu 57 zone 58
time-corrected gain See TCG
T time-of-flight diffraction See TOFD
Table submenu 56 TOFD, changing the palette 132
table, defect 56 TomoView
TCG 78 functions 13
calibration 253 importing OmniScan data into 398
configuring the curve manually 380 operating mode 25
displaying 120 Tools menu (Windows XP) 155
displaying the curve 120 transmission delay range
number of points specification OMNI-M-PA16128 model 412
OMNI-M-PA16128 model 413 OMNI-M-PA16128PR model 416
OMNI-M-PA16128PR model 417 OMNI-M-PA1616 model 408
OMNI-M-PA1616 model 409 OMNI-M-PA32128 model 424
OMNI-M-PA32128 model 425 OMNI-M-PA32128PR model 428
OMNI-M-PA32128PR model 429 OMNI-M-PA3232 model 420
OMNI-M-PA3232 model 421 U
options 107
ultrasound axis 17
verifying the curve 381
colors 21
TCG Calibration Wizard 113
default unit 8
TCG submenu 113
Ultrasound operating mode 25
TCG, programmable specifications
ultrasound units
OMNI-M-PA16128 model 413
axis colors 21
OMNI-M-PA16128PR model 417
outlined option buttons 21
OMNI-M-PA1616 model 409
outlined reading fields 22
OMNI-M-PA32128 model 425
selection 120
OMNI-M-PA32128PR model 429 units
OMNI-M-PA3232 model 421

Index 463
acquisition See OmniScan MX OMNI-M-PA1616 model 409
measurement 119 OMNI-M-PA32128 model 425
ultrasound 120 OMNI-M-PA32128PR model 429
unlinking groups 390, 393 OMNI-M-PA3232 model 421
unlocking a setup file 192 voltage
upgrading OmniScan software 23 OMNI-M-PA16128 model pulser 412
user account, creating OMNI-M-PA16128PR model pulser 416
Windows 2000 162 OMNI-M-PA1616 model pulser 408
Windows XP 152 OMNI-M-PA32128 model pulser 424
User Field submenu 42 OMNI-M-PA32128PR model pulser 428
user fields 41 OMNI-M-PA3232 model pulser 420
User menu 31, 36, 114 VPA (virtual probe aperture) 80
configuration 123 VPA ruler 19
Users and Passwords dialog box (Win-
W
dows 2000) 163
UT menu 34, 61 wedge
defining 203
Advanced 65
delay calibration 224
Beam 65
General 61 depth 230
radius 226
Pulser 62
thickness 235
Receiver 62
Utilities menu 33, 57 exporting 209
importing 208
Network 60
selecting 208
Options 60
Wedge Definition Manager 90, 92
Pref. 57
Wedge Definition Manager 90, 92
Service 58
weight, acquisition module 401
System 57
weld inspection 261
V linear 60° 261
verifying linear two angles 297
DAC curve 378 sectorial 279, 316
options available on an acquisition mod-
white function key 27
ule 146 windows
TCG curve 381 Computer Management (Windows XP)
video filtering, data 152
OMNI-M-PA16128 model 413 Local Users and Groups (Windows 2000)
OMNI-M-PA16128PR model 417 164

464 Index
Windows CE 59 Y
Wizard submenu yellow function key 27
(Focal Law Wizard) 101 yellow outline
(Group Wizard) 97 option buttons
wizards gate I 21
Code-Based Calibration Wizard 113 reading fields
Encoder Calibration Wizard 112 gate I 22
Focal Law Wizard 101 Z
Group Wizard 97
zone, time 58
Phased Array Calibration Wizard 110
zoom bar 369
TCG Calibration Wizard 113
zoom function 369
X options 79
.xml file 129 using the mouse 369
without the mouse 369
Zoom submenu 79

Index 465
466 Index

Вам также может понравиться